Letters of Credit User Manual

Letters of Credit User Manual
Letters of Credit
Oracle FLEXCUBE Universal Banking
Release 12.0
[May] [2012]
Oracle Part Number E51527-01
Letters of Credit
Table of Contents
1.
ABOUT THIS MANUAL................................................................................................................................ 1-1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
2.
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................... 1-1
AUDIENCE .................................................................................................................................................. 1-1
ORGANIZATION .......................................................................................................................................... 1-1
CONVENTIONS USED IN THIS MANUAL ....................................................................................................... 1-2
GLOSSARY OF ICONS .................................................................................................................................. 1-2
RELATED DOCUMENTS ............................................................................................................................... 1-2
LETTERS OF CREDIT - AN OVERVIEW ................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2
FEATURES................................................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.3
OPERATIONS SUPPORTED ON LC................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.4
PROCESSING COMMISSIONS AND CHARGES ................................................................................................ 2-3
2.5
VARIATIONS SUPPORTED FOR AN LC.......................................................................................................... 2-3
2.5.1
Red Clause Letter of Credit ............................................................................................................... 2-3
2.5.2
Transferable and Non-transferable LCs ............................................................................................ 2-4
2.5.3
Revolving and Non revolving LCs ..................................................................................................... 2-4
2.5.4
Sight and Usance LC ......................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.5.5
Cash Collateral against an LC .......................................................................................................... 2-4
2.5.6
Availment against an LC.................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.5.7
Reports ............................................................................................................................................... 2-4
3.
MAINTENANCE............................................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2
MAINTAINING DOCUMENT DETAILS ........................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2.1
Specifying UDF Values ...................................................................................................................... 3-3
3.2.2
Operations on Document Maintenance Record ................................................................................. 3-4
3.3
MAINTAINING CLAUSE DETAILS ................................................................................................................ 3-5
3.3.1
Specifying UDF Values ...................................................................................................................... 3-6
3.3.2
Operations on a Clause Maintenance Record ................................................................................... 3-7
3.4
MAINTAINING GOODS DETAILS .................................................................................................................. 3-7
3.4.1
Specifying UDF Values ...................................................................................................................... 3-9
3.4.2
Operations on Goods Maintenance Record ..................................................................................... 3-10
3.5
MAINTAINING FREE FORMAT TEXT CODES .............................................................................................. 3-11
3.5.1
Specifying UDF Values .................................................................................................................... 3-12
3.5.2
Operations on FFT Maintenance Record ........................................................................................ 3-12
3.6
MAINTAINING INSURANCE COMPANY DETAILS ........................................................................................ 3-13
3.6.1
Specifying Company Details ............................................................................................................ 3-14
3.6.2
Specifying Account Details .............................................................................................................. 3-14
3.6.3
Specifying UDF Values .................................................................................................................... 3-14
3.6.4
Operations on Company Maintenance Record ................................................................................ 3-15
3.7
MAINTAINING IMPORT LICENSE EXPIRY DATE ......................................................................................... 3-16
3.7.1
Operations on Licence Expiry Date Record .................................................................................... 3-18
3.8
MAINTAINING EXCHANGE RATES FOR BILLS ........................................................................................... 3-18
3.8.1
Specifying Exchange Rate Maintenance .......................................................................................... 3-20
3.8.2
Specifying UDF Values .................................................................................................................... 3-21
3.8.3
Operations on Exchange Rate Type Maintenance Record ............................................................... 3-21
3.9
MAINTAINING INCO TERMS .................................................................................................................... 3-22
3.9.1
Specifying Document Details ........................................................................................................... 3-23
3.9.2
Specifying Document Details ........................................................................................................... 3-24
3.9.3
Operations on INCO Term Maintenance Record ............................................................................ 3-24
3.10 MAINTAINING OPEN INSURANCE POLICY DETAILS................................................................................... 3-24
3.10.1
Specifying Open Policy Details ....................................................................................................... 3-28
3.10.2
Operations on an Open Policy Record ............................................................................................ 3-29
3.11 BLACKLISTING LCS .................................................................................................................................. 3-29
3.12 MAINTAINING BRANCH PARAMETERS FOR LETTER OF CREDIT ................................................................ 3-30
4.
DEFINING PRODUCT ATTRIBUTES ........................................................................................................ 4-1
4.1
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2
CREATING LC PRODUCT............................................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2.1
Specifying Preferences for a Product ................................................................................................ 4-4
4.2.2
Specifying Accounting Roles ............................................................................................................ 4-16
4.2.3
Specifying Events ............................................................................................................................. 4-17
4.2.4
Specifying Branch and Currency ..................................................................................................... 4-18
4.2.5
Specifying Customer Details ............................................................................................................ 4-19
4.2.6
Specifying Commission Details........................................................................................................ 4-20
4.2.7
Specifying Free Format Text ........................................................................................................... 4-21
4.2.8
Specifying Tracer Details ................................................................................................................ 4-21
4.2.9
Specifying Charge Details ............................................................................................................... 4-22
4.2.10
Specifying Tax Details ..................................................................................................................... 4-23
4.2.11
Specifying MIS Details..................................................................................................................... 4-23
4.2.12
Setting Criteria for Status Change ................................................................................................... 4-24
4.2.13
Specifying UDF Details ................................................................................................................... 4-27
5.
PROCESSING LC CONTRACT ................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2
CAPTURING LC CONTRACT DETAILS.......................................................................................................... 5-2
5.2.1
Creating Contract .............................................................................................................................. 5-5
5.2.2
Uploading LCs ................................................................................................................................... 5-5
5.3
SPECIFYING CONTRACT DETAILS ............................................................................................................... 5-6
5.3.1
Main Tab............................................................................................................................................ 5-8
5.3.2
Preferences Tab ............................................................................................................................... 5-22
5.3.3
Parties Tab....................................................................................................................................... 5-31
5.3.4
Parties Limits Tab ............................................................................................................................ 5-37
5.3.5
Shipment Tab ................................................................................................................................... 5-48
5.3.6
Documents Tab ................................................................................................................................ 5-53
5.3.7
Advices Tab ...................................................................................................................................... 5-55
5.3.8
Tracers Tab ...................................................................................................................................... 5-59
5.4
VIEWING OFAC CHECK RESPONSE .......................................................................................................... 5-61
5.4.1
Viewing Different Versions of Contract ........................................................................................... 5-62
5.5
AUTHORIZING A CONTRACT ..................................................................................................................... 5-62
5.6
VIEWING LC CONTRACT .......................................................................................................................... 5-63
5.7
MULTILEVEL AUTHORIZATION OF A CONTRACT ...................................................................................... 5-67
5.8
CANCELING LC ........................................................................................................................................ 5-67
5.8.1
Procedure for Canceling LC ............................................................................................................ 5-67
5.8.2
Generating Cancellation Advice in SWIFT Format ......................................................................... 5-67
5.9
CLOSING AN LC........................................................................................................................................ 5-68
5.9.1
Procedure for Closing an LC ........................................................................................................... 5-68
5.10 REOPENING LC ......................................................................................................................................... 5-69
5.10.1
Procedure for Reopening LC ........................................................................................................... 5-69
5.11 REASSIGNING A CONTRACT TO ANOTHER USER ....................................................................................... 5-71
5.12 LIQUIDATING COMPONENTS ..................................................................................................................... 5-72
5.12.1
Authorizing a Contract .................................................................................................................... 5-73
6.
CAPTURING ADDITIONAL DETAILS ...................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2
CAPTURING DRAFT DETAILS ...................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.3
SPECIFYING SETTLEMENT INSTRUCTIONS ................................................................................................... 6-6
6.4
VIEWING EVENT DETAILS .......................................................................................................................... 6-7
6.4.1
Viewing the Accounting Entries Passed for the LC ........................................................................... 6-8
6.4.2
Viewing Advices Applicable to Contract ........................................................................................... 6-9
6.5
CAPTURING MIS DETAILS ........................................................................................................................ 6-10
6.6
DEFINING COMMISSION DETAILS ............................................................................................................. 6-10
6.7
DEFINING CHARGE DETAILS..................................................................................................................... 6-11
6.8
SPECIFYING TAX DETAILS ........................................................................................................................ 6-13
6.9
MAINTAINING COLLATERAL DETAILS ...................................................................................................... 6-13
6.10 LINKING CONTRACTS TO DEPOSITS AND ACCOUNTS ................................................................................ 6-15
6.11 VIEWING AMENDED DETAILS OF CONTRACT ........................................................................................... 6-17
6.12 SPECIFYING TRANSFER DETAILS .............................................................................................................. 6-18
6.13 CAPTURING UDF VALUES ........................................................................................................................ 6-19
6.14 SPECIFYING LOAN PREFERENCES ............................................................................................................. 6-19
6.15 SPLIT SETTLEMENT SCREEN ..................................................................................................................... 6-22
6.15.1
Specifying Settlement Split Master ................................................................................................... 6-23
6.15.2
Specifying Settlement Split Details .................................................................................................. 6-24
6.16 CAPTURING BROKERAGE DETAILS ........................................................................................................... 6-24
6.17 SPECIFYING DOCUMENT DETAILS ............................................................................................................. 6-28
6.18 VIEWING ALL MESSAGES.......................................................................................................................... 6-29
7.
MAKING AVAILMENT ................................................................................................................................ 7-1
7.1
INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2
CAPTURING AVAILMENT DETAILS.............................................................................................................. 7-1
7.2.2
Viewing Event Details ........................................................................................................................ 7-7
7.2.3
Specifying Collateral Details ........................................................................................................... 7-10
7.2.4
Maintaining Settlement Instructions ................................................................................................ 7-12
7.2.5
Viewing Advice Details .................................................................................................................... 7-26
7.2.6
Specifying Charge Details ............................................................................................................... 7-27
7.2.7
Specifying Commission Details........................................................................................................ 7-28
7.2.8
Specifying Tax Details ..................................................................................................................... 7-28
7.2.9
Authorizing Availment ..................................................................................................................... 7-29
7.3
VIEWING LC AVAILED ............................................................................................................................. 7-30
8.
AMENDING DETAILS OF LC ................................................................................................................... 8-33
8.1
INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................... 8-33
8.2
PROCEDURE FOR AMENDING LC .............................................................................................................. 8-33
8.2.1
Indicating Change of Value for a Field ............................................................................................. 8-3
8.2.2
Commission and Charges for Amendment ......................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.3
Amendment of an Unauthorized LC ................................................................................................... 8-3
8.2.4
Amending Import Pre-advice LC Contract ........................................................................................ 8-4
8.3
CONFIRMING LC AMENDMENT................................................................................................................... 8-5
8.3.1
Details Tab......................................................................................................................................... 8-6
8.3.2
Parties Tab......................................................................................................................................... 8-8
8.3.3
Advices Tab ...................................................................................................................................... 8-10
8.3.4
Specifying Collateral Details ........................................................................................................... 8-12
8.3.5
Authorizing Amendment Details ...................................................................................................... 8-13
8.3.6
Confirming Amended Details ........................................................................................................... 8-15
8.3.7
Amending details using the Contract screen .................................................................................... 8-15
8.3.8
Rejecting Amended Details .............................................................................................................. 8-18
8.4
VIEWING LC AMENDMENT ....................................................................................................................... 8-20
8.5
OPERATIONS ON CONFIRMATION RECORD ............................................................................................... 8-23
8.6
UPLOADING LC AMENDMENT .................................................................................................................. 8-23
9.
TRANSFERRING LC ..................................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1
SPECIFYING LC TRANSFER DETAILS .......................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1
Parties Tab......................................................................................................................................... 9-3
9.1.2
Documents Tab .................................................................................................................................. 9-5
9.1.3
Shipment Tab ..................................................................................................................................... 9-6
9.1.4
Parties Limit Tab ............................................................................................................................... 9-9
9.1.5
Note on Transfers made from Import and Export LCs .................................................................... 9-11
9.1.6
Authorizing LC Transfer .................................................................................................................. 9-12
9.1.7
Viewing Details of Transfers made to the LC .................................................................................. 9-12
10.
LIQUIDATION OF COMPONENTS OF LC......................................................................................... 10-1
10.1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 MAINTAINING ONLINE RECEIVABLE/PAYABLE DETAILS .......................................................................... 10-1
10.2.1
Liquidating Receivable Components of LC ..................................................................................... 10-2
10.2.2
Liquidating Receivable Components of LC Manually ..................................................................... 10-4
10.2.3
Specifying Details of Advices for Liquidation .................................................................................. 10-8
10.3 GENERATING ACK_TRACER AND CON_TRACER MANUALLY ........................................................... 10-9
11.
CREDIT LIMIT TRACKING FOR LC .................................................................................................. 11-1
11.1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.1.1
Specifying Whether Limit Tracking is Required .............................................................................. 11-1
12.
AUTOMATIC PROCESSES .................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................... 12-1
12.2 MAINTAINING BRANCH PARAMETERS ...................................................................................................... 12-1
12.2.1
Invoking LC Batch Process .............................................................................................................. 12-5
12.2.2
Automatic Events Executed During Beginning of Day (BOD) ........................................................ 12-6
12.2.3
Automatic Liquidation of Periodic Commission .............................................................................. 12-6
12.2.4
Automatic Reinstatement of LC ....................................................................................................... 12-7
12.2.5
Processes Run during End of Day (EOD) ....................................................................................... 12-8
12.2.6
Automatic Closure of LC ................................................................................................................. 12-8
12.2.7
LC Auto Closure Batch .................................................................................................................... 12-8
12.2.8
LC Automatic Status Update Batch ............................................................................................... 12-10
12.2.9
Status Change Batch Processing (CSDSTBTC) ............................................................................. 12-10
12.2.10
Automatic Accrual of Commission ............................................................................................. 12-11
12.2.11
Memo Accrual of Commission ................................................................................................... 12-12
12.2.12
Accrual Control Report ............................................................................................................. 12-12
12.2.13
Selection Options ....................................................................................................................... 12-12
12.2.14
Contents of Report ..................................................................................................................... 12-13
12.2.15
Generating Tracers .................................................................................................................... 12-13
12.2.16
Executing Tracer Generation Function ..................................................................................... 12-14
12.2.17
Straight Through Processing of SWIFT Messages .................................................................... 12-14
12.2.18
STP of MT710 - Advise of Third Bank’s Documentary Credit................................................... 12-15
12.2.19
STP of MT707 – Amendment to Documentary Credit................................................................ 12-19
12.2.20
STP of MT799 – Amendment of LC ........................................................................................... 12-21
12.2.21
STP of MT730 – Acknowledgement ........................................................................................... 12-22
12.2.22
STP of MT740 - Authorization to Reimburse ............................................................................. 12-23
12.2.23
STP of MT747 – Amendment to an Authorization to Reimburse ............................................... 12-27
12.2.24
STP of MT768 - Acknowledgement of a Guarantee Message .................................................... 12-29
13.
REPORTS .................................................................................................................................................. 13-1
13.1 INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.2 EXPIRED LCS WITH OUTSTANDING ITEMS REPORT .................................................................................. 13-1
13.2.1
Selection Options ............................................................................................................................. 13-2
13.2.2
Contents of Report ........................................................................................................................... 13-2
13.3 CLOSED LCS WITH OUTSTANDING ITEMS REPORT ................................................................................... 13-3
13.3.1
Contents of Report ........................................................................................................................... 13-5
13.4 LCS DUE TO EXPIRE REPORT ................................................................................................................... 13-6
13.4.1
Selection Options ............................................................................................................................. 13-6
13.4.2
Contents of Report ........................................................................................................................... 13-6
13.5 LCS DUE TO BE CLOSED REPORT ............................................................................................................. 13-7
13.5.1
Selection Options ............................................................................................................................. 13-8
13.5.2
Contents of the Report ..................................................................................................................... 13-8
13.6 COMMISSION DUE REPORT ....................................................................................................................... 13-9
13.6.1
Selection Options ........................................................................................................................... 13-10
13.6.2
Contents of Report ......................................................................................................................... 13-10
13.7 COMMISSION ACTIVITY REPORT ............................................................................................................ 13-11
13.7.1
Selection Options ........................................................................................................................... 13-12
13.7.2
Contents of Report ......................................................................................................................... 13-12
13.8 REPORT ON OPEN ENDED LCS ................................................................................................................ 13-14
13.8.1
Contents of the Report ................................................................................................................... 13-14
13.9 UNREPLIED TRACERS REPORT ................................................................................................................ 13-15
13.9.1
Contents of Report ......................................................................................................................... 13-16
13.10
CONFIRMED LC REPORT..................................................................................................................... 13-18
13.10.1
Selection Options ....................................................................................................................... 13-18
13.10.2
Contents of Report ..................................................................................................................... 13-18
13.11
OVERRIDES REPORT ........................................................................................................................... 13-19
13.11.1
Selection Options ....................................................................................................................... 13-20
13.11.2
Contents of Report ..................................................................................................................... 13-20
13.12
LC DAILY ACTIVITY JOURNAL REPORT ............................................................................................. 13-21
13.12.1
Selection Options ....................................................................................................................... 13-21
13.12.2
Contents of the Report ............................................................................................................... 13-21
13.13
ACCRUALS CONTROL REPORT- BASED ON CONTRACT ....................................................................... 13-22
13.13.1
Selection Options ....................................................................................................................... 13-23
13.13.2
Contents of Report ..................................................................................................................... 13-23
13.14
ACCRUALS CONTROL REPORT - BASED ON PRODUCT......................................................................... 13-24
13.14.1
Selection Options ....................................................................................................................... 13-25
13.14.2
Contents of Report ..................................................................................................................... 13-25
13.15
COMMISSION ACTIVITY REPORT ........................................................................................................ 13-25
13.15.1
Contents of Report ..................................................................................................................... 13-26
13.16
PROCESS EXCEPTION REPORT ............................................................................................................ 13-27
13.16.1
Selection Options ....................................................................................................................... 13-27
13.16.2
Contents of Report ..................................................................................................................... 13-27
14.
ANNEXURE A - ACCOUNTING ENTRIES FOR LCS ....................................................................... 14-1
14.1 ACCOUNTING ENTRIES FOR LCS............................................................................................................... 14-1
14.1.1
LC Events ......................................................................................................................................... 14-1
14.1.2
Amount Tags .................................................................................................................................... 14-2
14.1.3
Accounting Roles ............................................................................................................................. 14-4
14.2 EVENT-ACCOUNTING ENTRIES ................................................................................................................. 14-5
14.2.1
BISS: Booking of an import LC ....................................................................................................... 14-5
14.2.2
AVAL: Availment Under LC ............................................................................................................ 14-8
14.2.3
CLOS: Closure of an LC / Guarantee .............................................................................................. 14-8
14.2.4
REIN: Reinstatement of an LC / Guarantee ..................................................................................... 14-9
14.2.5
BADV: Advising an LC .................................................................................................................. 14-11
14.2.6
BCFM: Confirming an LC ............................................................................................................. 14-11
14.2.7
BPRE: Pre-advising an LC ............................................................................................................ 14-11
14.2.8
BANC: Advising and Confirming An LC ....................................................................................... 14-12
14.2.9
AMND: Amendment ....................................................................................................................... 14-12
14.2.10
AOCF: Amendment from Open to Open and Confirm ............................................................... 14-13
14.2.11
APAD: Amendment from Pre-advice to Advice ......................................................................... 14-13
14.2.12
APAC: Amendment from Pre-advice to Advice and Confirm .................................................... 14-13
14.2.13
14.2.14
14.2.15
14.2.16
14.2.17
14.2.18
14.2.19
14.2.20
14.2.21
14.2.22
14.2.23
14.2.24
14.2.25
14.2.26
15.
REVR: Reversal ......................................................................................................................... 14-13
ACCR: Accrual of Commission ................................................................................................. 14-13
CALC: Periodic Commission Calculation Date ........................................................................ 14-13
CLIQ: Liquidation of Commission ............................................................................................. 14-13
ROPN: Reopening of an LC ....................................................................................................... 14-13
CANC: Cancellation of an LC ................................................................................................... 14-14
TRGN: Generation of Tracers ................................................................................................... 14-14
AATC: Amendment from Advice to Confirm .............................................................................. 14-15
RASN: Reassign an LC .............................................................................................................. 14-15
Transfer of an LC ....................................................................................................................... 14-15
RAVL: Reversal of Availment .................................................................................................... 14-16
BKSG: Booking of Shipping Guarantee..................................................................................... 14-16
CASG: Cancellation of Shipping Guarantee ............................................................................. 14-16
APRE: Amendment of LC with Pre-advice ................................................................................ 14-16
ANNEXURE B – EVENTS, ADVICES AND SDES FOR LC ............................................................... 15-1
15.1 EVENT - ADVICES FOR LCS ...................................................................................................................... 15-1
15.2 LC ADVICES ............................................................................................................................................. 15-1
15.2.22
LC Messages .............................................................................................................................. 15-34
15.2.23
Generating Multiple Copies of LC Instrument........................................................................... 15-36
15.2.24
Generating Fax 700/707 LC Confirmation Mail Message Copy to Counterparty ..................... 15-36
15.2.25
LC event - Messages .................................................................................................................. 15-38
15.2.26
BISS: Booking of an Import LC ................................................................................................. 15-38
15.2.27
AVAL: Availment under LC ....................................................................................................... 15-38
15.2.28
CLOS: Closure of an LC / Guarantee ........................................................................................ 15-38
15.2.29
REIN: Reinstatement of an LC / Guarantee ............................................................................... 15-38
15.2.30
BADV: Advising an LC .............................................................................................................. 15-39
15.2.31
BCFM: Confirming an LC ......................................................................................................... 15-39
15.2.32
BPRE: Pre-advising an LC ........................................................................................................ 15-39
15.2.33
BANC: Advising and Confirming an LC .................................................................................... 15-39
15.2.34
REIS: Reissue of Guarantee....................................................................................................... 15-40
15.2.35
AMND: LC Amendments............................................................................................................ 15-40
15.2.36
REVR: Reversal ......................................................................................................................... 15-41
15.2.37
ACCR: Accrual of Commission ................................................................................................. 15-41
15.2.38
CALC: Periodic Commission Calculation Date ........................................................................ 15-41
15.2.39
CLIQ: Liquidation of Commission ............................................................................................. 15-41
15.2.40
ROPN: Reopening of an LC ....................................................................................................... 15-41
15.2.41
TRGN: End of Day Check for Tracers ....................................................................................... 15-41
15.2.42
CANC: Cancellation of an LC ................................................................................................... 15-42
15.2.43
APAC: Amendment from Pre-advice to Advice and Confirm .................................................... 15-42
15.2.44
APAD: Amendment from Pre-advice to Advice ......................................................................... 15-42
15.2.45
RASN: Reassign an LC .............................................................................................................. 15-43
15.2.46
RAVL: Reversal of availment ..................................................................................................... 15-43
15.2.47
CALC: Periodic commission calculation ................................................................................... 15-43
15.2.48
Advice Generated for the Insurance Company .......................................................................... 15-43
15.2.49
Advice Generated for Counterparty ........................................................................................... 15-45
15.3 LC SDES ................................................................................................................................................ 15-45
16.
16.1
16.2
16.3
17.
17.1
18.
ANNEXURE C - SWIFT CATEGORY 7 MESSAGES ......................................................................... 16-1
LIST OF SWIFT MESSAGES ...................................................................................................................... 16-1
SWIFT ADVICES ...................................................................................................................................... 16-7
DETAILS OF MT202 (GENERAL FINANCIAL INSTITUTION TRANSFER) .................................................... 16-11
ANNEXURE D - LETTERS OF CREDIT GLOSSARY ....................................................................... 17-1
LIST OF IMPORTANT TERMS...................................................................................................................... 17-1
SCREEN GLOSSARY .............................................................................................................................. 18-1
18.1
FUNCTION ID LIST.................................................................................................................................... 18-1
1.
1.1
About this Manual
Introduction
This manual is intended as a guide to the Letters of Credit (LC) module, of Oracle FLEXCUBE. It
is designed to help you maintain and process all types of documentary and clean LCs. It also
assists you in handling the necessary activities in the life cycle of an LC once it is booked. This
includes the generation of messages and advices, the updation of account balances and the
collection of various commissions and charges.
1.2
Audience
This manual is intended for the Customer Service Representatives (CSRs) and the staff
responsible for the setting up of new products at your bank.
1.3
Organization
This manual is organized as follows:
Chapter 1
About this Manual gives information on the intended audience. It also lists the
various chapters covered in this User Manual
Chapter 2
Letters of Credit - An Overview gives you an overview of the LC module and
helps familiarize you with its features.
Chapter 3
Maintenance details the basic information to be maintained, before the LC
module becomes fully operational.
Chapter 4
Defining Product Attributes describes the procedure to define LC products for
specific services that you offer your customers.
Chapter 5
Processing an LC Contract described in this chapter is the procedure to process
all types of LCs (import, export, invoice, clean, guarantees, shipping
guarantees).
Chapter 6
Capturing Additional Details explains how you can capture additional information
for an LC contract.
Chapter 7
Making an Availment explains how, upon receipt of bills or on notification from
the negotiating bank, an availment is recorded under an LC.
Chapter 8
Amending Details of an LC discusses the circumstances under which the details
of an LC contract would need to be amended. It also details the procedure for
amending the LC.
Chapter 9
Transferring an LC explains how you can transfer an LC.
Chapter 10
Liquidation of Receivable Components of an LC deals with the liquidation of the
receivable components of an LC.
Chapter 11
Credit Limit Tracking for an LC is the procedure to track the exposure against
the applicant or against the issuing bank. It depends on whether you are issuing
1-1
an import LC/advice or confirming an export LC.
1.4
Chapter 12
Automatic Processes explains the processes that will be carried out
automatically, in the life cycle of an LC.
Chapter 13
Reports gives a list of all reports that can be generated for the LC module.
Chapter 14
Annexure A - Accounting Entries for LCs contains a list of suggested accounting
entries, event-wise.
Chapter 15
Annexure B - Events and Advices for LC gives an exhaustive list of events that
can take place and the messages that can be generated, during the life cycle of
an LC.
Chapter 16
Annexure C - SWIFT Category 7 Messages gives a list of SWIFT messages
supported in the LC module.
Chapter 17
Annexure D - Letters of Credit Glossary lists out important terms used in the LC
User Manual.
Conventions Used in this Manual
Important information is preceded with the
1.5
symbol.
Glossary of Icons
This User Manual may refer to all or some of the following icons:
Icons
Function
Exit
Add row
Delete
row
Option
List
1.6
Related Documents

Procedures
1-2
2.
2.1
Letters of Credit - An Overview
Introduction
A Letter of Credit is an undertaking by the bank issuing it to pay the beneficiary of the credit
provided stipulated documents are presented and other terms and conditions of the LC are
complied with. It is the preferred mode of settlement between a buyer and a seller under the
following circumstances:

They are not well-known to each other.

They are located in different countries and the seller is not sure of the credit worthiness of
the buyer.
In such cases, the seller would like a bank to provide assurance of payment. As an instrument of
international trade, It is one of the most secure methods for a seller to be paid. Besides credit risk
considerations, LCs is the customary business practice for long distance trade and a particularly
important commission earning service for any bank.
The Letters of Credit (LC) module constitutes a part Oracle FLEXCUBE’s comprehensive trade
financing system. Together with the Bills and Collections module, it automates the entire gamut of
trade financing. While the LC module handles the opening, advising and amending of all types of
LCs, the BC module handles collection of bills which may or may not be presented under LC. The
documents required under an LC are maintained in the BC module. Once an LC is opened, the
documents presented by the beneficiary and LC negotiation are also processed in the BC
module.
The LC module primarily supports the processing of all types of documentary and clean LCs. It
can handle all activities during the lifecycle of an LC. This includes the generation of messages
and advices for all the applicable events, and the update of account balances. The system also
handles the collection of various commissions and charges defined for an LC.
2.2
Features
In an effort to sharpen the competitiveness of your trade-financing department and to empower
your bank to handle a high volume of credit transactions Oracle FLEXCUBE is designed with the
following features:

The Letters of Credit module supports the processing of all types of clean and
documentary LCs. These include:

Import LCs

Export LCs

Guarantees

Shipping Guarantees

Clean LCs

Standby Guarantees

Reimbursement
2-1
2.3

The LC module is designed to handle all the events in the life cycle of an LC. The
booking, subsequent amendments and an availment can be processed automatically.
The messages and advices applicable for each event are also automatically generated.
The messages are communicated done through SWIFT, TELEX, mail, or any other
compatible medium.

The product definition function enables you to create products for specific services you
offer. This offers your customer flexibility as well as quick and efficient processing of
contracts.

The product definition covers all the key features of a LC. For example, details of
documents that should accompany it, the free format messages that form part of the
correspondence, the advices to be generated for various events, the accounting entries
to be passed for an event, the commission and tax handling specifications.

The details of documents, free format messages, and commodities are defined only once
and can be retrieved whenever needed. This reduces the effort involved in the capture of
LC details, thus rendering it faster and error free. The flexibility built into the system
ensures that you can modify these details to suit the requirement of each LC.

Oracle FLEXCUBE supports the concept of “specialized services branch” concept. If you
have trade financing expertise at only one branch, say the Head Office (HO) and LCs for
customers of any branch is processed only through the HO, Oracle FLEXCUBE offers
absolute ease of operations. The LC can be processed for a customer of any branch, in
the same way as you would, for a customer of your own branch.

The template and copy features further simplify, the input processing, for contracts.

The Central Liability sub-system automatically controls the booking of an LC against the
credit lines assigned to the customer before the bookings are made.

The module supports automated follow-up for commission and charge payments,
confirmation and acknowledgements.

Graphic User Interface (GUI) facilitates ease of input. Pick-lists have been provided
wherever possible. This makes the module both efficient and easy to use.

The media supported include Mail, Telex and SWIFT.

The National Language Support (NLS) features are available.

LCs is governed by the Uniform Customs and Practice (UCP) which is published by the
International Chambers of Commerce (ICC) Paris, France. You can indicate that the LCs
issued at your bank fall in line with the UCP, which is regarded as a rule book by virtually
all banks in the world.
Operations supported on LC
The following are the operations supported on an LC:

Open an import LC or guarantee

Open and confirm an import LC

Pre-advice an export LC

Advice an export LC

Advice and confirm an export LC
2-2

Confirm an export LC

Advice a guarantee

Import LC with pre-advice
Thus, your bank can perform one of the following roles:

The issuing (opening) bank for an import LC or guarantee

The advising bank or for an export LC

The confirming bank for an export LC
In addition to amendment of the terms of an LC such as the expiry date, the amount, the latest
shipment date, etc., you can amend the operation on an LC as follows:

Open to open and confirm of an import LC

Pre-advice to advice of an export LC

Pre-advice to advice and confirm an export LC

Advice to advice and confirm an export LC
Appropriate messages, advices, and covering letters are generated for these operations. These
are listed in an annexure in this manual. The SWIFT messages generated for the different types
of LC are listed in this chapter.
2.4
Processing Commissions and Charges
In the LC module, the method of collecting commissions and levying charges is flexible.
Commissions can be collected for the initiation and amendment events of an LC. The definition of
commission rules facilitate the uniform and efficient application of commission across all LCs
processed under a product.
Commissions can be collected in advance or in arrears, periodically or non-periodically. You can
choose to accrue commissions at a regular frequency (daily, monthly, quarterly, half-yearly or
annually). Similarly, the frequency of liquidation of periodic commission can be varied. In Oracle
FLEXCUBE various charges such as handling charges, SWIFT charges, etc. can be processed.
The commissions and charges can be collected from any party, and if necessary, debited from a
receivable account and liquidated subsequently.
2.5
Variations Supported for an LC
An LC being a very flexible payment mechanism can be made available to the customers of your
bank in a number of popular variations.
2.5.1 Red Clause Letter of Credit
You can process a Red Clause LC wherein you can provide for anticipatory drawings. In such a
case, the confirming bank or any other bank is authorised to make advance payments to the
beneficiary, before the presentation of the documents.
2-3
2.5.2 Transferable and Non-transferable LCs
While capturing the details of an LC, you can indicate whether it is transferable. This information
is part of the instrument generated for an LC.
2.5.3 Revolving and Non revolving LCs
You can open an LC and choose to make it available again in its original amount after the goods
have been shipped, documents presented and credit is settled. Such an LC is a revolving LC.
Under a revolving LC the amount is reinstated or renewed without any specific amendments to
the LC. A revolving LC may be revocable or non-revocable, and can revolve in relation to the
following:

Value

Time
This facility can be utilized when a supplier wishes to make repetitive shipments over a period
such as a year. The LC can have an automatic reinstatement clause, which provides for
continuing the renewal of availability. You also have the option to manually reinstate an LC. The
credit may require approval of the opening party before it becomes available again.
2.5.4 Sight and Usance LC
Oracle FLEXCUBE allows the processing of a sight or usance payment against an LC.

In case of a sight LC, the negotiating bank pays the seller immediately and is later
reimbursed by the issuing bank.

In the case of a usance LC, the drawee bank accepts the obligation to pay the seller at
maturity. An LC with a time draft drawn on the opening party, calling for payment at a
future date is called a time or Usance LC.
2.5.5 Cash Collateral against an LC
An LC can be processed against cash collateral. Oracle FLEXCUBE provides you with the facility
to calculate the cash collateral either as a percentage of the LC amount or as a fixed amount.
Cash collateral advice will be generated for its collection. When the LC amount is amended, you
also have the option of adjusting the collateral amount accordingly.
2.5.6 Availment against an LC
You can process the availments against an LC either through the LC module or through the bills
module of Oracle FLEXCUBE. Availment charges can be levied and cash collateral adjusted,
during an availment.
2.5.7 Reports
Information on the LCs processed and the static maintenance done for the module is available in
the form of reports. These reports can be printed, spooled on to a disk file or displayed on the
screen.
2-4
The following are some of the reports available:

Accrual control report

Closed out LCs report

Commission activity report

Commission due report

Confirmed LCs report

Daily activity report

Expired LCs report

LCs due to be closed report

LCs due to expire report

Open ended LCs

Un-replied tracers report

Process exception report

Overrides
Refer the chapter titled ‘Reports’ in this User Manual for details about reports
.
2-5
3.
3.1
Maintenance
Introduction
The LC module requires the setting up of certain basic information before it becomes fully
operational. The information that needs to be maintained includes:

Document details

Clause details

Goods details

Free Format Text details

Insurance Company details

Import License Expiry Date for a customer

Exchange Rate Type maintenance for different transaction amount slabs

INCO Terms

Open Insurance Policy details

Blacklist criteria
The procedure for maintaining these details is discussed in the subsequent sections.
3.2
Maintaining Document Details
There are certain standard documents that are required under a documentary LC. As these
documents are standard and common in most countries, their details need not be specified every
time you need to use it for an LC. Instead, you can maintain its details in the Document
Maintenance screen and attach it to the LC you process.
The advantage of maintaining document details is that at the time of creating a product or at the
time of entering the details of an LC, you only need to specify the code assigned to the document.
All the details maintained for the document will be automatically picked up. This helps reduce
repetitive work, as you do not need to enter the contents of the document each time you use it.
To invoke the ‘Bills and Collections Document Codes Maintenance’ screen, type ‘BCDDOCCD’ in
the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and click the adjoining arrow button.
3-1
If you are maintaining details of a new document click new icon from the tool bar. The ‘Bills and
Collection Document Code Maintenance’ screen is displayed without any details.
Here you can specify the following details.
Document Code
In Oracle FLEXCUBE, each document maintained is identified by a twelve-character code, called
a Document Code. You can follow your own convention for devising this code. However, one of
the characters of the code should necessarily be a letter of the English alphabet.
The code assigned to should be unique as it is used to identify the document. While creating a
product or at the time of entering the details of an LC, you only need to specify the code assigned
to the document. The document details will be automatically picked up and defaulted.
Language Code
The language used in the document which you bank receives from the customer.
Document Type
Select the type of document you bank received from the customer from the drop-down list.
Following are the options available in the drop-down list:

Transport
3-2

Insurance

Invoice

Others
Document Short Description
The documents for an LC are at times large and hence difficult to identify. Therefore, you can
specify a short description or a title that will enable you to identify the document quickly.
The short description that you specify is for information purposes only and will not be printed on
any customer correspondence.
Document Long Description
After you specify a code to identify the document, you can proceed to maintain the content of the
document. The content that you enter is printed on the applicable advices generated for an LC. A
document can contain a maximum of two thousand characters.
Once the document code is stored, the description of a document can be edited only through the
‘Document Codes Maintenance’ screen (the screen we are discussing). However, you can also
view the contents of a document code when you are linking it to a product or LC.
Validate Shipping Guarantee
Check this option to indicate that a shipping guarantee should be validated.
Bill of Lading
Check this option to indicate the bill of lading.
Clause Details
Specify the following details.
Clause Code
Specify the clause code that should be linked to the document.
Description
A brief description of the chosen clause code is displayed here.
3.2.1 Specifying UDF Values
You can specify values for all the User Defined fields (UDFs) created and attached to the ‘Bills &
Collections Document Codes Maintenance’ screen.
3-3
You can view the list of UDFs associated to this screen by clicking ‘Fields’ button.
You can enter the value for the UDFs listed here in the ‘Value’ column.
For more details on how to create user Defined fields, refer chapter ‘Creating custom fields in
Oracle FLEXCUBE’ in the User Defined Fields User Manual under Modularity.
3.2.2 Operations on Document Maintenance Record
On an existing Document Maintenance record, you can perform the following operations (if any
icon is disabled in the application toolbar, it means that the function is not allowed for the record):

Amend the details of a document

Authorize a document

Copy the details of a document on to a new one

Close the document

Reopen the document

Print the details of a document

Delete the details of a document
Please refer to the manual on Common Procedures for details of these operations.
3-4
3.3
Maintaining Clause Details
A clause is a statement that accompanies a document required under an LC. Instead of
specifying the details of a clause every time, you can maintain a list of the standard clauses,
which can accompany the documents, required for an LC, in the Clause Maintenance screen.
The advantage of maintaining clause details is that at the time of creating a product or at the time
of entering an LC, you only need to specify the code assigned to the clause. All the details
maintained for the clause will be automatically picked up.
You can invoke the ‘Letters of Credit Clause Code Maintenance’ screen by typing ‘LCDCLAMA’ in
the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow
button. If you are maintaining a new clause, click new icon from the tool bar. The ‘Letters of Credit
Clause Code Maintenance’ screen is displayed without any details.
Specify the following details.
Clause Type
A clause that you maintain will accompany a document that is sent for an LC. Therefore, the type
of clauses that you can maintain is determined by the type of document that it accompanies. The
nature of the clauses that you define can fall within the following categories:

Transport
3-5

Insurance

Invoice

Others
Clause Code
Each clause that you maintain is identified by a twelve-character code called a Clause code. You
can follow your own convention for devising the code. However, at least one of the characters of
the clause code should be a letter of the English alphabet.
This code should be unique as it is used to identify the clause. While creating a product or at the
time of entering the details of an LC where you need to specify the clauses that should
accompany a document, you only need to specify the code assigned to the clause. The clause
details will be automatically picked up and defaulted.
Clause Description
After you have specified a code for the clause, you can proceed to maintain a detailed description
of the clause.
The description carries the contents of the clause, which will be printed on the customer
correspondence that accompany an LC. The clause description can contain a maximum of two
thousand characters.
After you have made the mandatory entries, you should save the record.
Language Code
The language used in the document which you bank receives from the customer.
3.3.1 Specifying UDF Values
You can specify values for all the User Defined fields (UDFs) created and attached to the ‘Letters
of Credit Clause Code Maintenance’ screen. You can view the list of UDFs associated to this
screen by clicking ‘Fields’ button.
3-6
You can enter the value for the UDFs listed here in the ‘Value’ column.
For more details on how to create user Defined fields, refer chapter ‘Creating custom fields in
Oracle FLEXCUBE’ in the User Defined Fields User Manual under Modularity.
3.3.2 Operations on a Clause Maintenance Record
On an existing Clause Maintenance record, you can perform the following operations (if any icon
is disabled in the application toolbar, it means that the function is not allowed for the record):

Amend the details of the record

Authorize the record

Copy the details of a Clause, on to a new record

Close the record

Reopen the closed record

Print the details of a record

Delete the record
Please refer to the manual on Common Procedures for details of these operations.
3.4
Maintaining Goods Details
An LC is an instrument used for trade payments, it therefore involves merchandise. There are
certain standard goods or commodities, the trading of which is done, with LC cover. Instead of
specifying the details of merchandise each time they are traded under an LC, you can maintain
the details of the standard goods in the ‘Bills and Collections Commodity Code Maintenance’
screen.
3-7
The advantage of maintaining goods details is that at the time of entering the details of an LC,
you only need to specify the code assigned to the goods. The description maintained for the
goods code will be automatically picked up. Typically, the statutory body controlling international
and domestic trade in a country assigns these codes.
To maintain details of the standard goods transacted under LCs, you need to invoke the ‘Bills and
Collections Commodity Code Maintenance’ screen. You can invoke this screen by typing
‘BCDCOMCD’ in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the
adjoining arrow button. If you are maintaining details for the goods or commodity for the first time,
click new icon from the tool bar.
The ‘Bills and Collections Commodity Code Maintenance’ screen is displayed without any details.
Specify the following details.
Goods Code
In Oracle FLEXCUBE goods are identified by a twelve-character code called the goods code. You
can follow your own convention for devising the code. However, at least one of the characters of
the goods code should be a letter of the English alphabet.
The code that you assign to a commodity should be unique as it is used identify the goods. While
processing an LC where you need to specify the goods transacted, you need to only specify the
code assigned to the goods. The goods description will automatically be picked up and defaulted.
3-8
Language Code
The language used in the document which you bank receives from the customer.
Goods Description
After assigning a code to the goods, you can proceed to maintain a detailed description of the
goods. The goods description can contain a maximum of six thousand five hundred characters.
While specifying the details of the goods transacted under an LC, you can edit the description
that is defaulted, to suit the requirements of the LC you are processing. Specifications such as
the quality and quantity of the merchandise can also be entered.
Banned Commodity
As part of maintaining the details of the goods that can be traded under an LC, you can also
specify whether the commodity being defined is banned from import/export.
If you are maintaining the details of a banned commodity, you can indicate the same by selecting
the ‘Banned commodity’ option in the screen.
At the time of selecting the goods being traded under an LC, the system will display the
commodities in the option-list. In addition, the list will also display whether a particular commodity
is banned or not by indicating ‘YES’ (for a banned product) and ‘NO’ (for a product that is allowed
for trade) against the product.
3.4.1 Specifying UDF Values
You can specify values for all the User Defined fields (UDFs) created and attached to the ‘Bills
and Collections Commodity Code Maintenance’ screen. You can view the list of UDFs associated
to this screen by clicking ‘Fields’ button.
3-9
You can enter the value for the UDFs listed here in the ‘Value’ column.
For more details on how to create user Defined fields, refer chapter ‘Creating custom fields in
Oracle FLEXCUBE’ in the User Defined Fields User Manual under Modularity.
3.4.2 Operations on Goods Maintenance Record
On an existing Goods Maintenance record, you can perform of the following operations (if any
icon is disabled in the application toolbar, it means that the function is not allowed for the record):

Amend the details of a record

Authorize a record

Copy the details of a commodity, on to a new record

Close a record

Reopen a closed record

Print the details of a record

Delete a record
3-10
Please refer to the manual on Common Procedures for details of these operations.
3.5
Maintaining Free Format Text Codes
Free Format Text (FFT) may be a set of instructions or statements that are applicable to the LCs
that you process. There are certain standard statements that should appear in the
correspondence and messages, sent to the parties involved in an LC. Instead of specifying the
details of an FFT each time you need to use it, you can maintain them in the ‘Bills and Collections
Free Format Code Maintenance’ screen. The advantage of maintaining FFT details is that at the
time of creating a product or while entering the details of an LC, you only need to specify the code
assigned to the FFT. All the details maintained for the FFT code will be automatically picked up.
This reduces your effort, as you do not need to enter the description of an FFT each time you use
it. You can invoke this screen by typing ‘BCDFFTCD’ in the field at the top right corner of the
Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button. If you are maintaining the details
for the FFT for the first time, click new icon in the tool bar.
Specify the following details:
Text Code
In Oracle FLEXCUBE, each FFT that you maintain is identified by a twelve character code called
an FFT Code. You can follow your own conventions for devising the code. However, at least one
of the characters of the goods code should be a letter of the English alphabet.
3-11
The code that you specify should be unique since it identifies the FFT. While creating a product,
or at the time of entering the details of an LC you only need to specify the code assigned to the
FFT. The FFT details will be automatically picked up and defaulted.
Language Code
The language used in the document which you bank receives from the customer.
Free Format Text
After assigning a code to identify an FFT, you can proceed to maintain the description of the FFT.
The description that you specify can contain text up to two thousand characters.
3.5.1 Specifying UDF Values
You can specify values for all the User Defined fields (UDFs) created and attached to the ‘Bills
and Collections Free Format Code Maintenance’ screen. You can view the list of UDFs
associated to this screen by clicking ‘Fields’ button.
You can enter the value for the UDFs listed here in the ‘Value’ column.
For more details on how to create user Defined fields, refer chapter ‘Creating custom fields in
Oracle FLEXCUBE’ in the User Defined Fields User Manual under Modularity.
3.5.2 Operations on FFT Maintenance Record
On an existing FFT Maintenance record, you can perform the following operations (if any icon is
disabled in the application toolbar, it means that the function is not allowed for the record):

Amend the details of the record

Authorize the record

Copy the details of an FFT on to a new record
3-12

Close the record

Reopen the closed record

Print the details of a record

Delete the record
Refer to the manual on Common Procedures for details of these operations.
3.6
Maintaining Insurance Company Details
An LC, as an instrument of international trade involves the shipment of large merchandise over
long distances. To cover the loss or damage of the goods during transition, most merchandise
traded under an LC is covered with an insurance policy. You can maintain the details of different
Insurance Companies in Oracle FLEXCUBE.
At the time of capturing the details of an LC contract in the system, you can associate the
appropriate Insurance Company Code with the contract. Upon selection of the code, all the
details maintained for the selected code will be automatically picked up by the system.
Subsequently, on receipt of the insurance policy from the company, the insurance policy number
can also be captured in the relevant contract.
You can maintain the details of an insurance company through the ‘Bills and Collections
Insurance Company Maintenance’ screen. You can invoke this screen by typing ‘BCDINSCO’ in
the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow
button.
3-13
In this screen, you can maintain the following details of Insurance Companies:
3.6.1 Specifying Company Details
Insurance Company Code
Specify a unique code for each insurance company being defined in the system. The insurance
company will be identified by this code throughout the system. This is mandatory information and
if not provided, you will not be allowed to save the details of the company.
You can use a maximum of 9 alphanumeric characters to create the company code.
Insurance Company Name
After specifying a unique code for the company, you can also specify the full name of the
insurance company.
Address 1 to 4
Specify the mailing address of the insurance company being defined. You can maintain a
maximum of four lines of address. Each line of address can accommodate a maximum of 105
alphanumeric characters.
Telephone Number
Capture the telephone number of the insurance company.
Fax Number
Capture the fax number of the insurance company.
The insurance company will be available for association with LC contracts only after you
authorize the company details.
3.6.2 Specifying Account Details
Customer
Specify the customer name.
Account
Specify the account details.
3.6.3 Specifying UDF Values
You can specify values for all the User Defined fields (UDFs) created and attached to the ‘Bills
and Collections Insurance Company Maintenance’ screen.
3-14
You can view the list of UDFs associated to this screen by clicking ‘Fields’ button.
You can enter the value for the UDFs listed here in the ‘Value’ column.
For more details on how to create user Defined fields, refer chapter ‘Creating custom fields in
Oracle FLEXCUBE’ in the User Defined Fields User Manual under Modularity.
3.6.4 Operations on Company Maintenance Record
On an existing Company Maintenance record, you can perform the following operations (if any
icon is disabled in the application toolbar, it means that the function is not allowed for the record):

Amend the details of the record

Authorize the record

Copy the details of a record on to a new record

Close the record

Reopen the closed record

Print the details of a record

Delete the record
Refer to the manual on Common Procedures for details of these operations.
3-15
3.7
Maintaining Import License Expiry Date
Oracle FLEXCUBE allows you to maintain the Import License Expiry Date of all the customers of
your bank. You can maintain only one License Expiry Date for a customer. On selection of the
CIF ID of the customer at the time of processing an LC contract, the Import License Expiry Date
maintained for the selected CIF ID is also displayed in the LC Contract screen. The system will
not do any validations based on the expiry date. It is used only for information purpose.
You can capture import license expiry date through the ‘Trade License Details’ screen. You can
invoke this screen by typing ‘LCDEXPDT’ in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool
bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
Specify the following details.
Customer No
Every customer of your bank is identified by a unique CIF ID. All authorized and active corporate
CIF IDs are displayed in the option-list. You can select the appropriate CIF ID from the list.
Issuing Authority
Specify the government authority which issued the trade license to the customer.
Renewal Date
Specify the date on which the trade was renewed.
3-16
Charge Account
Specify a valid account to be used to collect the charges for trade license expiry. The adjoining
option list displays all open and authorized accounts belonging to the customer. You can select
the appropriate one.
Charge Branch
The system displays the Branch Code where the Charge Account is held.
Trade License No.
Specify the trade license number. This must be unique for each customer.
License Expiry Date
Specify the Trade License Expiry Date for the customer. The expiry date maintained here is
validated during the following operations:

Upon saving customer information

Upon saving customer account

Upon saving limits facilities

Upon saving FT contract , LC contract, and BC contract

Upon saving LC availment

Upon saving BC liquidation

Upon saving CL account, disbursement, payment and amendment
Days before the license is due to expire, a notification is generated and sent to the customer.
The number of days before which this notification needs to be generated is maintained at the
Bank Parameters Preferences level.
Expired
The system marks the trade license of the customer as expired during EOD if the system date
happens to be greater than or equal to trade license expiry date.
Expiry Due Advice Details
During EOD, advices are generated for customers whose trade license is impending expiry.
Generated Status
The success or failure of message generation through the above process is indicated by the true
and false status of the field ‘Generated Status’.
Generated Date
The system displays the date on which the message was generated, if any.
3-17
Expired Advice Details
During EOD, advices are generated for customers whose trade license has expired.
Generated Status
The success or failure of message generation through the above process is indicated by ‘True’ or
‘False’ status of this field.
Generated Date
The success or failure of message generation through the above process is indicated by the true
and false status of the field ‘Generated Status’.
3.7.1 Operations on Licence Expiry Date Record
On an existing Licence Expiry Date Maintenance record, you can perform the following
operations (if any icon is disabled in the application toolbar, it means that the function is not
allowed for the record):

Amend the details of the record

Authorize the record

Copy the details of a record on to a new record

Close the record

Reopen the closed record

Print the details of a record

Delete the record
Refer to the manual on Common Procedures for details of these operations.
3.8
Maintaining Exchange Rates for Bills
Oracle FLEXCUBE allows you to apply different exchange rates based on the amount involved in
the transaction. The cut-off amount slabs are maintained in the local currency of your bank. If the
transaction currency is not the local currency, the system will first convert the transaction amount
into the local currency equivalent using the Standard Mid Rate. This is necessary as the cut-off
amount slabs are maintained in the local currency. The system will then validate the converted
amount against the different amount slabs to determine the appropriate rate type. This is the rate
type that will be used for the actual conversion of the transaction currency into the local currency
equivalent.
You can capture the exchange rate types for different amount slabs through the ‘Bills and
Collections Exchange Rate Type Maintenance’ screen.
3-18
You can invoke this screen by typing ‘BCDAMTEX’ in the field at the top right corner of the
Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
In this screen, you can specify the amount slabs for a branch, module and product combination.
Branch Code
Each branch of your bank is identified by a unique code. All authorized and active branch codes
are available in the option-list. You can select the appropriate branch code from the list.
Module Code
Like wise, all the modules (like Loans & Deposits, Letters of Credit, Bills & Collections, Funds
Transfer etc) available in your bank are also displayed in an option-list. All active and authorized
records are available for selection. You can select the appropriate module code from the list.
Product Code
The various products/services offered by your bank are also available in an option-list. Select the
product code from the list. Alternatively, you can also maintain the cut-off amounts that will be
applicable for all the branches, modules, and products of your bank. You can make the following
selections to do this:

Branch Code – ALL (all branches)

Module Code – AL (all modules)
3-19

Product Code – ZALL (all products)
Amount Tag
Amount tags identify the various components (eg Bill Amount, Loan Principal, LC Amount etc.)
involved in a contract. You can maintain the cut-off amount slabs for:

All: The maintenance will be applicable to all the amount tags available in the system
(Module tags and Non-module tags).

Module: The amount tags that are specific to a particular module are known as Module
Tags. For eg the amount tag PRINCIPAL is specific to the Loans module,
BILL_AMOUNT is defined for the Bills module and so on.

Non-Module: The amount tags that are internally created by the system are referred to as
Non-Module tags. The system will automatically create the amount tags for the Interest,
Tax, Charge, and Commission components that you define for a product.
3.8.1 Specifying Exchange Rate Maintenance
Basis Amount
Specify the floor basis amount. The upper limit of the previous amount slab gets defaulted as the
Floor Basis Amount.
Amount To
Specify the ceiling limit of the slab.
Click add icon to capture each subsequent amount slab.
Currency Rate Type
You can associate a different exchange rate type with each cut-off amount slab that you have
maintained. All authorized and active rate types defined in your system are available in the
option-list. Select the appropriate rate type for each amount slab.
Example
You have maintained the following cut-off amount slabs, and the corresponding exchange rate types &
exchange rates to be applied on LC contracts processed at your bank:
Cut-Off Amount Slabs
(in Local Ccy - USD)
Exchange Rate Type
Exchange Rate
(for GBP to USD conversion)
0-25,000
STANDARD
1.684
>25,000
COUNTER
1.897
3-20
Let us assume that you are processing an LC contract for GBP 20,000. The local currency of your bank is
USD. In such a case, the system will first convert GBP 20,000 into the local currency equivalent using the
Standard mid rate. Assuming that the mid rate is 1.5, the converted amount works out to USD 30,000. The
system will then validate the converted amount against the cut-off amount slabs maintained. USD 30,000
(converted amount) falls in the second slab (>25,000). The exchange rate type maintained for this slab is
‘COUNTER’ and the corresponding exchange rate is 1.897. The actual conversion of the transaction amount
takes place using the COUNTER rate of 1.897. Therefore, the USD equivalent of 20,000 GBP works out to
37,940.
3.8.2 Specifying UDF Values
You can specify values for all the User Defined fields (UDFs) created and attached to the ‘Bills
and Collections Exchange Rate Type Maintenance’ screen. You can view the list of UDFs
associated to this screen by clicking ‘Fields’ button.
You can enter the value for the UDFs listed here in the ‘Value’ column.
For more details on how to create user Defined fields, refer chapter ‘Creating custom fields in
Oracle FLEXCUBE’ in the User Defined Fields User Manual under Modularity.
3.8.3 Operations on Exchange Rate Type Maintenance Record
On an existing Exchange Rate Type Maintenance record, you can perform the following
operations (if any icon is disabled in the application toolbar, it means that the function is not
allowed for the record):

Amend the details of the record

Authorize the record

Copy the details of a record on to a new record

Close the record
3-21

Reopen the closed record

Print the details of a record

Delete the record
Refer to the manual on Common Procedures for details of these operations.
3.9
Maintaining INCO Terms
INCOTERMS or International Commercial Terms indicate who will bear the freight, insurance and
ancillary charges i.e. charges relating to an import or export consignment other than the cost of
the goods/service. Additionally, they also determine which party will make arrangements to clear
the goods from a port or airport. There are 13 INCO terms given by the ICC (full form required).
Each INCO term is a three-letter code stating the responsibility of the seller i.e. the beneficiary in
an LC. For instance ‘EXW’ states that the responsibility of the seller is limited to keeping the
goods at his factory ready for export and it is the buyer’s responsibility to pick it up and arrange
for onward freight and insurance. Under ‘FOB’ the seller is responsible for securing export
clearance and placing the goods on board a ship in his country. From that point on i.e. the cost
relating to the freight, transit insurance and clearing the goods for import are the buyer’s
responsibility. ‘CIF’ states that the seller is responsible for the freight/transport charges and
insurance upto the point of destination. ‘DDP’ indicates that the seller has to take complete
responsibility to arrange and pay for transport, insurance and export/import clearances. An INCO
term is also specific to the mode of transport used. The terms ‘FAS’, ‘FOB’, ‘CFR’ and ‘CIF’
should only be used when the shipment mode is sea.
You can associate documents and clauses to INCO terms as part of a one-time maintenance for
your bank. You can do this through the ‘INCO Term Document Maintenance’ screen. You can
invoke this screen by typing ‘BCDINCOD’ in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool
bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
3-22
Here, you need to specify the following:
3.9.1 Specifying Document Details
INCO Term
The following are the INCO terms for which you can maintain documents and clauses:

EXW - EX Works

FCA - Free Carrier

FAS - Free Alongside Ship

FOB - Free On-Board

CFR - Cost and Freight

CIF - Cost Insurance Freight

CPT - Carriage Paid to

CIP - Cost Insurance Paid

DAF - Delivered at Frontier

DES - Deliver Ex Ship

DEQ - Delivered Ex Quay

DDU - Delivered Duty Unpaid
3-23

DDP - Delivered Duty Paid
Document Code
You need to associate a valid document to an INCO term. All valid document codes maintained
(through the ‘Bills and Collections Document Master Maintenance’ screen) in your current branch
are made available here for selection. You can associate any number of valid documents to an
INCO term.
Description
A brief description of the chosen document is displayed here.
3.9.2 Specifying Document Details
Clause Code
To each document associated with an ‘INCO Term’, you need to associate a clause. The
adjoining option list displays all clause codes maintained in through the ‘Clause Maintenance’
screen. You can choose the appropriate one.
To each document associated with an ‘INCO Term’, you can associate any number of clauses.
Description
A brief description of the chosen clause is displayed here.
3.9.3 Operations on INCO Term Maintenance Record
On an existing INCO term maintenance record, you can perform any one of the following
operations (if any icon is disabled in the application toolbar, it means that the function is not
allowed for the record):

Create a record

Unlock and amend the details of the record

Delete the record
During the ‘amend’ operation, you can amend the clause code only.
Refer to the chapter on common procedures for details on each of these operations.
3.10 Maintaining Open Insurance Policy Details
A trader can enter into an open insurance policy with an insurance company to insure all goods in
transit falling within that agreement for an indefinite period, until the agreement is cancelled by
either party. You can capture details of such insurance policies using the ‘Open Policy
Maintenance’ screen.
3-24
You can invoke this screen by typing ‘LCDOPNPL’ in the field at the top right corner of the
Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
Here you can capture the following details:
Open Policy Code
Specify a unique alphanumeric code to identify the policy. You can specify a maximum of 105
characters.
Insurer Code
Specify the insurer who has issued the policy. The adjoining option list displays all insurance
companies maintained using the ‘Bills & Collections Insurance Company Maintenance’ screen.
You can select the appropriate one.
3-25
CIF ID
Specify the customer identification number (CIF) for whom the policy is issued. The adjoining
option list displays all CIF maintained using the ‘Customer Information Maintenance’ screen. You
can select the appropriate one.
Short Name
The system displays the short name.
Goods
Specify the goods to be linked to the open policy.
Currency
Specify the currency in which the total sum assured and the amount per conveyance should be
maintained. The adjoining option lists displays all currency codes maintained in the system. You
can select the appropriate one.
Sum Assured Amount
Specify the total amount assured for the policy.
Per Conversion Amount
Specify the limit to be set for every transaction under the policy.
INCO Term
Specify the INCO term that should be linked to the policy. The adjoining option list displays the
following values:

EXW - EX Works

FCA - Free Carrier

FAS - Free Alongside Ship

FOB - Free On-Board

CFR - Cost and Freight

CIF - Cost Insurance Freight

CPT - Carriage Paid to

CIP - Cost Insurance Paid

DAF - Delivered at Frontier

DES - Deliver Ex Ship

DEQ - Delivered Ex Quay

DDU - Delivered Duty Unpaid
3-26

DDP - Delivered Duty Paid
You can choose the appropriate one.
Telex Address
Specify the telex number of the customer.
Warehouse Address
Specify the warehouse address of the customer.
Issue Date
The system displays the application date here. However you can change it.
Effective Date
Specify the date on which the policy becomes effective.
Expiry Date
Specify the date on which the policy expires. Note that this date has to be greater than the
effective date.
Cover Date
Specify the cover date for the policy. This date should not exceed the expiry date.
Voyage
Specify details of the shipment that can be undertaken under this policy.
Location
Specify details of the location to which goods can be shipped under this policy.
Risk Covered
Specify details of the risk coverage for goods under this policy.
Utilized Amount
If you have checked the option ‘Update utilization Automatically’ the system will display the
amount that has been utilized out of the total insured sum. If an LC contract is linked, the
utilization amount will show the LC contract amount. In case of a BC contract being linked
subsequently, the amount will be re-instated accordingly. If that option is not checked, then you
need to enter the utilized amount.
If the linked LC contract is reversed or deleted, the utilization will be reduced to the extent of LC
amount.
3-27
Auto Update Utilization
Check this option to indicate that the system should automatically update utilization amount
based on the transactions undertaken under the policy.
Available Amount
The system displays the amount available for further utilization. This amount is arrived at by
subtracting the utilized amount from the total sum assured.
Key Clauses
Specify the clauses that you wish to link to the policy.
Remarks
Specify remarks pertaining to the policy.
3.10.1 Specifying Open Policy Details
While querying on records, you can view the following details:
Contract Reference Number
The reference number of the linked LC contract is displayed here.
Contract Currency
The system displays the contract currency of the linked LC contract..
Contract Amount
The system displays the contract amount of the linked LC contract.
While creating a new policy or amending an existing one, you cannot modify the fields under the
‘Contract Linkage’ section. You can modify the following fields while amending a record:

Expiry Date

Voyage

Location

Risk Covered

Per Conveyance Amount

Key Clauses

Remarks

Cover Date

Utilization Amount (If the option ‘Update utilization Automatically’ is not checked)
3-28

Update utilization automatically

Telex Address

Warehouse Address
3.10.2 Operations on an Open Policy Record
You can perform the following operations on this record:

New

Unlock

Close

Copy
3.11 Blacklisting LCs
You can black list LCs and collection bills based on a set of criteria that you can define. You can
define criteria for black listing LCs and bills in the ‘Black Listed Transaction Input’ screen. You
can invoke this screen by typing ‘LCDBKLST’ in the field at the top right corner of the Application
tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
You can set up the following criteria for blacklisting LCs and Bills:

The module to which the contract belongs
3-29

The reference number of the party (For LCs, specify the reference of the Issuer. For Bills,
enter the reference of the Remitting bank).

The Currency Code of the contract

The Contract Amount

The Issue Date and

The Expiry Date
Number of Matches
Now that you have set up the criteria for black listing contracts, you need to indicate the number
of the above criteria that should be used to black list LCs and Bills.
Example
You indicate 2 in the field Number of Matches. All LCs/Bills that match at least two of the blacklisting criteria
that you specified will be displayed for blacklisting.
After you indicate the blacklisting criteria, click save icon to save the record. A message with the
Reference Number of the LCs/Bills that matches the blacklisting criteria that you specified is
displayed. You can choose to blacklist the contract or ignore the message.
If you enter a new LC/Bill that matches the blacklisting criteria, you will be prompted for an
override. Similarly, if you attempt to amend the details of a blacklisted LC/Bill, you will be
prompted with an override.
3.12 Maintaining Branch Parameters for Letter of Credit
You can maintain letter of credit details specific to a branch using the ‘Letters of Credit Branch
Parameters’ screen. These parameters can be maintained for each branch of your bank. You can
invoke this screen by typing ‘LCDBRPRM’ in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool
bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
3-30
The following details can be captured here:
Branch Details
Branch Code
Specify the branch code for which you need to maintain specific parameters. Alternatively, you
can select the branch code from the adjoining option list also. All branch codes maintained in the
system will be available in the list of values for selection.
Branch Name
The branch name is defaulted based on the branch code selected.
Batch Processing
Accrual Entries Level
Select the option to indicate the level at which accrual has to be done and entries have to be
passed, from the drop-down list. The options available are:
 Product
 Contract
3-31
Process Till Next Working Day - 1
Select the day on which automatic events, such as; accrual, liquidation etc., falling due on a
holiday should be processed, from the adjoining drop-down list. This list displays the following
options:

Next Working Day - 1 – Select this option if you want the batch process to process all the
automatic events, which are due on the holiday, as part of the EOD on the last working
day before the holiday.

System Date –Select this option if you want the batch process to process the automatic
events, which are due on the holiday, as part of BOD on the first working day after the
holiday. On the last working day before the holiday, batch process processes only the
events scheduled for that day.
Example
The current branch date is 20 March 1998. On 21 March 1998, which is a holiday, the following automatic
events fall due:

The automatic closure of an LC

Automatic reinstatement of the LC amount

Automatic accrual of commission and charges
Next working Day - 1
If you specify that the processing should be done on the last working day - 1, the above events will be
processed on March 20, as part of the batch process run at End of Day.
System Date
If you specify that the processing should be done only up to the system date, then the events scheduled for
21 March 1998, will be processed as part of the Batch Process run as part of Beginning of Day on 22 March
1998.
User Reference Number in Messages
Check this box to include User Reference Number in messages.
If you check this box then system will display the User Reference Number in the ‘User Ref No’
column of the account statement for the LC contract.
For the user reference to be picked up in the account statement, the new tag ‘Userrefno’ is
included in the account statement format.
Validate Claiming Bank
Check this box to validate claiming bank.
If you check this box, you can check if the sender of the MT742 is same as the party recorded
against the CLB (Claiming Bank) party for the linked LC.
3-32
When a MT740 message is received, the system will insert a record with CLB party type as part
of the Import LC Contract only if,

41A tag contains a BIC or

41D tag contains a value other than ‘ANY BANK’ (the value is the Customer
Name/Customer Address), the CIF ID will be resolved based on these values. If no CIF is
resolved, then the Walk-in Customer ID will be inserted as CLB party.
The system will create the Bill Contract, if the CLB party is not recorded as part of the linked
Import LC (assuming that it is for ‘ANY BANK’). If CLB party is present for the linked Import LC
and if the sender of MT742 is not same as the CLB party, then the system will display an override
message and will put the BC contract on HOLD.
When a MT742 message is processed manually in Incoming Browser, the system will perform the
above validation. If the validation fails, then the system will display an override message.
Undertake Entire LC on STP
Check this box to default the entire LC amount as undertaken while processing an incoming
MT740.
If you do not check this option, the entire LC maximum amount will be defaulted as nonundertaken amount while creating the Import LC contract on receiving MT740. In that case, the
default undertaken amount will be taken as zero.
Pre-advice Fields Validation On STP Of 700 Required
Check this box if you require validation of Pre-advice fields mentioned in STP 700 Swift Message.
The check box is checked by default; however, you can modify, if needed.
Discrepancy Notice Period
Specify a period within which the discrepancy details should be added to the bills processed
under LCs. This period will be calculated from the date of presentation of the bills (which is
typically the booking date of the bill) to the issuing bank/confirming bank.
The system will display an override if the discrepancies are added to the bills (in the Bills Contract
Details screen) after the discrepancy notice period.
Allow Partial Closure
Check this box to indicate that the LC should be partially closed during LC batch.
If this option is checked, system will do the following as part of the Closure Batch:

If the entire LC amount is utilized, then the LC will be closed as existing.

If the LC is partially utilized, then an event, PCLS (Partial Closure of LC) will take place.
The Limits, Outstanding Liability and the Cash Collateral for the unutilized amount will be
released.
3-33
Example
Assume that an LC of USD 1000 is created. A Bill of USD 700 is created in initial stage by linking the above
LC. On the expiry date of LC, as part of Closure batch (if this option is checked at the branch level), system
will release the Limits, OS liability and Cash collateral for USD 300 by retaining USD 700 assuming that the
Bill to which the LC is linked will be availed at the later stage.
Partial Closure Days after Expiry
Specify the number of days required for the partial closure of the LC after its expiry date. You
specify the partial closure days only if the option ‘Allow Partial Closure’ is checked.
The system allows manual partial closure during the partial closure days, until the LC is closed.
Example
Consider an import LC contract with the following details:
Issue Date
: 01-Jan-2010
Expiry Date
: 20-Jan-2010
Partial Closure Days after Expiry: 5 days
On 25-Jan-2010 (5 days after the expiry date), the system initiates partial closure processing as part of the
LC batch.
The system verifies the date arrived at after adding the number of partial closure days to the expiry date. If
this date is later than the closure date of the LC contract, the system closes it on the actual closure date
itself.
The above rule applies to export LC contracts as well.
3-34
4.
4.1
Defining Product Attributes
Introduction
In this chapter, we shall discuss the manner in which you can define attributes specific to a
Letters of Credit product. You can create a loans product in the Letters of Credit (LC) Product
Definition screen, invoked from the Application Browser.
4.2
Creating LC Product
The basic information about the product such as the Product Code and its description is captured
through the ‘Letters of Credit Product Definition’ screen. Information related to specific attributes
of a product can be defined in subsequent screens that can be invoked from the product definition
screen. You can invoke this screen by typing ‘LCDPRMNT’ in the field at the top right corner of
the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button. The ‘LC Product Definition’
Screen is displayed. From this screen click new icon on the toolbar. The ‘Product Definition’
screen will be displayed with no values in the fields. From the ‘Summary’ screen you can open an
existing product. The details of the products that you have created will be displayed in a tabular
form.
You can define the attributes specific to a letters of credit product in this screen.
4-1
The buttons on this screen are explained below:
Buttons
Description
Accounting
Roles
Click this button to define the accounting role to accounting head
mapping.
Events
Click this button to select the events for the product and then maintain
event-wise accounting entries and advices.
Branch and
Currency
Click this button to maintain the list of allowed/ disallowed branches and
currencies for the product.
Customer
Click this button to maintain the list of allowed/ disallowed
customers/customer categories.
Preferences
Click this button to define preferences like tenor, Prepayment option etc.
MIS
Click this button to capture MIS related parameters.
Commission
Click this button to define the Commission details.
Charges
Click this button to define charge components, rules, events and other
associated details.
Tax
Click this button to associate tax rules and select tax currencies.
Fields
Click this button to provide values for the UDFs associated with the
screen.
Free Format
Tax
Click this button to attach the Documents and Free format text required
for the Product. If you specify details in this screen for a ‘Reimbursement’
type of product, the system will display an error message while saving the
product.
Tracers
Click this button to enter details of the tracers that should be generated
for all LCs under this product.
Status
Click this button to define the criteria for LC status change.
For any product you create in Oracle FLEXCUBE, you can define generic attributes, such as
branch, currency, and customer restrictions, interest details, tax details, etc., by clicking on the
appropriate icon in the horizontal array of icons in this screen. For a letters of credit product, in
addition to these generic attributes, you can specifically define other attributes. These attributes
are discussed in detail in this chapter.
Product Code
The code you assign to a product will identify the product throughout the module. The code
should contain four characters. You can follow your own convention for devising the code,
however, at least one of the characters should be a letter of the English alphabet.
4-2
Since the code that you define is used to identify the product, it should be unique across the
modules of Oracle FLEXCUBE. For instance, if you have assigned the code ‘LC01’ to a particular
product in this module, you cannot use it as a code in any other module.
Description
You can enter a brief description of the product, which will be associated with the product for
information retrieval purposes.
Product Type
The product type identifies the basic nature of a product. An LC product that you create in Oracle
FLEXCUBE can be of the following types:

Import LC - This is the basic LC product opened at the request of the importer (applicant)
by the issuing bank in favour of an exporter beneficiary.

Export LC - When an import LC has to be conveyed to the beneficiary through an
advising bank, for the advising bank this is an export LC.

Guarantee – This is an undertaking by the guarantor (bank) to make payment to the
beneficiary of the guarantee in the event of a default by the applicant of the guarantee.
Usually, the only document required for payment is a simple invocation letter. Guarantees
are normally used in performance contracts.

Standby Guarantee -This is used for normal trade works like a guarantee. It is popular in
the USA and is characterized by ease of operations. Unlike import LCs, only a single
document is required for the bank to make payment.

Shipping Guarantee - This again operates on the lines of a guarantee but is used in the
scenario where the shipping company releases the goods to an importer in lieu of a bill of
lading (transport document) subject to a guarantee being issued in its favour.

Clean LC - A LC not backed by documents. Usually the only document in a clean LC
would be the draft or bill of exchange. This type of LC is used where the goods have
already been received and only the payment has to be settled through banking channels.

Advice of Guarantee - When a guarantee has been received by a bank and is to be
advised further to the beneficiary’s bank the product to be created would be an advice of
guarantee.

Reimbursement
The entries that are passed, the messages that are generated and the processing of contracts
involving the product, is determined by your input to this field.
Slogan
You can specify a marketing punch-line to be associated with the product. This slogan will be
printed on all the advices that are sent to the customer, for an LC involving this product.
Product Group
Each product is classified under a specific group. The different groups are defined in the Product
Group Definition table.
4-3
Start/End Date
A product can be set up for use over a specific period, by defining a start and an end date. The
Issue Date of an LC involving a product should be:

The same as or later than the Start Date.

The same as or earlier than the End Date.
The start and end dates of a product come in handy when you are defining a product for a
scheme, which is open for a specific period.
Remarks
You can enter information about the product, intended for the internal reference of your bank. The
remarks are displayed when the details of the LC are displayed or printed. However, this
information will not be printed on any correspondence with the customer.
To maintain the allowed and disallowed customer and customer categories, you have to click the
button and invoke the ‘Customer and Customer Restrictions’ screen.
Revolving
LC products can be revolving or non-revolving. If you indicate that the product is revolving, you
can associate the product with only revolving LCs. While actually processing revolving you can
indicate whether the LC should revolve in time or in value. Note that if the product type is
‘Reimbursement’, the system will automatically select the option ‘No’. You will not be able to
change it.
Similarly, if you indicate that the product is non-revolving, you can associate the product to only
non-revolving LCs.
All LCs will be of irrevocable nature.
4.2.1 Specifying Preferences for a Product
Preferences are the options available for defining the attributes of a product. The options you
make here will ultimately shape the product. Click ‘Preferences’ button to invoke the ‘Letters of
Credit Product Preferences’ screen.
4-4
Through this screen you can define preferences for the product you are creating.
The Preferences that you define for a product will be applied to all the LC contracts involving the
product.
Product Code and Product Description
The Product Code and the description get defaulted from the main product screen.
Note that if the product you are creating is of the type ‘Reimbursement’, you will be able to specify
only the following details:

Limit Tenor Calculation Type

Rekey Requirements

Tolerance

Exchange Rate
4-5
4.2.1.1 Specifying Tenor Related Details
You can set the Standard, Minimum and the Maximum limits for tenor based LCs. The tenor
details that you specify for an LC product is always expressed in days.
Standard
The standard tenor is the tenor that is normally associated with an LC involving a product. The
standard tenor of an LC is expressed in days and will apply to all LCs involving the product. If you
do not specify any specific tenor while processing an LC, the standard tenor will by default apply
to it.
The default standard tenor applied on an LC can be changed during LC processing. An expiry
date will be calculated based on the tenor, as follows:
Expiry Date = Effective Date + Tenor
Maximum
You can fix the maximum tenor of a product. The tenor of the LCs that involves the product
should be less than or equal to the Maximum tenor specified. If not, an override will be required
before the LC is stored.
Minimum
The minimum tenor of a product can be fixed. The tenor of the LCs that involves the product
should be greater than or equal to the minimum tenor that you specify. If not, an override will be
required before the LC is stored.
Example
You have defined an LC product, to cater to tenor based import LCs. The minimum tenor specified for this
product is 100 days and the maximum tenor is 1000 days. You have also specified a standard tenor of 500
days.
Under this product, you can process LCs with a tenor between 100 and 1000 days. As you have specified
the standard tenor as 500 days, by default, an LC involving this product will have a 500 day tenor. At the
time of processing the LC you can however, change this tenor to anything between the Minimum and
Maximum tenor limits. This is done by changing the Expiry Date of the LC. If the new tenor falls outside the
range defined as the maximum and minimum tenors, an appropriate override will be sought.
Cash Collateral Percentage
For a product, you can fix the percentage of the LC amount that should be taken as cash
collateral. This percentage will be applied by default and can be changed when the LC is
processed. In addition, the currency in which the collateral is to be collected can be specified in
the LC Contract Collateral screen, while processing an LC.
Example
For a guarantee product, you have specified that customers should offer cash collateral to the tune of 50%
of the LC amount. If you enter a guarantee, using this product, valued at USD $100,000, a sum of USD
$50,000 which is 50% of the guarantee amount will be collected as cash collateral when the guarantee is
issued.
4-6
If you enter a guarantee using this product, valued at GBP 500,000, then a sum of GBP 250,000 which is
50% of the guarantee amount will be collected as cash collateral when the guarantee is issued. You can
collect the cash collateral in a currency different from the guarantee currency.
4.2.1.2 Specifying LC Authorization Re-key Fields
All operations on an LC (input, modification, reversal, etc.) have to be authorized by a user other
than the one who carried out the operation. Authorization is a method of cross checking the
inputs made by a user. All operations on an LC, except placing it on hold, should be authorized
before beginning the End of Day operations.
You have the option to specify whether certain important details of an LC need to be reeked, at
the time of authorization. If you indicate positively, you should also specify the fields that will have
to be re-keyed at the time of contract authorization. You can specify any or all of the following as
re-key fields:

Amount

Currency

Customer

Maturity date

Value date
When you invoke an LC for authorization  as a cross-checking mechanism to ensure that you
are calling the right LC  you can specify that the values of certain fields should be entered before
the other details are displayed. The complete details of the LC will be displayed only after the
values to these fields are entered. This is called the‘re-key’ option. The fields for which the values
have to be given are called the‘re-key’ fields.
If no re-key fields have been defined, the details of the LC will be displayed immediately once the
authorizer calls the LC for authorization. The re-key option also serves as a means of ensuring
the accuracy of inputs.
INCO Term
Specify the INCO term that should be linked to all contracts under this product. The adjoining
option list displays all INCO terms available in the system. You can select the appropriate one.
4.2.1.3 Commission Related Preferences
You can specify the following details.
Collection
Indicate when the commission components of an LC should be collected. Commission on an LC
can be collected in the following ways:

Advance - Select ‘Advance’ to indicate that the commission components of the LC should
be collected at the time the LC is initiated.
4-7

Arrears - Select ‘Arrears’ to indicate that the commission components of the LC should
be collected on the maturity date of the LC.
Choose an option to suit the product you are creating.
Calculation
You can have the commission amount that is due to an LC collected in one of the following ways:

Periodic - Indicate periodic if commission is to be collected in portions over a period in
time. Periodic commission is calculated on the basis of a set of parameters that you
define. The values of these parameters as of the beginning of the period are used as they
may change when a periodic amount is calculated. For instance, the current outstanding
LC amount may be lower at the time of commission collection than at the beginning of the
period, because an availment had been processed. When commission is collected on a
periodic basis, it will be collected automatically, based on the rate period that you specify.
Periodic commission can be collected either in advance or in arrears, depending on your
specification. This specification is made in the Product Preferences screen also. The
amount collected will always be for the current period.

Non-periodic - Indicate non-periodic if the commission amount due to an LC is to be
collected as a single sum. In this case, a single commission amount is calculated at the
time you enter an LC using a set of parameters that you have defined for the LC. For
advance collections the commission is collected at the time you enter the LC. If it is
collected in arrears, then the commission is collected on the expiry date.
Retrospective
Check this option to indicate that commission is collected retrospectively.
Start Date
Specify the start date for commission calculation.
Include To Date
Check this option to indicate that the end date for commission calculation should be included in
the calculation tenure.
Refer the Commissions User Manual under Modularity for further commission related
preferences.
4.2.1.4 Specifying Tolerance
Tolerance denotes the variance that has to be built around the LC amount, to arrive at the
Maximum LC amount.
Positive
A positive tolerance is the percentage that should be added to the LC amount to arrive at the
Maximum LC amount. When an LC is issued or advised, the Maximum LC amount will be the
outstanding LC amount. This will be the maximum amount available for availment.
4-8
Negative
The negative tolerance is the percentage that should be subtracted from the LC amount. The
minimum tolerance is captured for information purposes only. The tolerance percentage can be
changed when an LC is processed under a product.
The positive and negative tolerance amounts will be a part of the LC instrument and the
subsequent amendment instruments. You should use the positive tolerance to indicate the
amount that is uncovered, in the LC amount. Instances could be of the freight or insurance not
being paid.
Closure Days
You can also maintain the number of days after which all LCs processed under the product being
defined, will be closed. The number of days specified here is calculated from the expiry date of
the LC to arrive at the closure date, as follows:
LC Closure Date = LC Expiry Date + Closure Days
By default, the system will display 30 days as the closure days. You are allowed to change this
value. At the time of capturing the details of an LC contract, the system will calculate the closure
date, based on the closure days that you have maintained for the product involved in the contract.
However, you can change the date to any other date after the expiry date.
Example
For the import LC product, LCIR, your bank has specified the closure days as 20 days.
th
Let us assume that the expiry date of the LC Contract involving LCIR is 29 February 2000. The system will
th
calculate the closure date as 20 March 2000. This is arrived at, by adding the number of closure days to
th
th
the expiry date of the LC (i.e. 29 Feb + 20 days = 20 March).
4.2.1.5 Specifying Exchange Rate Related Details
You can specify the exchange rates to be picked up and used, when an LC in a foreign currency,
is processed.
Default Rate Type
Specify the rate type to be used to process an LC.
The exchange rate variance is applicable only if the defaulted rates are changed for an LC, in a
foreign currency. For the rate type applicable, you can specify the variance based on which,
either an override should be sought or the LC should not be saved.
Rate Override Limit
If the variance between the rate defaulted and the rate input is a percentage that lies between the
Rate Override Limit and the Rate Stop Limit, the LC can be saved by giving an override.
4-9
Rate Stop Limit
If the variance between the rate defaulted and the rate input is a percentage value greater than or
equal to the Rate Stop Limit, the LC cannot be saved.
Example
For a product, you have specified the override range as between 7% and 30%. In such a case the entries in
these fields would read as follows:

Rate Override Limit - 7%

Rate Stop Limit - 30%
You enter an LC involving this product. This is a cross currency contract involving the American and the
Australian dollar. Also assume that the standard mid-rate for the currency pair is 1.25. We shall examine the
three possible situations that you can encounter.
Below the override limit - Let us assume that for the LC you have specified the exchange rate to be 1.2. In
this case the exchange rate exceeds the standard rate by 4%. The LC will be processed without any
override.
Within the override limit - If you have specified the exchange rate to be 2.0. In this case you exceeded the
standard rate by 20%. You will be prompted to confirm the override. If you confirm the override the LC will
be processed using these rates.
Above the override limit - Let us visualise a situation in which you have specified the exchange rates to be
2.5. In this case you have exceeded the standard rate by 100%. In such a case an error message will be
displayed and you will not be allowed to continue until the exchange rate you specify is within the
permissible limit of 7-30%.
4.2.1.6 Specifying Period of Presentation
As part of the preferences you define for a product, you can specify the manner in which the
Period of Presentation should be calculated for the documents that accompany LCs processed
under the product. The period of presentation can be arrived at in two ways.
Number of Days
Firstly, you can specify it directly, in terms of days, in the Number of Days field. Typically, this
would be 21 days. (However, you can change this to suit your need.) If you choose this option,
the number of days specified will default to all LCs processed under the product. The value will
default to the ‘Period For Presentation’ field in the LC Contract – Others screen.
Calculated Days
You can opt to calculate the period of presentation as follows:
Expiry Date of the LC – Latest Shipment Date
(You would choose this option if the period of presentation varies for each LC processed under a
product.) To specify this manner of calculating the period of presentation, choose the ‘Calculated
Days’ option.
4-10
The system uses the Expiry Date and the Last Shipment Date specified for the LC you are
processing, and arrives at the period of presentation. The period of presentation defined for the
product - or calculated for the LC, as the case may be - will be displayed in the ‘Period For
Presentation’ field in the LC Contract - Others screen. You can change the default to suit the LC
you are processing.
4.2.1.7 Generating LC Expiry Advices
While creating an LC product, you can indicate whether an expiry advice should be generated for
LCs involving the product.
Required
Check this option to indicate that an expiry advice should be generated for LCs involving the
product.
Expiry Advice
These advices are generated based on the preferences that you specify for them. Select the
appropriate option on the screen to indicate your preference. If you indicated that an expiry
advice should be generated, you need to indicate:

Before – Select this option if the advice is to be generated before expiry.

After Days with New value Date - Select this option if the advice is to be generated after
expiry.
Notice Days
Specify the number of days before/after expiry when the advice should be generated.
4.2.1.8 Generating LC Closure Advices
While creating an LC product, you can indicate whether a closure advice should be generated for
LCs involving the product.
Required
Check this option to indicate that a closure advice should be generated for LCs involving the
product.
Closure Advice
These advices are generated based on the preferences that you specify for them. Select the
appropriate option on the screen to indicate your preference. If you indicated that a closure
advice should be generated, you need to indicate:

Before – Select this option if the advice is to be generated before closure.

After Days with New value Date - Select this option if the advice is to be generated after
closure.
4-11
Notice Days
Specify the number of days before/after closure when the advice should be generated.
Rate Code
When defining the settlement details for a product, you can specify the rate type (under the Rate
Code option) that should be used in case of cross-currency settlements. Your specification for the
product will default to all contracts involving the product. However, you can change the rate type
defined for the product to suit a contract entered under the product. The ‘rate type’ indicates the
type of exchange rate that will be used. It can be:

Mid rate maintained for the currency pair

Buy or Sell rate depending upon the nature of the transaction (debit or credit).
In case of charges, the system will apply mid rate maintained for the currency pair as per
default rate type maintained in preferences at LC Product Level.
4.2.1.9 Generating Charge Claim Advice
Claim Advice in Swift
Check this box to determine whether the charge claim advice should be generated in SWIFT.
4.2.1.10
Specifying Applicable Rules
You need to indicate the rules applicable for the guarantee.
Applicable Rule
Indicate the rule applicable by selecting the appropriate value from the list of values. The
available values are as follows:

ISPR: The guarantee is subject to International Standby Practices.

URDG: The guarantee is subjected to the ICC Uniform rules of Demand Guarantees.

OTHR: The guarantee is subjected to another set of rules

NONE: The guarantee is not subjected to any rules
Note the following:

The above values are applicable only for Guarantee type of products.

The default value of Applicable Rule is set to NONE. This is applicable only for
Guarantee type of products.
For Import and Export type of products, the following values are applicable:

UCP LATEST VERSION
4-12

EUCP LATEST VERSION

UCPURR LATEST VERSION

EUCPURR LATEST VERSION

ISP LATEST VERSION

OTHR: The guarantee is subjected to another set of rules
Note the following:

If the guarantee is subjected to rules other than that provided in the list of values, the
applicable rule must be indicated as ‘OTHR’.

The default value of Applicable Rule is set to UCP LATEST VERSION. This is applicable
only for Import/Export type of products.

Based on the product type, the list of values will display rules applicable for the product.

‘Applicable Rule’ and ‘Rule Narrative’ will be enabled only for import, export and
guarantee product types.
Rule Narrative
This is enabled only if ‘Applicable Rule’ is set to ‘OTHR’. It is mandatory to specify the rule
narrative if the applicable rule is ‘OTHR’. You need to describe the Applicable rule here. Oracle
FLEXCUBE will validate the rule narrative for slashes.
Note the following:

‘Rule Narrative’ should not start or end with ‘/’ or should not have two consecutive
slashes.

The above fields will be enabled only for a guarantee.

The Applicable Rule and Rule Narrative cannot be amended after authorization.
Applicable Rule For Reimbursement
Select applicable rule for which you need a reimbursement from the adjoining drop-down list. This
list displays the following:

URR Latest Version–Select if the applicable type is latest version of URR.

NOTURR–Select if the applicable type is NOTURR.
LIFO/FIFO Rule
Specify the order in which the availment under this contract should be processed. You can
choose one of the following options:
If multiple amendments are made to the LC contract amount, then the system applies the
FIFO/LIFO rule when utilization is made against the LC contract.
4-13

LIFO – LC amount will be utilized in ‘First In First Out’ order when availment is triggered
against the multiple amended LC contract.

FIFO – LC amount will be utilized in Last In First Out order when availment is triggered
against the multiple amended LC contract.
The system will calculate the commission accordingly.
The system applies FIFO / LIFO rule when it finds that multiple amendment has been made to an
LC contract against which utilization has been completed.
Confirmation Required
Check this option to indicate that confirmation message is required for all LCs under this product.
Partial Confirmation Allowed
Check this box to confirm the partial amount. The remaining amount can be confirmed after you
receive the approval from the external agent.
Partial confirmation is allowed only for export LC.
Allow Prepay
Check this option to indicate that prepayment should be allowed for commissions that are marked
as ‘Arrears’.
Loan
Specify the loan details here.
This is allowed only for Shipping Guarantee product.
Collateral Funding by Loan
Check this box to indicate that the guarantee needs to be funded by a loan.
Loan Bridge GL
Specify the bridge GL used for accounting between loan product and shipping guarantee. The
adjoining option list displays a list of all GLs. Choose the appropriate one.
Loan Product
Specify the loan product used for the creation of loan account. The adjoining option list displays a
list of loan products. Choose the appropriate one.
Collateral Transfer Bridge
4-14
Specify the bridge GL used for collateral transfer from LC to shipping guarantee and shipping
guarantee to Bill. The adjoining option list displays a list of all GLs. Choose the appropriate one.
Status
Specify the following status details:
Auto Status Control
Check this box to set automatic status control for the LC product. If you do not check this box, the
system will not consider the LC contracts associated with this product for automatic status
change.
The status of this checkbox is defaulted to the field ‘Auto Status Change’ of every LC contract
associated with this product. However, you can modify this at the contract level.
4.2.1.11
Specifying Accrual Details
Specify the following accrual details.
Frequency
Specify the frequency of accrual for commission, charge or fees. The frequency can be one of the
following:

Daily

Monthly

Quarterly

Half-yearly

Yearly
In case of monthly, quarterly, half yearly or yearly accruals, you should specify the date on which
the accruals have to be done during the month. For example, if you specify the date as ‘30’,
accruals will be carried out on the 30th of the month, depending on the frequency.
If you fix the accrual date for the last working day of the month, you should specify the date as
‘31’ and indicate the frequency. If you indicate the frequency as monthly, the accruals will be
done at the end of every month -- that is, on 31st for months with 31 days, on 30th for months
with 30 days and on 28th or 29th, as the case may be, for February.
If you specify the frequency as quarterly and fix the accrual date as the last day of the month,
then the accruals will be done on the last day of the month at the end of every quarter. It works in
a similar fashion for half-yearly accrual frequency.
If you set the accrual frequency as quarterly, half yearly or yearly, you have to specify the month
in which the first accrual has to begin, besides the date.
4-15
Month
If you choose one of the following options for accrual frequency, specify the month in which the
first accrual has to begin:

Quarterly

Half-yearly

Yearly
Day
If you choose one of the following options for accrual frequency, specify the date on which the
accruals have to be done during the month:

Monthly

Quarterly

Half-yearly

Yearly
4.2.2 Specifying Accounting Roles
Click ‘Accounting Roles’ button to maintain accounting roles for the product.
4-16
4.2.3 Specifying Events
Click ‘Events’ button to maintain accounting roles for the product.
For further details on maintaining ‘Events’ refer to the ‘Product Definition’ User Manual under
Modularity Modularity.
4.2.3.1 Specifying Event for Reissue of Guarantee
You must associate the event REIS for an LC product for processing of reissue of guarantee. The
system will display the REIS event during Events definition in the Product Maintenance.
Refer Products user manual for detailed explanation of ‘The Product Event Accounting Entries
and Advices Maintenance screen’.
4.2.3.2 Generating advices for the Insurance Company
For generation of advice to insurance company for the LC product, you need to associate the
message type ‘LC_INSURANCEADV’ for the events BISS and AMND respectively. During
authorization of these two events, the system will process the messages for all import LCs.
4-17
Refer Product Definition User Manual for the procedure to define advices that are generated for
each event.
All the messages are sent to the insurance company via mail. For this reason, you need to
specify the insurance code (Receiver) and the mailing address of the Insurance Company in the
LC Drafts screen.
Refer the Annexure chapter to view an advice sample generated for the insurance company.
4.2.3.3 Generating Advices for Faxing LC Confirmation to Counterparty
For generation of advice to the counterparty at the time of confirming an LC, you need to
associate the message type ‘LC_INSTR_COPY’ and ‘LC_AM_INST_COPY’ for the events BISS
and AMND respectively. During authorization of these two events, the system will process the
messages for confirmed LCs.
Refer the Annexure chapter to view an advice sample generated for faxing the confirmation to the
counterparty.
4.2.4 Specifying Branch and Currency
Click ‘Branch & Currency’ button to maintain branch and currency restrictions.
4-18
4.2.5 Specifying Customer Details
Click ‘Customer’ button to maintain customer restrictions.
4-19
4.2.6 Specifying Commission Details
Click ‘Commission’ button to maintain commission details.
4-20
4.2.7 Specifying Free Format Text
Click ‘Free Format Text’ button to maintain free format messages.
4.2.8 Specifying Tracer Details
Click ‘Tracer’ button to maintain tracer details.
4-21
4.2.9 Specifying Charge Details
Click ‘Charge’ button to maintain charge details.
4-22
4.2.10 Specifying Tax Details
Click ‘Tax’ button to maintain tax details.
4.2.11 Specifying MIS Details
Click ‘MIS’ button to maintain MIS details.
4-23
4.2.12 Setting Criteria for Status Change
You can set specific criteria for status change of an LC product using ‘Letters of Credit Product –
User Defined Status’ screen. To invoke the screen, click ‘Status’ button on ‘Letters of Credit
Product Definition’ screen.
Specify the following details:
Product Code
The system displays the code that identifies the product being maintained.
Product Description
The system displays a brief description of the product.
Status
Specify the status. The LC contract will be moved to the status that you define here. If more than
one status are defined for a product, you need to indicate the sequence in which a contract
moves from one status to another.
Sequence
The system displays the sequence number if you have defined more than one status for the
product.
Transaction
Specify the transaction code to be used for the GL transfer entries involved in the status change.
The option list displays all valid transactions that are applicable. Choose the appropriate one.
4-24
A transaction code is associated with every accounting entry in Oracle FLEXCUBE. In case of
status change, a component is transferred from one GL to another resulting in a new accounting
entry. The system uses this transaction code to pass such entries.
Accruals
You can set certain preferences for accruals in the event of status change. These preferences
are applicable to non periodic commission components that are collected in arrears. These are
not applicable to components that are collected in advance.
Stop Accruals
Check this box to stop further accrual on components when the LC is moved to the status defined
above. If you do not check this, the system will continue to accrue the components even after LC
status change.
Reverse Accruals
Check this box to reverse the accrued outstanding amount when the LC is moved to the status
defined above. If you do not check this box, the system will not reverse the accrued amount after
LC status change.
Complete Accruals
Check this box to complete the accruals when the LC is moved to the status defined above.
Further to completion of the accrual, the system proceeds with the status change. If you do not
check this option, the system will not complete the accruals.
Automatic Movement
Here, you can indicate whether the status change has to be carried out automatically.
Forward
Check this option to automatically move forward the status of the LC. If you do not check this
option, the system will not facilitate automatic forward movement of the LC status. This is
applicable only if LC automatic status processing is enabled.
Reverse
Check this option to automatically move the status in reverse. If you do not check this option, the
system will not facilitate automatic reverse movement of LC status. This is applicable only if LC
automatic status processing is enabled.
Derivation Rule
You can use the following fields to define derivation rules:
4-25
Derivation Rule
If you have opted for automatic status change, specify the criteria (rules) based on which the
system will perform the status change. An LC is said to be in a specific status if any one of the
five conditions associated with the status holds true. If all the conditions are false, the LC will
automatically move to the next available status for which the condition is true.
You can define five conditions for each status. The conjunctions ‘AND’ and ‘OR’ can be used to
create multiple conditions. Use those buttons appropriately between each condition.
Elements
Select element based on which you need to build a condition for automatic status change of LC.
For letters of credit, you need to select ‘Credit Rating’. The system resolves the value for this
element as the credit rating for the main applicant of the LC in customer information maintenance.
Operators
Select the operator for building a condition for automatic status change. You can use multiple
elements, in conjunction with the functions and arithmetic operators. The drop-down list displays
the following operators:

+ (add)

- (subtract)

* (multiply)

/ (divide)
Choose the appropriate one.
Logical Operators
Select the logical operator for building a condition for automatic status change. The system uses
the logical operators in combination with the elements for creating derivation rules. The dropdown list displays the following logical operators:

> (greater than)

>= (greater than or equal to)

< (less than)

<= (less than or equal to)

= (equal to)

< > (not equal to)
Choose the appropriate one.
The ‘Customer Credit Rating’ field at the Customer level will be used as a SDE
CUSTOMER_CREDIT_RATING for defining status change rules. This will also be available for
provision rule definition at the LC product level.
4-26
Upward and Downward Movement
Specify the following details:
Accounting Role
Specify the role to be used for provisioning accounting entries for the LC contracts in the selected
status. The option list displays all accounting roles pertaining to commission components.
Choose the appropriate one.
Description
The system displays a brief description of the selected accounting role.
Accounting Head
Specify the account head (GL) to which the provisioning accounting entries should be passed, for
the LC contracts in the selected status. The option list displays real as well as contingent general
ledgers. Choose the appropriate one.
Description
The system displays a brief description of the selected accounting head.
In case of prepayment of commission for arrears, if the status of the contingent set of GLs
changes, the system does not move the prepaid commission. Accrual continues to take place
from the real GLs until the prepaid commission is exhausted. Contingent accrual takes place
once the prepaid commission is exhausted.
4.2.13 Specifying UDF Details
Click ‘Fields’ button to maintain user defined fields.
4-27
For further information on the generic attributes that you can define for a product, please refer the
following Oracle FLEXCUBE User Manuals:

Products

Interest

Charges and Fees

Commissions

Tax

User Defined Fields

Settlements
4-28
5.
5.1
Processing LC Contract
Introduction
An LC contract is an instruction wherein a customer requests the bank to issue, advise or confirm
a letter of credit, for a trade transaction. An LC substitutes a bank’s name and credit for that of the
parties involved. The bank thus undertakes to pay the seller/beneficiary even if the remitter fails
to pay.
Example
Ms. Keturah Smith (buyer or importer) in India and Mr. Silas Reed (seller or exporter) stationed in Paris
agree to a sales contract. In this contract the buyer Keturah Smith, is required to arrange for her bank, Midas
Bank, India (buyers bank) to open or issue an LC in favour of the seller, Mr. Reed.
Midas Bank sends the LC to Mr. Reed’s bank, Berliner Bank, Paris (advising bank). The advising bank then
sends details of the credit to the seller, who is the beneficiary of the credit. On receiving the credit details Mr.
Reed, ships the merchandise traded under the LC to Ms. Smith. He then presents the draft and documents
to the advising bank. The negotiating bank pays Mr. Reed. On making the payment, Berliner Bank will send
the documents to Midas Bank (issuing bank) and will debit the issuing bank’s account.
The issuing bank examines the document and charges Ms. Smith’s account. It releases the documents to
her allowing her to claim the merchandise.
The sequence of the events involved, in processing the LC can be considered an LC contract.
The specific letters of credit thus processed for the customers of your bank constitutes a contract.
An LC Contract would therefore require information on:

Who is the buyer or importer

Who is the seller or the exporter

The operation that your branch is performing on the LC

The merchandise traded under the LC

Specifications for the transportation of the consignment

The documents that should accompany the LC

The amount for which the LC is drawn

Details of the parties involved in the LC

The type of LC you are processing

The details of the insurance company under which the goods traded are covered
You have defined products to group together or categorize LC which share broad similarities.
Under each Product that you have defined, you can enter specific LCs based on your customers’
needs. Each of these will constitute a contract. While products provide a general framework and
serve to classify or categorise LCs, contracts are customer specific.
By default an LC inherits the attributes of the product to which it is associated. This means that
you will not have to define these general attributes each time you input an LC involving a product.
5-1
5.2
Capturing LC Contract Details
You can invoke the ‘Letters of Credit Contract Input’ screen by typing ‘LCDTRONL’ in the field at
the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the adjoining arrow button. Click New
icon. The LC contract screen with no values in the fields is displayed.
Click new icon in the toolbar.
For further information on User Maintenance screen, refer the ‘Defining a User Profile’ section in
the ‘Security Management’ chapter in the ‘Security Management System’ User Manual.
If you are calling a contract that has already been created, click on the contract reference number
in the Summary screen.
The details of the contracts that you have entered will be displayed in a tabular form. From the
‘Summary’ screen, you can open an existing contract by double clicking the contract.
5-2
The LC Contract Details screen consists of a header and footer that contains fields specific to the
contract being entered. Besides these, you will also notice six tabs and a vertical array of buttons
along the lines of which you can enter details of the contract. Contract details are grouped into
the various screens according to the similarities they share.
The LC Contract Screen contains eight tabs along the lines of which you can enter details of the
contract. The eight tabs are:
Tabs
Description
Main
Click this tab to enter the essential terms of the LC. This screen along with its
fields has been detailed under the head Entering Main Contract Details.
Preferences
Under this tab, you can set the preferences specific to the letter of credit contract
Parties
In the screen that corresponds to this tab, you can enter the details of all parties
involved in the LC. This screen along with its fields has been detailed under the
head Entering Party Details.
Parties
Limit
Using this tab, you can track the limits for joint venture customers who are parties
to the letter of credit contract
Shipments
In the screen that corresponds to this tab you can specify shipment details and
description of goods traded under the LC and port information
Documents
In the screen that corresponds to this tab you can enter details of the documents
required under an LC and the clauses that should accompany the documents
Tracers
Click on this tab to enter details of the tracers that should be generated for an
LC.
Advices
In the screen corresponding to this tab you can view, suppress and prioritize the
advices that are to be generated for a contract. This screen along with its fields
has been detailed under the head Specifying Advises for an LC.
On the Contract Detailed screen are also displayed some buttons. They enable you to invoke a
number of functions vital to the processing of an LC contract. These buttons have been briefly
described below.
Buttons
Description
Drafts
Click this button to capture the details of draft drawn for the LC. You can specify
the name of the insurance company that is covering the goods traded under the
LC.
Commission
On invoking this button Commission details of the contract is displayed
Charges
This button invokes the Charges, Commissions and Fees (ICCF) service.
On invoking this function you will be presented with a screen where the ICCF
rate, amount, currency and the waive charge parameter can be specified.
The Processing Charges and Fees manual, details the procedure for
maintaining charge rules. It also deals with the linking of a charge rules to a
5-3
Buttons
Description
product and the application of the rule on an LC.
The Processing Commissions manual, details the procedure for maintaining
commission rules. It also deals with the linking of a commission rule to a
product and the application of the rule on an LC.
Settlement
Click this button to invoke the Settlement screens. Based on the details that you
enter in the settlement screens the LC will be settled. The details of these
screens have been discussed in the Settlements manual.
Tax
This button invokes the Tax services. The Processing Tax manual details the
procedure for maintaining tax rules and schemes. It also deals with the linking
of a tax scheme to a product and the application of the scheme on an LC.
Collateral
In the screen that corresponds to this button, you can specify details of the cash
that you collect as collateral form a customer for the LC that you process. The
details of this screen are discussed under the head Specifying Collateral details
for an LC.
Events
Click this button to view the details of the events and accounting entries that a
contract involves.
Linkages
Details
Clicking this button invokes the Contract Linkages screen. In this screen, you
can link an LC to a deposit or account, and indicate the funds that you would
like to block.
Fields
Click this button to specify values for the user defined fields (UDFs).
MIS
Click this button to define MIS details for the LC.
Transfer
Details
If the LC is transferred to a new party, you can view the transaction details.
BC Linkages
Click this button to specify BC linkages
Split
Settlement
Click this button to specify split settlement details
Loan
Preference
Click this button to specify loan preference details
OFAC Check
Click this button to call the OFAC service and view the response from the
OFAC system.
Brokerage
Use this button to capture brokerage details for the LC contract and set your
preferences for sharing the brokerage amount among multiple brokers.
Documents
Click this button to capture the customer related documents in central content
management repository.
All Messages
Click this button to view all messages associated to contract.
5-4
Refer the chapter titled ‘Capturing Additional Details’ in this User Manual for further details about
these buttons.
Enter valid inputs into all the mandatory fields or you will not be able to save the contract. After
making the mandatory entries for the LC, save the contract by either clicking save icon in the
toolbar. On saving the contract after entering all the required details in the system, the system
validates the value of the contract amount against the following:

Product transaction limit

User Input limit
If the transaction currency and the limit currency are different, then the system converts the
amount financed to limit currency and checks if the same is in excess of the product transaction
limit and user input limit. If this holds true, the system indicates the same with below
override/error messages:

Number of levels required for authorizing the transaction

Transaction amount is in excess of the input limit of the user
You have the option to amend all the unauthorized entries made for an LC. However, after
authorization, certain fields cannot be amended.
Click ‘Exit’ or ‘Cancel’ button to go back to the Application Browser.
5.2.1 Creating Contract
Through the screens that follow in this section, you can process all types of LCs (import, export,
invoice, clean, guarantees, shipping guarantees). You can choose to enter the details of a
contract using the following methods:

Selecting a template that has been created earlier - the details that have been stored in
the template will be displayed. You can change the values required in all fields except the
Product Code and Type.

Copying the details from an existing contract and changing only the details that are
different for the LC you are entering.

Using your keyboard or the option lists that are available at the various fields to enter the
details of the LC afresh.
To facilitate quick input, you only need to input the product code. Based on the product code,
many of the fields will be defaulted. Overwrite on these defaults to suit your requirement. You can
add details that are specific to the LC like the LC amount, details of the buyer and the seller, etc.
5.2.2 Uploading LCs
Oracle FLEXCUBE allows you to automatically upload LCs.
5-5
The MT 700 and MT 701 messages that you receive can be uploaded into Oracle FLEXCUBE as
LC contracts. Depending on whether confirmation is required, the uploaded LCs will be of type
‘advice’ or ‘advice and confirm’.
When LC is uploaded from incoming MT700 then ‘Partial Confirmation Allowed’ will be checked at
the product level and the operation of the contract is set to ‘Confirm’ or ‘Advice and confirm’.
If the operation code is set to ‘Confirm’ and ‘Advice and Confirm’ for contracts uploaded from
incoming MT700, then the system will default the Confirm Amount as LC Amount and confirm
percent as 100
For contracts uploaded from incoming MT740, Undertaking Amount will be defaulted to LC
Amount and undertaking expiry date will be null. Undertaking expiry date can be specified on
amend of contract once the contract is created through incoming MT740.
If you modify the LC amount, the undertaken amount will not be impacted. However, the nonundertaken amount will be respectively modified based on the change in LC amount.
If the checkbox ‘Undertake Entire LC on STP’ is checked on ‘Letters of Credit branch Parameters
Maintenance’ screen, the system will pass the following entries on receipt of MT740:
Dr/ Cr
Account Role Code
Amount Tag
Amount Tag
Description
Dr
LC_OCU_OFFSET
(Unutilized Credit Offset)
REIM_UND_AMT
Reimbursement
Undertaking Amount
Cr
LC_OCU (Outstanding
Credit Unutilized)
REIM_UND_AMT
Reimbursement
Undertaking Amount
If the checkbox ‘Undertake Entire LC on STP’ is not checked, the system will pass the following
entries on receipt of MT740:
Dr/ Cr
Account Role Code
Amount Tag
Amount Tag Description
Dr
LC_REM_NU_OFF
REIM_NON_UND_AMT
Reimbursement Nonundertaking Amount
Cr
LC_REM_NU
REIM_NON_UND_AMT
Reimbursement Nonundertaking Amount
While liquidating a bill under an LC, the system verifies the liquidation amount and the
undertaken amount. If the liquidation amount is greater than the undertaken amount, the system
displays an override message. You may choose to proceed or cancel.
5.3
Specifying Contract Details
You can specify the following details:
5-6
Product
Select the product from the list of products created in the LC. Details of this product get defaulted
from the Product screen.
Product Description
Product description given for this product gets defaulted from the Product screen.
Contract Reference Number
The Contract Reference Number identifies a contract uniquely. It is automatically generated by
the system for each contract.
The Contract Reference Number is a combination of the branch code, the product code, the date
on which the contract is booked (in Julian format) and a running serial number for the booking
date. The Reference Number consists of a three-digit branch code, a four-character product
code, a five-digit Julian Date and a four-digit serial number.
The Julian Date has the following format:
YYDDD Here, YY stands for the last two digits of the year and DDD for the number of day(s) that
has/have elapsed, in the year.
Type
The type of product gets displayed here from the product screen, specifying if the product is of
type import/export or revolving or non-revolving.
An arrangement, in which the continuing availability of the LC revolves upon shipment and/or
presentation of documents and not upon specific amendment, is known as a Revolving LC.
Following are the product types:

Import

Export

Guarantee

Standby

Shipping Guarantee
User Reference Number
In addition, a contract is also identified by a unique User Reference Number. By default, the
Contract Reference Number generated by the system will be taken as the User Reference
Number. But you have the option to change the User Ref Number. Oracle FLEXCUBE also
provides you the facility to generate the user reference number in a specific format.
You can specify a format for the generation of the User Reference Number in the ‘Sequence
Generation’ screen available in the Application Browser.
5-7
Refer to the Core Services User Manual for details on maintaining a sequence format.
External Reference Number
This is a unique message identification number that will be used to identify an incoming message
coming from an external system. This is defined as the ICN number. On upload of an incoming
message into Oracle FLEXCUBE, this number, given by the external system, will be stored in
Oracle FLEXCUBE and passed on to the contract generated as a result of the incoming
message. If the incoming message results in an outgoing message, the ICN number will be linked
to the outgoing message also.
This number will help you in creating a relationship between the incoming message, the resultant
contract in Oracle FLEXCUBE, and the outgoing message, if any.
For instance, if an incoming MT103 results in an FT transaction, then ICN number of the incoming
MT103 will be linked to the FT contract generated due to the upload of the incoming payment
message.
If an Incoming message results in an outgoing contract (outgoing message), Oracle FLEXCUBE
will store the External reference number (ICN Number) at the following levels.

Incoming Message Level

Contract Level (Resulted due to the Incoming message)

Outgoing message (As a result of the above contract)
Operation Code
The operations that you can perform on an LC are determined by the type of LC being processed.
The operation that you specify will determine the accounting entries that are passed and the
messages that will be generated. You can select an operation from the option list available. The
type of operation that you can perform on an LC has been listed below:

Open an import LC or guarantee

Open and confirm an import LC

Pre-advice an export LC

Advice an export LC

Advice and confirm an export LC

Confirm an export LC

Advice a guarantee

Import LC with pre-advice
5.3.1 Main Tab
While defining a product, you defined a broad outline that can be applied on LCs. However, while
processing an LC involving a product, you need to enter information specific to the LC.
5-8
This information is captured through the LC Contract Details Main screen.
The following are the features of the contract details main screen.
5.3.1.1 Terms
The terms defined for an LC, form the basis on which the LC will be processed.
Currency
The currency in which it is drawn
Language
The language to be used for the LC instrument
5-9
Contract Amount
Specify the amount for which the LC is drawn. If the contract is linked to an open insurance policy
and the amount is greater than the available amount on the linked policy, the system will display
an override/error message.
Similarly, if the amount is greater than the limit specified for every conveyance of the linked
policy, the system will display an override.
Outstanding Amount
The balance amount available after the availment of an LC is displayed here.
Reference Number
The related LC Reference Number if the LC being processed has to be referred along with
another already opened (for example, an import LC would be a related LC for a shipping
guarantee).
Expiry Place
Specify the city, country, or the bank where the LC expires.
Applicable Rule
System defaults this value from the product level. However, you can modify it. The value
displayed here is not picked up in the field 40F. Message type ‘MT740’ displays ‘URR LATEST
VERSION’ irrespective of any value displayed in the option 'Applicable Rule'.
Issue Date
Enter the date on which the LC is issued.
Effective Date
In the LC Contract Details screen, you can capture the Effective Date of a guarantee. The
effective date that you capture for a guarantee will be printed on the instrument.
By default, the system displays the Issue Date, in the Effective Date field. You can change the
default value (for a guarantee) to a date in the past or future.
As stated earlier, the Effective Date along with the Tenor of the LC will be used to calculate the
Expiry Date of the LC.
Commission for a guarantee, will be calculated according to your specifications for the
product that the guarantee involves. In the LC Product Definition screen, you can indicate if
commission is to be calculated from:

The Issue Date

The Effective Date

The earlier of the two
5-10
Tenor
All LC contracts will be associated with the standard tenor maintained for the product under which
the contract is being processed.
The tenor of the LC will be used in combination with the Effective Date to arrive at the Expiry Date
of the LC, as follows:
LC Expiry Date = Effective Date + Tenor
In case both the tenor and the expiry date are specified, the system will ignore the tenor that is
manually entered and recalculate it based on the expiry date.
However, for a specific LC contract, you can choose to maintain a different tenor. The tenor of an
LC can be expressed in one of the following units:

Days (D)

Months (M)

Years (Y)
If you do not specify a unit, the system will automatically append ‘D’ with the numeric value
(tenor) indicating that the tenor is expressed in Days.
When you change the tenor and move to the next field, the system automatically updates the
expiry date based on the tenor specified.
Expiry Date
Specify the date on which the LC contract expires.
If you leave this field blank, the system will calculate the expiry date based on the tenor. Now,
suppose that you have specified both the tenor and the expiry date. In that case, the system
ignores the tenor and recalculates it based on the expiry date.
You can modify the expiry date. When you change the expiry date and move to the next field, the
system automatically updates the tenor based on the expiry date specified. The closure date,
which is dependent on the expiry date, will also be recalculated.
The system prompts override messages:

If the LC expiry date is later than any linked collateral’s expiry date.

If the LC expiry date extended as part of amendment is later than any limit line’s expiry
date.
The system will validate when a new limit line is attached during actions other than New.
5-11
Auto Closure
Check this option to indicate that the LC should be automatically closed.
This field is not applicable for LC Module Contracts under LC Product with Product Type `G’
(Guarantee).
Closure Date
The date of closure is based on the ‘Closure Days’ maintained for the product involved in the LC.
The number of days specified as the Closure Days is calculated from the expiry date of the LC, to
arrive at the Closure Date.
LC Closure Date = LC Expiry Date + Closure Days
If the ‘Closure Days’ are not maintained at the Product level, then the Closure Date is calculated
as follows:
LC Closure Date = LC Expiry Date + 30
However, you can change the closure date, thus calculated, to any date after the expiry date.
If the closure date falls on a holiday, the system will prompt you with an override message.
Stop Date
This date will be defaulted to LC Expiry date. Stop date cannot be earlier than Issue date and
later than expiry date.
Pre Advice Date
Specify date on which the pre-advice was initiated from the adjoining calendar. The current date
is defaulted as pre-advice date, if the operation is Pre-advice LC; however you can change to an
earlier date.
Modifications are not allowed after first authorization.
Reference to Pre-advice
Specify reference to the pre-advice, if any, generated for the LC contract.
A pre-advice is a brief advice of documentary credit sent by the Issuing Bank to the Advising
Bank. This is to be followed by the LC instrument that contains all the details of the LC. It notifies
the recipient that the named buyer has opened an LC for a specified amount on a named seller
(beneficiary).
Modifications are not allowed after first authorization.
5-12
Rule Narrative
This is defaulted from the product level. The value displayed here can be amended at the
contract level. However, once the contract is authorized, you cannot make any amendments.
Oracle FLEXCUBE validates the rule narrative for any slashes.
Note the following:

The rule narrative should not start or end with ‘/’

It should not have two consecutive slashes
This is enabled only if the Applicable Rule is ‘OTHR’.
This value will be repeated twice in field 79 of an outgoing MT707 message if the free format text
associated with the LC_AMND_INSTR advice exceeds 1750 characters in length.
5.3.1.2 Tolerance
Tolerance denotes the variance that has to be built around the LC amount, to arrive at the actual
availability amount for the LC. The tolerance percentage is used to build the Maximum LC
amount, when some component of the trade transaction like the freight, insurance, etc., is not
covered in the LC amount.
Positive %
The positive tolerance is the percentage that should be added to the LC amount, to arrive at the
Maximum LC Amount. This amount will be considered as the LC outstanding LC amount.
Negative %
The negative tolerance is the percentage that should be subtracted from the LC amount, to arrive
at the Minimum LC Amount. The negative tolerance is captured for information purposes only. It
will form part of the LC and amendment instruments.
The positive and negative tolerance specified for the product associated with the LC is defaulted.
If you change the defaulted Positive Tolerance, an override message is displayed.
Maximum Amount
The Maximum LC Amount indicates the maximum amount that can be availed under the LC. This
amount is arrived at, by adding the positive tolerance to the LC amount.000
Max. LC Amount = LC Amount + Positive Tolerance
5-13
If you have indicated the positive tolerance to be zero then:
Max. LC Amount = LC Amount
A customer cannot, at any point in time, avail more than the Maximum LC amount.
About Clause
This clause further qualifies the LC amount. Select one of the following options from the adjoining
drop-down list:

About

Approximately

Circa

None
Liability Amount
Based on the value you specify in ‘Revolves In’ field, the LC Liability Amount will be computed
and displayed.
Liability %
The liability percentage is used to track the maximum LC amount against a given percentage. A
bank would like to limit its exposure to a new or existing customer as LC is a commitment given
by the bank. Although the bank sanctions an LC limit (maximum LC amount which includes
tolerance) to a customer it may like to specify a percentage over and above this limit .This will
result in the customer being shown to be liable or tracked for a higher amount. Specifying a
liability percentage is from the perspective of risk management and provides cushion to the bank.
The liability amount is arrived at in the following manner:
Liability Amount = Maximum LC Amount + Liability % of the LC amount
If you have indicated the liability percentage to be zero then,
Liability Amount = Maximum LC Amount
This amount is computed by the system using the method indicated above, only if you have
specified a liability tolerance. If a Liability tolerance has not been specified, you can enter a
liability amount of your choice. However, the liability amount that you can enter should be at least
equal to the maximum LC amount.
Example
You have issued an LC for USD $100,000 and the positive tolerance specified for the LC is 10%.
This means that the Maximum LC amount is:
Max. LC Amount = LC Amount + Positive Tolerance
5-14
= USD 100,000 + 10% of USD 100,000
Maximum LC amount = USD 110,000
If you have specified the liability percentage to be 10%, the liability amount will computed by the system in
the following manner:
Liability Amount = Maximum LC Amount + Liability % of the Maximum LC amount
= USD 110,000 + 10% of the Maximum LC amount
Liability Amount = USD 121,000
In this case you cannot effect any change to the liability amount.
If you have not specified liability tolerance
If you have not specified liability tolerance for the LC, the liability amount will be USD 110,000. In this case,
you can specify a Liability amount of your own. However, the amount that you enter cannot be less than the
maximum LC amount of USD 110,000.
Under the following circumstances, system will display an error message:

Latest shipment date of the import LC is greater than the latest shipment date of export
LC.

Expiry date of import LC is greater than expiry date of export LC.

Import LC amount is greater than export LC amount.

If you check the option ‘Back to Back LC’ for an export LC.
The system will display an override message if you try to amend, cancel or close an export
LC that is linked to an import LC. The above mentioned validations are also done while uploading
an LC contract.
5.3.1.3 Customer
One of the parties in the LC should be a customer of your bank with a valid CIF ID. The details of
this party are captured in the Contract Main Screen. It is then defaulted to the Parties screen.
Customer Name
If none of the parties in the LC is a customer of the bank, you should enter the CIF ID defined for
the walk-in customer and give the details of one of the parties for it.
The party type of the counterparty of the LC is defaulted based on the type of LC you are
processing. If you process an import LC ‘APP’ (indicating applicant) is defaulted. If you process
an export LC ‘BEN’ (indicating beneficiary) is defaulted. You can change the default.
Customer
If the applicant is a customer of your bank, specify the CIF ID assigned to the customer, the
related details of the customer will be automatically picked up.
5-15
If you are processing an Export LC, you should typically specify details of the beneficiary.
Party Type
Indicate the party type of the customer who is the counter party of the LC. You can select the
valid party type from the adjoining option list.
The details of the other parties involved in the LC are captured in the Parties screen. The
Customer Details specified in this screen will be defaulted to the Parties screen.
License Expiry Date
After you capture the CIF ID of the customer involved in the contract, the Import License Expiry
Date maintained for the selected customer is defaulted to the screen. The system does not do
any validations based on the Expiry Date. It is used only for information purpose.
Dated
Enter the date of the Their Reference. This would normally be the date on which you have a
correspondence from the party regarding the LC.
Their Reference
This is the reference of the party whose CIF ID you have input. This will be picked up
appropriately in the correspondence sent for the LC.
For an export LC, a reference for the Issuing Bank is mandatory. It is optional for other parties.
5.3.1.4 Revolving
You can capture the following details.
Revolves In
LCs can revolve in Time or in Value. Select the appropriate option from the adjoining drop-down
list.
Automatic Reinstatement
The mode of reinstatement for a revolving LC can be either automatic or manual. Check against
this field to indicate that the mode of reinstatement is automatic.
This field is applicable only for an LC revolving in time.
Cumulative
Check this box to indicate that the LC is cumulative. Leave it unchecked to indicate otherwise.
5-16
Frequency
For the letters of credit that revolve in time, you can specify the reinstatement frequency. This
frequency represents the maximum number of reinstatements applicable to the LC. Based on the
value you specify, the LC Liability Amount is computed and displayed. During LC reinstatement,
the system calculates the next reinstatement date based on the units and the current
reinstatement date.
If the number of reinstatements exceeds the frequency set here, the system displays an override
message when you save the LC. You need to ratify this override at the time of contract
authorization.
Frequency is not applicable to the LCs that revolve in value. In such cases, once the LC is
availed, the system reinstates it with the maximum contract amount during end of day operations.
For this, the reinstatement option should be set to 'Automatic'.
Units
For LCs, which revolve in time, the maximum number of reinstatements is calculated based on
the Reinstatement Frequency you specify. In the Units field, you can choose one of the following:

Months

Days
Next REIN Date
The system computes and displays the date of next reinstatement based on the value in ‘Units’
field.
Example 1: Reinstatement Frequency in Days
Let us assume you have set up the following details for an LC:
Issuing date
-
January 01, 2003
Frequency
-
60 Days
Next Reinstatement Date is calculated using the following formula:
Issue Date + Frequency
Using this formula:
= 01 January 2003 + 60 Days
= 02 March 2003
Example 2: Reinstatement Frequency in Months
Let us assume you have set up the following details for an LC:
Issuing date
-
January 01, 2003
5-17
Issuing date
-
January 01, 2003
Frequency
-
2 Months
Using the formula for Next Reinstatement Date, you get:
= 01 January 2003 + 2 Months
= 01 March 2003
Partial Closure
Check this box to perform partial closure of LC manually.
You can check this box during the following conditions:

‘Unlock’ Operation

If the product is not of Revolving type

On or before the Expiry date of the LC
On saving the amendment after checking this option, PCLS event takes place. The Limits,
Outstanding Liability and the Cash Collateral are released to the extent of unutilized amount.
Once PCLS event is fired for an LC contract, system does not allow any operation on the LC
other than LC Closure (CLOS). You can reopen the closed LC as existing. While reopening the
LCs for which PCLS is fired earlier, the Limits are tracked, OS Liability and Cash collateral is
increased to the extent of the amount released as part of PCLS.
After PCLS event takes place on the LC contract, if the Bill contract to which the LC is linked is
reversed, the Limits, OS Liability and the Cash Collateral is not released automatically. You have
to manually close the LC. The linkages to the LC are not released automatically as part of PCLS
firing during batch. You have to manually release as part of manual partial closure. The above
processes are skipped for the LC contracts under the product for which the ‘Revolving’ option is
indicated as ‘Yes’.
The system allows manual partial closure during the partial closure days, until the LC is closed.
In case of a partially confirmed export LC contract, the system excludes the bill amount in the
initial stage from the confirmed and unconfirmed portions.
Example
Consider an export LC with the following details:
LC Amount
: GBP 10000
Confirmed Amount
: GBP 7000
Unconfirmed Amount
: GBP 3000
By linking this LC, a bill of GBP 2000 has been created at Initial stage.
5-18
During partial closure, the system releases the liability, limits and cash collateral for GBP 8000. The amount
of GBP 2000 is retained as the bill to which the LC is linked may be availed at a later stage.
The system passes the following entries on PCLS:
Dr/ Cr
Account Role Code
Amount Tag
LCY
Amount
LCY Amount
Description
Dr
LC_OCU_OFFSET
(Unutilized Credit Offset)
UCNF_LIAB_OS_AMT
3000
Unconfirmed
LC Amount
Cr
LC_OCU (Outstanding Credit
Unutilized)
UCNF_LIAB_OS_AMT
3000
Unconfirmed
LC Amount
Dr
LC_CNF_OFF (Confirmation
of LC Offset)
CNF_LIAB_OS_AMT
5000
Confirmed LC
Amount
Cr
LC_CNF (Confirmation of LC)
CNF_LIAB_OS_AMT
5000
Confirmed LC
Amount
When the bill is booked in the final stage, AVAL event is triggered. The system initially considers the
confirmed portion on AVAL event.
The bill amount in initial stage, GBP 2000, will be excluded from the confirmed portion. The
remaining GBP 5000 will released. On the unconfirmed portion, the entire amount of GBP 3000
will be released.
Guarantee
If the LC that you are processing is a guarantee you should specify its type. Click the adjoining
drop-down list and select one of the following values:

Bid

Performance

Retention
Current Availability
This field displays the current amount that is available for availment under the LC. This value is
automatically updated when there are availments, amendments or reinstatements so that it
reflects the current amount that is available under the LC.
Outstanding Liability
This field displays the current outstanding liability amount under the LC. This value is
automatically updated when there are availments, amendments or reinstatements so that it
reflects the current amount under the LC.
Memo
Enter information about the LC that is intended for the internal reference of your bank. This
information will not be printed on any correspondence regarding the LC. However, the remarks
are displayed when the details of the LC are displayed or printed.
5-19
5.3.1.5 Reimbursement Undertaking
You can capture the following details.
Undertaking Expiry Date
Specify the undertaking expiry date.
You can claim the reimbursement only till the undertaking expiry date, else, the system will
display the following override message:
The undertaking has been expired.
Undertaking Amount
Specify the amount that can be reimbursed. It can be less than or equal to contract amount.
The system will default the Undertaking Amount value with the Max LC Amount initially when it is
created through the incoming MT740. However you can amend this field by adding the
undertaking amount.
Availed Undertaking Amount
The system displays the availed portion of undertaken amount.
Note the following:

Undertaking Expiry Date and Undertaking Amount fields can be entered for
reimbursement contracts only.

Undertaking Expiry date can be entered only when Undertaking Amount has been
specified.

Undertaking Expiry date cannot be earlier than the issue date or later than the LC Expiry
date.

In case when LC Expiry date is not input then Undertaking Expiry date cannot be greater
than the LC closure date.
Status
Specify the following details:
User Defined Status
Specify the status of the LC contract. The option list displays all valid statuses that are applicable.
Choose the appropriate one.
At the branch level, if you have enabled group level status change for the LC, the system displays
the status of the group with which the LC is associated. However, you can unlock and modify the
statuses of individual contracts. Thus, you can use this field for changing the status of an LC
contract manually.
5-20
Derived Status
The system displays the derived status of the LC contract. You cannot modify this.
5.3.1.6 Credit
Here you can capture the following details.
Type
Indicate the type of credit for which the LC is being processed.
Mode
Indicate the mode of payment through which the LC will be settled.
Details
Specify the details of the credit.
With
Specify details of the party with whom the credit will be available.
5.3.1.7 Reinstatement of Available Amount
The reinstatement of the amount available may be effected in one of two ways:

Where reinstatement is dependent upon time - In these circumstances a specific amount
is allowed to be drawn within each specific period as stipulated in the LC during its
validity. For example, the credit may indicate that:

US$ 25,000 may be drawn each month during the six-month validity of the LC

The reinstatement of the amount may be either cumulative or non-cumulative.
Cumulative Reinstatement - Where the credit indicates that the reinstatement is on
a cumulative basis, in the above example the sixth installment may be the cumulative
for 6 months, i.e., US$ 150,000
Non-Cumulative Reinstatement - In the above example, if the credit indicates that
the reinstatement is on a non-cumulative basis, it means that if one month’s shipment
of US$25,000 is not made (either completely or partially), it cannot be carried forward
to the succeeding month. If, for example, no shipments have been effected for five
months, the drawing for the sixth month is restricted to US$25,000

Where reinstatement is dependent upon value - Sometimes Revolving Credits may
indicate that the amount is to be reinstated upon utilization within the overall validity of
the credit. For example: ‘This LC shall revolve for US$ 25,000 during its validity up to a
maximum overall drawing value of US$ 25,000’.
Reinstatement can be done as Auto or Manual. If Auto reinstatement and revolves in time options
are selected, then the system calculates maximum liability amount as per the frequency
maintained and pass entries for the same.
5-21
If Auto reinstatement, revolves in time and Non cumulative options are selected, then the system
calculates initially the maximum liability amount during booking of contract and reverse the
unutilized value of the particular period at the end of respective period.
System calculates and displays the frequency of reinstatement as per the values maintained in
Revolves and Units options. System calculates and display next reinstatement date as per the
frequency maintained when reinstatement is maintained as auto and frequency as time.
If auto Reinstatement and Frequency options are selected, then the system reinstates during
EOD after every availment is made. If you select manual Reinstatement and Frequency, then the
user can reinstates the value of contract anytime after availment is made.
If reinstatement is dependent on value, then cumulative reinstatement is not supported by the
system.
5.3.2 Preferences Tab
You can specify certain details for SWIFT messages specific to LC and set your preferences
using ‘Preferences’ tab. Click the tab button ‘Preferences’ on the screen.
The details that you specify in the fields of this screen are picked up for SWIFT messages.
5-22
The SWIFT message that utilizes the information that you specify in this screen and the
corresponding field of the SWIFT message which carries the input, has been listed below:
Field in Oracle FLEXCUBE
SWIFT Message
Field of the SWIFT
message
Charges From Beneficiary
MT700
Field 71B
Additional Amounts Covered
MT 700 & MT 740
Field 39C
Period For Presentation
MT 700
Field 48
Charges From Issuing Bank
MT 730
Field 71B
Account For Issuing Bank
MT 730
Field 57A
Date
MT 730
Field 32D
Issuing Bank Amendment Date
MT707
Field 30
Acknowledgement Received and
Date
MT768
Field 30
Template ID
MT799
Field 79
5.3.2.1 Credit Line
Here you can capture the following details.
Limits Tracking Required
Specify whether the credit granted under the LC you are processing should be tracked against
the credit limit assigned to the customer under a Credit Line.
Check this box to indicate that limit tracking is required for the LC. If left unchecked, the system
will display an override message ‘Limit tracking not done for the contract’ while saving the record.
In the subsequent fields of this screen, you can specify details of the line under which the credit is
to be tracked.
Party Type
Specify the type of party involved in the LC you are processing, whose details you would
subsequently enter. The parties involved in the LC can be specified in any sequence. However, a
party code can be used only once in each LC.
Line
Specify the credit line under which you want to track the LC amount.
Customer
The system displays the customer for whom the LC is booked.
5-23
Limit Tracking Tenor
Specify the basis on which limits need to be tracked. Choose one of the following options:

Letter Of Credit Tenor

Max Draft Tenor
5.3.2.2 Other Information
Capture the following details.
Reimbursement Type
Specify the type of reimbursement. Choose the appropriate one from the dropdown list.
Charges From Beneficiary
Specify the charge amount borne by the beneficiary.
Additional Amounts Covered
Specify the additional amount covered.
Charges from
Indicate who bears the charges - claimant or your customer.
The Period for Presentation
The period of presentation defined for the product - or calculated for the LC, as the case may be will be displayed in the ‘Period For Presentation’ field. You can change the default to suit the LC
you are processing.
The system uses the Expiry Date and the Last Shipment Date specified for the LC you are
processing, and arrives at the period of presentation.
If the sum of the latest shipment date and period for presentation is greater that the expiry date of
an import LC, the system will display an override message. This is true only in cases where the
‘Latest Shipment Date’ field is not blank.
For details, refer the heading ‘Specifying the Period of Presentation’ in chapter ‘Creating
Products’, in the LC User Manual.
5.3.2.3 Charges from Issuing Bank
Specify the following details.
Currency
Specify the currency of the charge.
5-24
Amount
Specify the charge amount.
Charge From Issuing Bank
Give a brief description of the charge.
Issuing Bank Acc
Specify the account from which charge should be collected.
Issuing Bank Date
Specify the date of charge collection.
5.3.2.4 Amendments
Specify the following details.
Amendment Number
The system displays the amendment number.
Increment Amendment Number
Check this box to indicate that the amendment number should be incremented with every
amendment.
Issuing Bank Amendment Date
The date of amendment is displayed here.
5.3.2.5 Acknowledgement
Specify the following details.
Acknowledgement Received
Check this box to indicate that acknowledgement has been received.
Acknowledgement Date
Specify the date on which the acknowledgement is received.
5.3.2.6 Other Details
Specify the following details:
5-25
INCO Term
Specify the INCO term related to goods that are a part of the LC instrument. You can select one
of the following values from the adjoining option list:

EXW - EX Works (…named place)

FCA - Free Carrier (…named place)

FAS - Free Alongside Ship (…named port of shipment)

FOB - Free On-Board (…named port of shipment)

CFR - Cost and Freight (…named port of destination)

CIF - Cost Insurance Freight (…named port of destination)

CPT - Carriage Paid to (…named place of destination)

CIP - Cost Insurance Paid (…named place of destination)

DAF - Delivered at Frontier (…named place)

DES - Deliver Ex Ship (…named port of destination)

DEQ - Delivered Ex Quay (…named port of destination)

DDU - Delivered Duty Unpaid (…named place of destination)

DDP - Delivered Duty Paid (…named place)
Once you choose the INCO Term, the documents and clause details will be displayed based on
the maintenance for the chosen INCO term in the ‘INCO Terms Maintenance’ screen. However, if
you change the INCO term, the document and clause details will be not be updated automatically.
You will have to manually change them if required. However, the system will check whether the
document and clauses details are the same as those defined in the ‘INCO Term Maintenance’
screen.
The INCO term is picked up and displayed in field 45A of MT700.
Back to Back LC
Check this option if you want to link an export LC to an import LC. This field is applicable only for
import LCs.
If you check this option, you will have to specify the export LC which you want to link to the import
LC in the ‘Reference Number’ field. All active and authorized export LCs of the same counterparty
will be available for selection in the option list adjoining ‘Reference Number’. An export LC can be
linked to only one import LC.
Related Reference Number
Specify the related reference number. Choose the appropriate one from the option list.
While issuing a guarantee, the option list displays all valid bill of lading reference numbers and
import LCs. Similarly, while issuing a back to back LC, the option list displays all valid export LCs
maintained in the system. You can choose the appropriate one.
5-26
Claim Advice in Swift
Check this box to generate the charge claim advice in MT799 SWIFT format.
This field is initially defaulted from product level. However, you can then check or uncheck it
at the contract level.
Template ID
Specify the template ID related to MT799 message types from the option list.
You can enter the values only if the ‘Claim Advice in Swift’ field is checked.
User LC Reference Number
System displays the Contract User Reference as the User LC Reference Number. The
reimbursement LC, under which the bill is availed, and the Export LC linked to the bill, should
contain the same ‘User LC Reference Number’.
Application Rule
The system defaults the application rule from the product level. However, you can modify this.
Please refer to the section ‘Specifying the Applicable Rules’ under chapter ‘Defining Product
Attributes’ in this user manual.
Rule Narrative
This is enabled only if ‘Applicable Rule’ is set to ‘OTHR’. The system defaults the rule narrative
from the product level. However, you can modify this.
Please refer to the section ‘Specifying the Applicable Rules’ under chapter ‘Defining Product
Attributes’ in this user manual.
Confirm Percentage
The system displays the percentage of confirmed amount.
Confirmed Amount
The system displays the current confirmed amount.
Unconfirmed Amount
The system displays the current maximum unconfirmed LC amount. This amount is derived by
deducting the confirmed amount from the maximum LC amount.
Available Confirmed Amount
The system displays the available confirmed portion of the maximum LC amount.
5-27
Available Unconfirmed Amount
The system displays the available unconfirmed portion of the maximum LC amount.
Example
The following example illustrates the logic of deriving the unconfirmed, available confirmed and
available unconfirmed amounts:
Deriving Unconfirmed Amount
Consider an LC with the following details:
LC Amount
GBP 10000
Liability Tolerance
10%
Maximum LC Amount
GBP 11000
Confirmed Amount
GBP 7700
Confirmed %
70%
Based on the above details, the system displays the unconfirmed amount GBP 3300.
Now, suppose that the LC amount has been increased by GBP 5000. In that case, the maximum LC amount
will be GBP 16500.
Therefore, existing confirmed amount will be 70% of 16500, i.e. GBP 11150.
Based on the above details, the system will display the unconfirmed amount GBP 4950 (30% of 16500).
Deriving Available Confirmed/Unconfirmed Amount
Based on the above example, the method of calculation of the available unconfirmed amount is illustrated
below:
Case 1:
From the above example, assume that GBP 3000 has been availed. The confirmed amount is GBP 11150.
The unconfirmed amount in that case is GBP 4950.
Available Confirmed Amount = 11150 – 3000 = GBP 8550
Hence, Available Unconfirmed Amount = GBP 4950
The system first avails the confirmed portion of the LC maximum amount. As the unconfirmed portion of the
LC maximum amount is not availed so far, the available unconfirmed amount will be the initial unconfirmed
amount itself.
Case 2:
From the above example, assume that GBP 12000 has been availed. The confirmed amount is GBP 11150.
The unconfirmed amount in that case is GBP 4950.
Available Confirmed Amount = 0
Available Unconfirmed Amount = 4950 – 450 = GBP 4500
5-28
As the confirmed amount has been fully availed, the available confirmed amount will be zero. The remaining
amount of GBP 450, which is in excess of the confirmed amount, will be adjusted towards the unconfirmed
portion of the LC maximum amount. The available unconfirmed amount is hence 4950 – 450, i.e. GBP 4500.
Beneficiary Confirmation Required
The system checks this box by default for Letters of Credit. This box is unchecked for
‘Guarantees’. You can operationally control the beneficiary confirmation process for an LC, but
you cannot modify it after the first authorization.

When Beneficiary Confirmation Required is NOT SET
If Beneficiary Confirmation Required is selected then any financial amendment of the LC or
Guarantee is done using LC Amendment Confirmation screen and non-financial amendment is
done using LC Contract online screen. The system restricts the financial amendment of the LCs
and Guarantees using LC Amendment Confirmation screen.
You can amend the financial fields in LC Contract Online screen. The Issue date in LC Contract
Online screen is disabled. On saving the contract, the system triggers the AMND event and
generates the messages MT707, MT747, and MT767 for the amendments. Authorization of these
amendments is done through LC Contract online screen.

When Beneficiary Confirmation Required is SET
If Beneficiary Confirmation Requires is not selected at the contract level, then any financial and
non-financial amendment is done using the LC Contract online screen. Financial amendments of
LCs and Guarantees for which Beneficiary Confirmation Required is set is done using LC
Amendment Confirmation screen. On saving the contract amendments, the system triggers the
AMNV event and generates Message MT707 for the amendments. You can view the message
using the Message Preview screen.
The Issue date in LC Amendment Confirmation screen is disabled.
5.3.2.7 Preferences
You can set the following preferences:
Allow Prepayment
Check this option to indicate that the customer can make a prepayment on the contract.
Transferable
Check this option to indicate that the LC is transferable.
May Confirm
Check this option to indicate that the LC can have an associated confirmation message. You can
also specify the type of the confirmation instruction that should be sent to the advising/confirming
bank if you are issuing the LC (whether Field 49 of MT 700 should be ‘Without’, ‘Confirm’, or ‘May
add’).
5-29
Partial Confirmation Allowed
Check this box to confirm the partial amount. The remaining amount can be confirmed after you
receive the approval from the external agent.
This field is initially defaulted from product level. However, you can then check or uncheck it
at the contract level.
Auto Status Change
The system defaults the status of the checkbox based on the product maintenance. However, you
can modify this. If you check this box, the system picks up the contract during EOD operations for
status processing. If you do not check this, the system will not consider the LC contract for
automatic status processing.
Confirm Percentage
Specify the percentage of LC Amount to be confirmed. If percentage is not specified, the system
will calculate the percentage based on the confirm Amount specified.
Confirmed Amount
Specify the amount to be confirmed. If Confirm Amount is not specified, the system will calculate
the confirmed amount based on the Confirm Percentage specified.
Available Confirmed Amount
The system displays the available confirmed amount.
If both Confirm Amount and Confirm Percent are specified then the system will display an
override message as follows:
Both Confirm Amount and Confirm Percent are entered. Confirm Percent is considered for calculation.
The system will calculate and display the ‘Confirm Amount’ based on the confirm percentage
specified. Confirm Percentage and Confirm Amount can be changed or recalculated either on
save or on pressing ‘LC Default Button’ available in Main tab of ‘LC Online’ screen.
The system will display an error message for the following conditions:

If ‘Partial Confirmation Allowed’ box is unchecked and if you specify the values in
‘Confirmation Percentage’ and ‘Confirmation Amount’ fields

If the value of the amount confirmed is greater than the unconfirmed unavailed amount.

If the value of the confirm amount is lower than the availed confirmed amount.

If Operation is confirm or advice and confirm and confirm percent is greater than 100 or
confirm Amount is greater than LC current availability.

If the operation code is set to ‘Advice’ or ‘Pre-Advice’ and if you specify the ‘Amount
Confirmed’ and ‘Confirmation Percentage’.
5-30

If the operation code is set to ‘Confirm’ or ‘Advice and Confirm’ and if you have not
specified the values of the amount confirmed and the percentage of confirmation, then
the system will default the percentage as 100, value of LC maximum amount

If Partial Confirmation Allow flag is checked for product other than Export.

If Partial Confirmation Allow flag is checked when LC Operation is other than Advice, Preadvice, Confirm or Advice and Confirm.
5.3.3 Parties Tab
The Parties screen can be used to record the details related to all the parties involved in the LC.
The documents, tracers and messages that are generated will be sent to the parties concerned,
based on the details you specify in this screen.
You can maintain the following details here:
Party Details
You should specify the following for each of the parties involved in the LC:
5-31
Party Type
Specify the party type (beneficiary, accountee, applicant, advising bank, issuing bank,
reimbursing bank, advice through bank, confirming bank, claiming bank). The adjoining option list
displays all party types available for the LC. You can choose the appropriate one. If the operation
code of the LC is ‘Reimbursement’ the system will default the CIF party type as ‘ISB’ (issuing
bank). The party type ‘CLB’ (claiming bank) will be available only if the LC is linked to a
‘Reimbursement’ type of product.
Once the record has been saved, you can change party names by amending the record, provided
the LC is not linked to a bill. Also, you cannot change party names for a transferred or an availed
LC.
Note that, you can change the following party types:

REB

ABK

BEN
The following table gives the details of the messages when there is a change in parties:
Changed Party Name
Messages
Beneficiary party (BEN)
MT707 will be sent to the advising bank.
(in case of import LC)
New party BEN will be sent in tag 79 of 707.
If MT740 has been already sent to Reimbursing bank, then
MT747 will be sent to the Reimbursing bank for intimating
change of Beneficiary.
Reimbursing bank (REB)
MT799 will be sent to Advising bank.
(in case of import LC)
MT747 will be sent to old Reimbursing Bank Party.
MT740 is sent to new REB party.
FFT code ‘CANC’ must be attached manually to advice
‘LC_AMND_AUTH_REIMB’ (747), at contract level.
Advising Bank (ABK)
MT707 will be sent to the old Advising bank.
(in case of import LC)
MT700 will be sent to the new Advising bank.
Also, FFT code ‘CANC’ must be attached to advices to 707 or
767 manually.
BEN (in case of export LC)
Counterparty will be changed and the limits, if any, for the old
Beneficiary will be reinstated and will be tracked against the
new Beneficiary.
REB (in case of Guarantees
MT767 will be generated to the Advising bank.
5-32
Changed Party Name
Messages
and SGs)
ABK (in case of export LC)
You can change the ABK.
ABK (in case of Guarantees
and SGs)
MT767 will be generated to the old Advising Bank. In Tag
77C, Code ‘CANCEL’ will be populated indicating that the
Guarantee is cancelled.
MT760 will be generated to the new Advising Bank.
BEN, REB, and ABK
MT707 will be sent to the old Advising Bank intimating the
change of Advising Bank.
MT700 will be sent to the new Advising Bank with the new
parties for REB and BEN.
MT747 will be sent to old REB and MT740 will be sent to the
new REB party.
MT707 will be sent to the Advising bank intimating the change
of Beneficiary and Reimbursing bank.
BEN and REB
MT700 will be sent to the new Advising Bank with new
Beneficiary
If MT740 has already been sent to the REB, MT747 will be
sent to the REB for intimating change of BEN.
MT707 will be sent to the old ABK intimating the change of
ABK.
REB and ABK
MT700 will be sent to the new ABK.
MT747 will be sent to the old REB.
MT740 will be sent to the new REB.
Party Description
You can provide the description for the party type here.
Party ID
Specify a valid party ID against the party type. The adjoining option list displays all party IDs
available for the LC. You can choose the appropriate one. On specifying REB in the party type,
the adjoining option list will display all IDs having the contract currency as that of the LC currency.
The system validates for the ADB membership of the selected Bank. If the Bank is not a
member of ADB and the BIC code for the Bank is maintained as ‘ADB Member’ at BIC
Maintenance level, then the system displays the following override message:
Advising or Issuing Bank is not a member of ADB TFFP
5-33
5.3.3.1 Validations for ADB Member Status
Oracle FLEXCUBE validates ADB Member Status for a Bank, which is an ADB member, at each
scenario with a different logic.
The system will not validate ‘ADB Member Status’ when the changed ‘ADB Member Status’ is
maintained as ‘Not applicable’ in the following scenarios:

When BIC is uploaded without maintaining initial status

When a default value is maintained at BIC Code Maintenance level and initial status is
not maintained

When an initial status is changed from ‘Yes’ to ‘Not Applicable’

When an initial status is changed from ‘No’ to ‘Not Applicable’
The system validates and displays an override message when the changed ‘ADB Member Status’
is maintained as ‘No’ in the following scenarios:

When the initial status is changed from ‘Not Applicable’ to ‘No’

When the initial status is changed from ‘Yes’ to ‘No’
The system validates and does not display an override message when the changed ‘ADB
Member Status’ is maintained as ‘Yes’ in the following scenarios:

When the initial status is changed from ‘Not Applicable’ to ‘Yes’

When the initial status is changed from ‘No’ to ‘Yes’
The system validates the BIC code maintained in ‘Address 1’ field of the Advising Bank or Issuing
Bank of LC contract with code maintained at ‘BIC Code Maintenance’ level. If the BIC code
maintained in ‘Address 1’ field of LC contract is not an ADB member, then the system displays an
override message.
If the Advising Bank or the Issuing Bank is not a customer of the Bank, then the system
validates the BIC maintained in ‘Address 1’ field of the Advising Bank or the Issuing Bank.
Customer
The CIF ID assigned to the party, if the party is defined as a customer in Oracle FLEXCUBE. If
the applicant (APP) or beneficiary (BEN) is not a customer of your bank, you can use a walk-in
customer ID.
Customer Name
Enter the name of the Customer. The party name can be 150 characters in length. However,
please note that in the SWIFT messages that you generate only 35 characters will be included.
Country
Enter the country of the customer.
5-34
Address 1 to 4
Enter the address of the customer who has initiated the transaction.
Customer Reference
Specify the sender’s reference number. In case of an upload of MT768, the value in field 20 of the
message is displayed here. Input to this field will be mandatory for the party type ‘ISB’.
Dated
Specify the date of transaction initiation.
Language
Specify the language in which advices should be sent to the customer.
Issuer
Check this option to indicate that the issuer is a bank.
Template ID
Specify the template ID. If you change REB party, then a template ID needs to be attached to
send MT799 to Advising bank.
5.3.3.2 Other Addresses
Following details are displayed here:

The media type through which the advises should be routed and the respective
address(es)

The party’s mail address

The account
The advices for a party will be sent to the default media maintained in the Customer Addresses
table. If you want to send the advices through another medium, you should indicate it in the
Parties screen. The address should be also indicated. The advices will be sent through the new
medium, only if you indicate so in the Advices screen of contract processing. If not, the advice will
continue to be sent to the default address defined for the party.
You can use this feature to send a one-off advice, through a different medium. For example, for a
particular customer, you normally send all advices through mail and hence haven’t defined
SWIFT or TELEX advices. For an LC involving a customer, you want to send the advices through
SWIFT. In such a case, you can specify the medium as SWIFT and specify the address only for
the LC you are processing.
The issuer of LC is a bank or an individual. This is enabled only for the party type ISB (issuing
Bank). The party type is defaulted from CIF maintenance. However, you can amend the value
before authorizing the contract.
5-35
If issuer of LC is a bank, tags 52A and 52D will be populated. The message Types supported by
these tags are MT710/MT720.
If issuer of LC is not a bank, 52B tag will be populated.
The parties involved in an LC depend upon the type of LC you are processing. The following table
indicates the minimum number of parties required for the types of LC that you can process.
LC type
Parties applicable
Mandatory parties
Parties not allowed
Import LC
Applicant/Accountee
Applicant and
Beneficiary
OR
Accountee and
Beneficiary
Issuing Bank
Beneficiary and
Issuing Bank
Advising Bank
Applicant and
Beneficiary
Issuing Bank
Applicant and
Beneficiary
Advising Bank
Advising Bank
Beneficiary
Confirming Bank
Reimbursing Bank
Export LC
Applicant/Accountee
Issuing Bank
Advising Bank
Beneficiary
Confirming Bank
Reimbursing Bank
Shipping
Guarantee
Applicant/Accountee
Advising Bank
Beneficiary
Confirming Bank
Advice Through Bank
Reimbursing Bank
Guarantee
Applicant and Beneficiary
Advise Through Bank
Reimbursement Bank
Issuing Bank
Standby
Applicant/Accountee
Applicant and
Beneficiary
5-36
Issuing Bank
LC type
Parties applicable
Mandatory parties
Parties not allowed
Applicant and
Beneficiary
Issuing Bank
Advising bank
Beneficiary
Confirming bank
Reimbursing bank
Clean LC
Applicant/Accountee
Advising bank
OR
Beneficiary
Confirming bank (for
confirmed LCs only; could
be more than one bank)
Accountee And
Beneficiary
While processing LCs and guarantees, you can use the walk-in customer ID for the applicant
(APP) and Beneficiary (BEN) party types. However, note that you can use a particular CIF ID only
once in an LC.
5.3.4 Parties Limits Tab
Oracle FLEXCUBE allows you to track the credit limits for joint venture customers who are parties
to an LC contract. Using ‘Parties Limits’ tab, you can track the limits of multiple credit lines in an
LC contract. Click ‘Parties Limit’ tab on ‘LC Contract Details’.
5-37
Specify the following details:
Limits Tracking Required
Check this box to indicate that limit tracking is required for the parties to the LC contract. If you
check this box, the system will let you set the limits for multiple credit lines in the contract. If you
do not check this box, the system will not track the parties’ limits.
On checking this box, the system enables ‘Default’ button. You can use this button to get the
default values for the parties in the credit lines.
Limit Tracking Tenor Type
Choose the limit tracking tenor type from the following options:

Letter of Credit tenor

Max Draft Tenor
Party Type
Specify the type of the party whose credit limits need to be tracked.
If you click ‘Default’ button, in the first row, the system defaults the joint venture party type based
on the joint venture party selected under ‘Parties’ tab of ‘LC Contract Details’ screen. However,
you need to make sure that the mandatory party details have been maintained under ‘Parties’ tab
of the screen.
5-38
When you add another row to the list, you can manually select the party type as required. If you
leave it blank, the system will automatically update the party type when you save the contract.
Customer No
Specify the customer number of the party whose credit limits need to be tracked. The option list
displays the customer numbers of all the parties selected under ‘Parties’ tab. Choose the
appropriate one.
You need to make sure that the customer number corresponds to the party type selected above.
If the customer number and party type do not match, the system displays an error.
JV Parent
When you click ‘Default’ button, the system defaults the joint venture customer number of the
party. This customer number is defaulted based on the details maintained in ‘Joint Venture’ subscreen of ‘Customer Maintenance’ screen.
Liability Number
When you click ‘Default’ button, the system defaults the liability number from ‘Joint Venture’ subscreen of ’Customer Maintenance’ screen.
Linkage Type
Specify the linkage type. The drop-down list displays the following options:

Facility (Credit Line)

Collateral Pool

Collateral
Choose the appropriate one.
Linkage Reference No
Specify the reference number that identifies the facility, collateral pool or collateral. The option list
displays all valid facilities and collateral pools specific to the liability. Choose the appropriate one.
In case you choose the same linkage reference for more than one record in the list, the system
displays an override message. You may choose to cancel or proceed with the selection.
% Contribution
Specify the proportion of limits to be tracked for the credit line or collateral pool for the joint
venture customer. When you click ‘Default’ button, the system defaults the percentage of
contribution maintained under ‘Joint Venture’ sub-screen of ‘Customer Maintenance’ screen.
It is mandatory to indicate the percentage of contribution if the party is a customer under joint
venture. This is not applicable to customers who are not a part of joint venture.
5-39
For one joint venture, the total percentage of contribution in all applicable credit lines together
cannot be more than 100%.
Amount Tag
Specify the amount tag. The system tracks the limits for non joint venture customers based on the
amount tag. The amount tags applicable to export and import LC contracts are listed below:
Amount tags applicable to Export LC:

Liability Amount

Confirmed Amount

Unconfirmed Amount
Amount tags applicable to Import LC:

Liability Amount

Undertaking Amount

Non Undertaking Amount
Choose the appropriate one based on the type of LC contract. If you do not specify the amount
tag, the system will track the limits based on the liability amount and facility.
For joint venture customers, you need to choose ‘Liability Amount’ as the amount tag. Other
amount tags are not applicable to joint venture customers.
The system verifies the amount tag against the product type. If you choose an amount tag, which
is not supported by the product type, the system displays an error message.
Amount
When you click ‘Default’ button, the system defaults the amount tracked for each credit line. In
case of joint venture customers, the amount is derived on the basis of the percentage of liability
amount. In case of other customers, the amount is derived based on the amount tag specified
above.
You can add more rows to the list of credit lines using add button. Similarly, you can remove a
selected row from the list using delete button.
Once you have specified the details, save the contract. In case the limit for a credit line has been
completely exhausted, the system displays a configurable override message. If you have not
used ‘Default’ button while specifying the parties’ limit details, the system will automatically
default the details and track the limits based on that.
Example
Customer A and Customer B enter into a joint venture. The credit lines are attached as shown below:
Joint
Party
Customer
Liability
Amount Tag
5-40
Facility/
Percentage
Venture
Type
Pool
Customer
JV
BEN
Customer A
Customer A
N/A
FACILITY1
10
Customer
JV
BEN
Customer A
Customer A
N/A
FACILITY2
15
Customer
JV
BEN
Customer A
Customer A
N/A
POOL1
5
Customer
JV
BEN
Customer B
Customer B
N/A
FACILITY3
25
Customer
JV
BEN
Customer B
Customer B
N/A
FACILITY4
10
Customer
JV
BEN
Customer B
Customer B
N/A
POOL2
10
Customer
JV
BEN
N/A
FACILITY5
15
Customer
JV
BEN
N/A
POOL3
10
ISB
Customer C
Customer C
Confirmed
Amount
FACILITY6
0
ISB
Customer C
Customer C
Unconfirmed
Amount
FACILITY7
0
The joint venture of Customer A and Customer B results in the creation of a customer called ‘Customer JV’.
Facilities/Pools are linked to the Customer A, Customer B and Customer JV. If the counterparty in the LC
contract is ‘Customer JV’, then all credit lines and collateral pools belonging to the customers, Customer A,
Customer B and Customer JV will be available for linkage.
The LC details are given below:
LC Amount
: GBP 10000
Positive Tolerance
: 10%
Liability Tolerance
: 10%
Max LC Amount
: GBP 11000
Liability Amount
: GBP 12100
Confirmed Amount
: GBP 7700 (70% of Max LC Amount)
Unconfirmed Amount
: GBP 3300 (30% of Max LC Amount)
Limits are maintained for joint venture and non joint venture customers as follows:
Joint
Venture
Party
Type
Customer
Liability
Amount Tag
5-41
Facility/
Pool
%
Amount
(GBP)
Customer
JV
BEN
Customer A
Customer A
N/A
FACILITY1
10
1210
Customer
JV
BEN
Customer A
Customer A
N/A
FACILITY2
15
1815
Customer
JV
BEN
Customer A
Customer A
N/A
POOL1
5
605
Customer
JV
BEN
Customer B
Customer B
N/A
FACILITY3
25
3025
Customer
JV
BEN
Customer B
Customer B
N/A
FACILITY4
10
1210
Customer
JV
BEN
Customer B
Customer B
N/A
POOL2
10
1210
Customer
JV
BEN
N/A
FACILITY5
15
1815
Customer
JV
BEN
N/A
POOL3
10
1210
ISB
Customer C
Customer C
Confirmed
Amount
FACILITY6
0
7700
ISB
Customer C
Customer C
Unconfirmed
Amount
FACILITY7
0
3300
In case of joint venture customers, limits are tracked on the basis of the percentage of liability amount. In
this case, it is GBP 12100.
5.3.4.1 Using ‘Default’ Button
When you click ‘Default’ button on ‘Parties Limit’ tab of ‘LC Contract Details’ screen, the system
defaults the following details in the credit lines:

Party Type

JV Parent

Liability Number

Percentage of Contribution

Amount
You can use ‘Default’ button multiple times. Every time you click this button, the system defaults
the values afresh in all applicable fields. Any prior modification made to the values in the above
fields will be ignored. Hence, you need to verify the values in the modified fields each time after
clicking ‘Default’ button.
Example
Consider the following joint venture maintenances:
5-42
JV1
JV2
JV3
CIF1
40%
CIF2
30%
CIF3
30%
CIF4
60%
CIF5
40%
CIF6
50%
CIF7
50%
An Export LC of GBP 1000 is booked with JV1 as the Beneficiary and JV3 as Issuing Bank. On clicking
‘Default’ button on ‘Parties Limits’ tab, the system defaults the following details:
BEN
CIF1
40%
GBP 400
BEN
CIF2
30%
GBP 300
BEN
CIF3
30%
GBP 300
ISB
CIF6
50%
GBP 500
ISB
CIF7
50%
GBP 500
Suppose that you have made the following changes to the details related to Issuing Bank:
ISB
CIF6
75%
GBP 750
ISB
CIF7
25%
GBP 250
After making these changes, if you click ‘Default’ button again, the system ignores the changes and once
again defaults the details as below:
BEN
CIF1
40%
GBP 400
BEN
CIF2
30%
GBP 300
BEN
CIF3
30%
GBP 300
ISB
CIF6
50%
GBP 500
ISB
CIF7
50%
GBP 500
Now, suppose that you have changed the Issuing Bank to JV2 in ‘Parties’ tab of the ‘LC Contract Details’
screen. On clicking ‘Default’ button, the system defaults the details of the customers under the JV2 as
follows:
BEN
CIF1
40%
GBP 400
BEN
CIF2
30%
GBP 300
BEN
CIF3
30%
GBP 300
5-43
ISB
CIF4
60%
GBP 600
ISB
CIF5
40%
GBP 400
5.3.4.2 Updating Parties’ Limits on Amendment of LC Contract
Oracle FLEXCUBE allows you to amend LC contracts. Such amendments may have direct
impact on the parties limits defined in the contracts. This section examines the some
amendments that can be made to an LC contract and their impact on the parties’ limits.
Increase in LC Amount
If there is an increase in the LC amount, based on the amount tag, the system updates the
parties’ limits as follows:
Amount Tag
Changes in Parties’ Limits
Liability Amount
The liability amount is used to track the delta amount
Confirmed
Amount
The increased confirmed amount is used to track the parties’ limits
Unconfirmed
Amount
The increased unconfirmed amount is used to track the limits
Non-undertaken
Amount
The LC amount is used to track the limits for the line specified
under ‘Non-Undertaken Amount’
After amendment, if there is an increase in the confirmed amount, the parties’ limits are updated
as follows:
Amount Tag
Changes in Parties’ Limits
Liability Amount
The system does not track the limits
Confirmed
Amount
The increased confirmed amount is used to track the limits
Unconfirmed
Amount
The increased confirmed amount is deducted from the credit line
tracked for the unconfirmed portion
5-44
After amendment, if there is an increase in the undertaking amount, the parties’ limits are updated
as follows:
Amount Tag
Changes in Parties’ Limits
Liability Amount
The system does not change the parties’ limits
Undertaken
Amount
The increased undertaken amount is used to track the limits
Non-undertaken
Amount
The increased undertaken amount is deducted from the credit line
tracked for the non-undertaken portion
After amendment, if there is a decrease in the LC amount, the system updates the parties’ limits
as follows:
Amount Tag
Changes in Parties’ Limits
Liability Amount
The decreased amount is deducted from the credit line tracked for
the liability amount
Confirmed
Amount
The decreased confirmed amount is deducted from the credit line
tracked for the confirmed amount
Unconfirmed
Amount
The decreased confirmed amount is deducted from the credit line
tracked for the unconfirmed portion
After amendment, if there is a decrease in the confirmed amount, the system updates the parties’
limits as follows:
Amount Tag
Changes in Parties’ Limits
Liability Amount
The system does not change the parties’ limits
Confirmed
Amount
The decreased confirmed amount is deducted from the credit line
tracked for the confirmed amount
Unconfirmed
Amount
The decreased confirmed amount is added to the credit line
tracked for the unconfirmed portion
After amendment, if there is a decrease in the undertaking amount, the system updates the
parties’ limits as follows:
Amount Tag
Changes in Parties’ Limits
Liability Amount
The system does not change the parties’ limits
Non-Undertaken
Amount
The decreased undertaken amount is added to the credit line
tracked for the non-undertaken portion
5-45
If the percentage of allocation is modified, the system updates the delta amounts accordingly. If
the parties in the ‘Parties’ tab are changed and the old party happens to be a joint venture party,
the limit tracked against all the joint venture customers will be reduced proportionately.
If the new party is a joint venture, the new JV customers along with the relevant details will be
defaulted in the ‘Parties Limits’ tab when you click ‘Default’ button. Please notice that this is
applicable only to joint venture customers of the changed parties.
5.3.4.3 Updating Parties’ Limits on LC Availments
On receipt of the bills or on notification from the negotiating bank, you can record an availment
under an LC. The system updates the parties’ limits during availment of an LC contract.
At the time of availment, the system reinstates the limits for the lines under the joint venture
customers. This reinstatement takes place proportionately based on the percentage of amount
utilized.
In case of non joint venture customers, the reinstatement takes place based on the amount tag
selected under ‘Parties Limits’ tab. The method of reinstatement for each amount tag is given
below:
Amount Tag
Changes in Parties’ Limits
Liability Amount
The limits are reinstated based on the LC amount availed so far
Confirmed
Amount
The limits are reinstated based on the confirmed portion of the LC
amount availed so far
Unconfirmed
Amount
The limits are reinstated based on the unconfirmed portion of the
LC amount availed so far
Undertaken
Amount
The limits are reinstated based on the undertaken portion of the
LC amount availed so far
Non-undertaken
Amount
The limits are reinstated based on the non-undertaken portion of
the LC amount availed so far
Example
Consider an LC contract with the following particulars:
Import LC Amount
: GBP 10000
Confirmed Amount
: GBP 7000
Unconfirmed Amount
: GBP 3000
The below lines are tracked:
LINE1
Confirmed Amount
GBP 7000
LINE2
Unconfirmed Amount
GBP 3000
5-46
Case 1:
Suppose that GBP 6000 has been availed (less than the confirmed amount).
In this case, the utilization on LINE1 will be reduced by GBP 6000. However, there will not be any change to
the utilization on LINE2.
Case 2:
Suppose that GBP 8000 has been availed (more than the confirmed amount)
In this case, the utilization on LINE1 will be reduced by GBP 7000. Also, the utilization on LINE2 will be
reduced by GBP 1000.
5.3.4.4 Updating Parties Limits on Reinstatement of LC Contracts
You can mark specific LC contracts for automatic reinstatement. Such contracts will be reinstated
as part of a batch process during BOD operations.
At the time of reinstatement, the system tracks the limits for the lines under the joint venture
customers. This tracking takes place proportionately based on the percentage of amount.
In case of non joint venture customers, the system tracks the limits based on the amount tags
selected under ‘Parties Limits’ tab. The method of tracking limits for each amount tag is given
below:
Amount Tag
Changes in Parties’ Limits
Liability Amount
The system tracks the limits based on the LC amount reinstated
so far
Confirmed
Amount
The system tracks the limits based on the confirmed portion of
the amount reinstated so far
Unconfirmed
Amount
The system tracks the limits based on the unconfirmed portion of
the amount reinstated so far
Undertaken
Amount
The system tracks the limits based on the undertaken portion of
the amount reinstated so far
Non-undertaken
Amount
The system tracks the limits based on the non-undertaken
portion of the amount reinstated so far
5.3.4.5 Updating Parties Limits on Closure of LC Contracts
You can mark specific LC contract for automatic closure. LC contracts marked for closure are
closed as part of a batch processes. On closure of an LC, the system reinstates the limits from
the linked lines/pools to the extent of tracking.
5-47
You can also close an LC contract partially. In case of a partial closure, the system tracks the
limits separately for confirmed amount and unconfirmed amount. As part of PCLS event, the limits
for the confirmed amount will be released after excluding the amount of bill in the initial stage.
The entire portion of unconfirmed amount is tracked separately.
Example
Consider an LC contract with the following details:
Export LC Amount
: GBP 10000
Confirmed Amount
: GBP 7000
Unconfirmed Amount
: GBP 3000
The system tracks the below lines during closure:
LINE1
Confirmed Amount
GBP 7000
LINE2
Unconfirmed Amount
GBP 3000
A bill of GBP 2000 is booked under the LC at the initial stage.
Hence, when PCLS event is triggered, the limit for confirmed amount is tracked after excluding the bill
amount.
Confirmed Amount – Initial Bill Amount = 7000 – 2000 = GBP 5000
The system releases GBP 5000 from the credit line mapped to the confirmed amount.
Also, the limit for the unconfirmed amount of GBP 3000 is fully released.
5.3.4.6 Updating Parties Limits on Reversal and Deletion of LC Contracts
Oracle FLEXCUBE allows you to reverse or delete an LC contract. On reversal or deletion of an
LC, the limits tracked for all joint venture parties are reduced proportionately. The limits tracked
for non joint venture customers are reduced to the extent to which it was tracked.
5.3.5 Shipment Tab
An LC instrument, which is an instrument of trade finance, involves details of merchandise.
Hence, you will need to specify the following details for the LC:

Details of the merchandise

Details of the mode of transportation
5-48
You can also specify Preferences for the shipment of goods. Note that you will not be able to
save shipment and goods related details for an LC under the operation code ‘Reimbursement’.
Click on the tab titled ‘Shipment’ to specify shipment details of LC.
5.3.5.1 Shipment Details
There are certain standard clauses and conditions, associated with the shipment of the
merchandise traded under an LC. You can specify the following shipping details for an LC that
you process.
From
The location from which the goods transacted under the LC should be shipped. In international
trading parlance, this is called the Loading on board/Dispatch/Taking in charge at/from.
To
The destination to which the goods transacted under the LC should be sent. In international
trading parlance, this is called the ‘For transportation’ to.
‘Shipment From’ and ‘Shipment To’ are linked to the tags 44A and 44 B respectively. These tags
are applicable to the following message types:

MT700

MT705

MT707

MT710
5-49

MT720
Specifying the ‘Shipment From’ and ‘Shipment To’ is optional.
Partial Shipment Allowed
Check this option if partial shipment of the goods is allowed under the LC.
Trans Shipment Allowed
Check this option if Trans-shipment is allowed under the LC.
Shipment Days
Specify the number of shipment days.
If you enter the shipment days and leave the field ‘Latest Shipment Date’ blank, on saving the
contract, the system calculates the latest shipment date based on the number of shipment days
and the effective date.
However, if you specify the latest shipment date, the system ignores the shipment days specified
here. Instead, it recalculates the shipment days based on the latest shipment date and the
effective date.
Latest Shipment Date
Specify the latest date for loading on board/despatch/taking in charge. If this date is greater than
the linked policy expiry date, the system will display an override/error message. This corresponds
to the field 44C in MT 700 and is a conditional field. Either field 44C (Latest Shipment date) or
44D (Shipment Period) will be present in the message, but not both.
In case you do not specify the latest shipment date, the system automatically calculates the date
based on the number of shipment days and the effective date specified above.
Now, suppose that you have specified both the shipment days and the latest shipment date. In
that case, the system ignores the shipment days and recalculates it based on the latest shipment
date and the effective date.
If you modify the latest shipment date during amendment, the system recalculates the number of
shipment days.
Example
Consider an LC contract with the following details:
Effective Date
01-May-2010
Shipment Days
21 days
In this case, when you save the contract, the system calculates the latest shipment date as 22-May-2010.
Now, consider another LC contract with the following details:
5-50
Effective Date
01-May-2010
Shipment Days
21 days
Latest Shipment Date
25-May-2010
In this case, the system recalculates the shipment days when you save the contract. Based on the effective
date and the latest shipment date, the shipment days will be updated as 24 days.
Shipment Period
Specify the period of time during which the goods are to be loaded on board/despatched/taken in
charge. This corresponds to field 44D in MT 700 and is a conditional field. Either field 44C (Latest
Shipment date) or 44D (Shipment Period) will be present in the message, but not both.
Additional Shipment Details
Specify additional shipment details.
Shipping Marks
Specify shipping marks.
5.3.5.2 Goods
The details of the merchandise that will be traded under the LC should be clearly specified.
Goods Code
You have maintained various codes that have been allotted, for commodities normally traded in
your country. The commodities are available for selection in the form of an option-list. In addition,
the list will also display whether a particular commodity is banned or not by indicating ‘YES’ (for a
banned product) and ‘NO’ (for a product that is allowed for trade) against the product. You can
select the applicable code for the LC you are processing, from the list.
Description
The description of this code (which could be 6500 characters long), can be changed to suit the
LC you are processing. You can also enter specifications such as the quality and quantity of the
merchandise.
INCO Term
Specify the INCO term related to goods that are a part of the LC instrument. You can select one
of the following values from the adjoining option list:

EXW - EX Works (…named place)

FCA - Free Carrier (…named place)

FAS - Free Alongside Ship (…named port of shipment)

FOB - Free On-Board (…named port of shipment)

CFR - Cost and Freight (…named port of destination)
5-51

CIF - Cost Insurance Freight (…named port of destination)

CPT - Carriage Paid to (…named place of destination)

CIP - Cost Insurance Paid (…named place of destination)

DAF - Delivered at Frontier (…named place)

DES - Deliver Ex Ship (…named port of destination)

DEQ - Delivered Ex Quay (…named port of destination)

DDU - Delivered Duty Unpaid (…named place of destination)

DDP - Delivered Duty Paid (…named place)
Once you choose the INCO Term, the documents and clause details will be displayed based on
the maintenance for the chosen INCO term in the ‘INCO Terms Maintenance’ screen. However, if
you change the INCO term, the document and clause details will be not be updated automatically.
You will have to manually change them if required. However, the system will check whether the
document and clauses details are the same as those defined in the ‘INCO Term Maintenance’
screen.
The INCO term is picked up and displayed in field 45A of MT700.
5.3.5.3 Port
Specify the following details.
Port of Loading
You can specify the name of the airport from where the goods transacted under the LC are
loaded for shipping. This is called the Port of Loading.
Port of Discharge
You can also specify the name of the destination port to which the goods transacted under LC
should be sent. This is called the Port of Discharge.
‘Port of Loading and ‘Port of Discharge’ are linked to the 44E and 44F tags respectively. These
tags are applicable to the following message types:

MT700

MT705

MT707

MT710

MT720
It is not mandatory to specify the Port of Loading or Port of Discharge.
5-52
5.3.6 Documents Tab
Click on the tab titled ‘Documents’ to specify details of the documents and clauses that are part of
the LC instrument and the documents that should accompany the goods.
Here you can capture the following details:
5.3.6.1 Documents
There are some standard documents required under a documentary LC. In this screen you can
specify the documents that are required under the LC being processed. These details will be a
part of the LC instrument sent to the advising bank, the advice through bank or the beneficiary. All
the documents specified for the product to which the LC is linked will be defaulted to this screen.
Code
Enter the document Code
5-53
Type
Enter the document type
Description
Enter the document description of the document that is defaulted to suit the LC you are
processing. This field will be enabled only if the LC type is ‘Shipping Guarantee’, but not
mandatory.
During copy operation, the value of this field will not be copied to the new contract.
Document Reference
Enter the document reference number based on which the Shipping Guarantee issued.
Number of Copies
Enter the number of copies of the document.
Number of Originals
Enter the number of Original documents here.
Original Receipt
Enter the receipt details here.
You can add to or delete from the list of documents that are defaulted. To add a document for the
LC, click add icon and then on option list positioned next to the ‘Code’ field. Select the code of the
appropriate document from the list of document codes maintained in the Documents Maintenance
screen. The other details of the document will be defaulted to this screen.
To delete a document that is not required for the LC, highlight the document code and click on the
delete icon.
5.3.6.2 Clauses Details
In addition to the other details, the clauses specified for a document while defining the product,
are also defaulted to this screen.
Code and Description
When you highlight a document code, all the clauses defined for the document are displayed in
the Clauses window. You can add to or delete from, the list of clauses that are defaulted.
To add a clause to a document for the LC, click add icon. Then, click adjoining option list. Select
the code of the applicable clause from the list of clause codes maintained, in the Clause
Maintenance screen. The description of the clause will be defaulted, based on the clause code
that you select.
5-54
To delete a clause that is not required for the LC, highlight the Clause code and click delete icon.
5.3.7 Advices Tab
An important part of processing an LC is the generation of various advices applicable for a
contract.
The advices that can be generated for the events that occur during the lifecycle of an LC are
defined for the product, to which the LC is linked. For example, you may have specified the
following advices for a product:

Issue of an import LC: pre-advice by SWIFT and LC instrument by mail to the advising
bank, the authorization to reimburse to the reimbursing bank.

Advice of an export LC: the acknowledgement advice to the advising bank.

Issue of a guarantee: the guarantee instrument to the beneficiary.
The details of the advices for an event are displayed in the Advices screen. The party type to
whom a specific advice should be sent is picked up automatically based on the type of LC being
processed and the parties involved.
From the LC Contract Details screen click ‘Advices’ tab. The advices screen is displayed.
5-55
5-56
The advices defined for the event you are processing will be displayed. You can choose to
suppress any of them. The address of the party to whom the advice is addressed to will be picked
up by default, based on the media and address maintenance for the party. These can be changed
if required.
For a payment message by SWIFT, you also have the option to change the priority of the
message.
You can capture the following details.
Suppress
By default, all the advices that have been defined for a product will be generated for the LCs
involving it. If any of the advices are not applicable to the LC you are processing, you can
suppress its generation by Checking against the suppress field.
Priority
For a payment message by SWIFT, you also have the option to change the priority of the
message. By default, the priority of all advices is marked as Normal. The priority of a payment
message can be changed to one of the following:
5-57

Normal

Medium

High
Medium
The medium by which an advice will be transmitted and the corresponding address will be picked
up based on the media and address maintenance for a customer.
You can, however, change either of these while processing the LC. Typically, if changed, both of
them will be changed.
After selecting the advices to be generated for the LC, click on ‘Ok’ to save it. Click ‘Exit’ or
‘Cancel’ button to reject the inputs you have made. In either case, you will be taken to the
Contract Main screen.
5.3.7.1 FFT Details
Free Format Text instructions (FFTs) are a set of instructions or statements that are applicable to
the LC that you process. It can be used to enter additional details related to the LC you are
processing. In the LC Contract - Advices screen you can specify the FFTs that should accompany
an advice, generated for an LC. When you select an advice code on this screen, the advice code
together and the party type, to which it is to be sent, is displayed in the FFT section. This
indicates that the FFTs that you specify will appear on the advice, which is displayed and will be
sent to the party type that is displayed.
All the FFTs defined for the advice, at the product level will also be displayed. You have the
option to add to or delete from the list of FFTs defaulted for an advice.
Free Format Text Code
To add an FFT to the list, click add icon. Select an FFT code from the adjoining option list that is
displayed.
Text
After selecting the code that identifies the FFT you wish to attach to the advice, its description is
automatically picked up and displayed. The FFT description can be changed to suit the
requirements of the LC you are processing.
Single
Check this option to indicate that the FFT is a single message.
Guarantee Reference Number
Choose the guarantee whose details you would like to upload (from the Incoming Message
Browser) in the FFT Description fields.
5-58
A FFT Description field can contain 2000 characters. If the details of the guarantee you specify
exceeds 2000 characters, the system will automatically stagger the remaining text into
subsequent FFT Description fields.
To delete an FFT from the list, highlight the code that identifies the FFT and click delete icon. The
free format codes for the following purposes have the fixed codes:
SND2RECINFO
Sender to receiver information (Field 72 of SWIFT).
INSTRUCTION
Instructions to the Paying/Accepting/Negotiating bank (Field 78 of SWIFT).
5.3.8 Tracers Tab
Tracers are reminders that can be sent to various parties involved in an LC. The list of tracers
that you can send for an LC is predefined (hard coded in the system) and can be classified into
the following types:

The acknowledgement tracer (sent to the advising bank when an import LC is issued and
an acknowledgement is sought)

The charge-commission tracer (sent to the party who has to bear the commission or
charges for an LC, pending the payment of the charge or commission)

The confirmation tracer (sent to the confirming bank, seeking a letter of confirmation).
You can specify the tracers to be sent for an LC, in the LC Contract Tracers screen. To invoke
this screen, click on the tab titled Tracers in the LC Contract Details screen. The LC Product
Tracers screen is displayed.
The tracers, specified for the product to which you have linked the LC, will be defaulted to this
screen. The following details will be displayed:
5-59

Tracer Code

Description of the tracer

Party ID and type to which the tracer is to be sent

Number of tracers sent thus far, to the party

Date on which the tracer was last sent to the party
For the tracer code that is highlighted, the details are defaulted from the product and can be
changed to suit the LC you are processing.
Required
You can stop the generation of a tracer at any point during the life cycle of an LC contract.
For instance, you had specified that an acknowledgement tracer is to be generated for a contract.
When you receive the acknowledgement from the concerned party, you can disable its
generation. At a later stage when you wish to generate the tracer again, you only need to enable
it for the LC by using this facility.
If this box is checked, it means that the tracer should be applied for all new LCs involving the
product. If not, it means that it should not be applied for new LCs involving the product. Amen
If for some reason you want to stop generating the tracer for a product, uncheck this box through
the product modification operation. The tracer will not be generated for new LCs involving the
product.
Maximum Tracers
You can specify the maximum number of tracers that should be sent for the LC. The value is
defaulted from the product under which you are processing the LC.
Start Days
The tracers that you specify for an LC can be generated only after it has been authorized. Specify
the default number of days that should elapse after an LC has been authorized, on which the first
tracer should be sent.
By default, the first tracer for an authorized LC contract will be sent, after the number of days
prescribed for the product under which it is processed.
Frequency
You can specify the frequency (in days) with which the tracer should be re-sent, for the LC you
are processing.
Medium
If you have specified that tracers should be generated for an LC, you should also specify the
medium through which it is to be generated. A tracer for an LC can be sent through Mail, Telex or
other compatible media.
5-60
Template ID
Specify the template ID for the SWIFT message type.
If the medium is SWIFT, then the system will generate the tracers in the SWIFT MT799 format
based on the template ID mentioned at the LC Contract level for populating the tag 79.
5.4
Viewing OFAC Check Response
OFAC check enables the application to call an external web service to perform black list check for
customer and customer accounts and give warnings appropriately while transacting with black
listed customers. You can also capture your remarks before overriding the black list warning.
Click ‘OFAC Check’ button in ‘Letters of Credit - Contract Input - Detailed’ screen to view the
OFAC check response in the ‘External System Detail’ screen On clicking ’OFAC Check’ button,
system will build the request XML and call the web service. The ‘External System details’ screen
displays the response is received from the external system and you will be also allowed to enter
your remarks in this screen. The response received will also be sent to Oracle FLEXCUBE
Database layer for any further interpretations of the same. This button can be made visible while
carrying out the actual customization. Request building response interpretation in the database
layer needs to be done as part of customization to enable this.
Here, you can view /capture the following details:
External System Response
The response from the external system regarding the black listed customer is displayed here.
User Remarks
Specify your remarks regarding the black listed customer here.
5-61
5.4.1 Viewing Different Versions of Contract
When you enter a contract, it is allotted the version number, 1.Every amendment and
reinstatement results in the next version of the contract being created.
While viewing the Detailed View screen for a contract, the latest version will be displayed. To
navigate between the different versions, use the arrow buttons to view the previous and next
version.
The LC contract will become effective in the system only after you ‘Save’ the details and your
supervisor authorizes it.
The system will display an override message if you save the contract with the drawee and
applicant being the same. You may use your discretion to proceed or cancel the contract. You
can also have this override configured as an error message in which case, the system will not
allow you to proceed until you make the necessary changes.
5.5
Authorizing a Contract
Every Letters of Credit transactions that you enter manually must be verified and authorized. Only
a user who has appropriate rights can perform the verification and authorization functions. Such
a user is called an authorizer. You can invoke the ‘Letters Of Credit Authorise Contract’ screen by
typing ‘LCDTRAUT’ in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking the
adjoining arrow button.
You can authorize a contract by clicking the ‘Authorize’ icon on the Application toolbar.
5-62
You cannot authorise a contract in the following cases:
5.6

the contract has multilevel of authorization pending, the same will be done using the
‘Multilevel Authorization Detailed’ screen

the level of authorization is greater than or equal to ‘N’

the ‘Nth’ or the final level of the users authorisation limit is less than the difference
between amount financed and sum of the limits of all the users involved in authorizing a
transaction, this case holds good when the ‘Cumulative’ field is checked in the ‘Product
Transaction Limits Maintenance’ screen

the transaction amount is greater than the authoriser’s authorisation limit if the
‘Cumulative’ field is unchecked in the ‘Product Transaction Limits Maintenance’ screen
Viewing LC Contract
You can view the LC contract using ‘Letters of Credit Contract Summary’ screen.
5-63
To invoke this screen, type ‘LCSTRONL’ in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool
bar and click the adjoining arrow button.
You can click ‘Search’ button to view all the pending functions. However, you can to filter your
search based on any of the following criteria:
Authorized
Select the authorization status of the contract from the drop-down list.
Contract Reference
Select the contract reference number from the option list.
Currency
Select the currency of the transaction from the option list.
Branch
Select the branch code for which you want to check the contract from the option list.
5-64
Contract Status
Select the status of the contract for which you want to check the pending function from the dropdown list.
Product Code
Select the product code from the option list.
Contract Amount
Select the contract amount.
Operation Code
Select status of the operation code from the adjoining option list.
When you click ‘Search’ button the records matching the specified search criteria are displayed.
For each record fetched by the system based on your query criteria, the following details are
displayed:

Authorized

Contract Status

Contract Reference

Product Code

Currency

Contract Amount

User Reference

Source Reference

Date

Party Type

Issue Date

Expiry Date

Branch
5-65
Click ‘Advanced Search’ to display the screen below:
You can query a contract based on any of the following details:

Authorized

Contract Status

Contract Reference

Product Code

Currency

Contract Amount

User Reference

Source Reference

Customer Reference

Date

Party Type

Issue Date

Expiry date
5-66

Branch
5.7 Multilevel Authorization of a Contract
High value transactions may require multilevel of authorization. The levels of authorizations are
defined in the ‘Product Transaction Limits’ screen. You can use the ‘Multilevel Authorization
Detailed’ screen for authoring a contract n-1 times. However, final authorization can take place
only in the contract screen.
For more details, refer the ‘Multilevel Authorization of Contract/Loan Account’ section in the
‘Procedures’ User Manual.
5.8
Canceling LC
You may have to cancel an LC that has been opened, before its Expiry Date. An example for a
cancellation is when the trade deal for which the LC is opened falls through. A cancelled LC will
not be available for any availment. However, you can cancel an LC that has been availed
partially.
A Pre-advice Import LC contract can also be cancelled like any other LC contract.
In Oracle FLEXCUBE, the following are the prerequisites for cancellation:

The LC has not yet reached its expiry date

The cancellation event - CANC, has been defined
The accounting entries for this event are generally the reversal of the accounting entries passed
for liability and collateral, when the LC was opened. In addition, a charge can be levied for
canceling the LC. A cancellation advice informing, the advising bank or beneficiary, about the
cancellation may be generated.
5.8.1 Procedure for Canceling LC
From the Contract Detailed View:

Click cancel icon in the Toolbar
You will be prompted to confirm the cancellation.
5.8.2 Generating Cancellation Advice in SWIFT Format
For generating LC cancellation advice in SWIFT MT799 format, you need to maintain the
template for cancellation advice using ‘SWIFT FFT Template’ screen. The template ID needs to
be the same as the message ID.
Additionally, you need to set the default media as ‘SWIFT’ at the customer level and customer
address levels. The advice format also needs to be set to SWIFT. Further, you need to attach the
advice to PCLS event at the product maintenance level.
5-67
If the above settings are done, the system will generate the cancellation advice in MT799 format
during manual partial as well as auto partial closures of an LC.
5.9
Closing an LC
Normally, an LC that is opened will be negotiated within its expiry date. If the negotiation does not
happen even after the expiry date, you can close the LC.
By closing an LC, you will be reversing the liability entries passed for the LC. This ensures that
the credit limit that was taken by the LC is released and is available for future utilization.
A similar process is followed to cancel a Pre-advice Import LC.
5.9.1 Procedure for Closing an LC
In Oracle FLEXCUBE, you can close an LC under the following circumstances:

The event ‘CLOS’ is defined for the LC

The LC is beyond its Expiry Date
The accounting entries defined for this event is generally the reversal of the outstanding liability.
No availment can be made against an LC that is closed. You should reopen a closed LC if you
have to make an availment against it. This would be required in a situation when the LC comes in
for negotiation after it has been closed. The reopening of the LC will put back the outstanding
liability and availability for the LC.
5.9.1.1 Closing an LC Automatically
In the LC Contract Main screen, you can specify the following dates related to the closure of an
LC:

Whether auto closure is allowed

The date on which the LC should be automatically closed
To recall, the date of automatic closure is based on the ‘Closure Days’ maintained for the product
involved in the LC. However, you can change the closure date, to any date, after the expiry date
of the LC.
An LC that is defined for automatic closure will be closed during the End of Day processes on the
closure date.
5.9.1.2 Closing LC Manually
An LC that is not defined for automatic closure can be closed any time after its Expiry Date.
Click ‘Close’ icon, when the details of the LC are displayed in the Detailed View screen.
5-68
Oracle FLEXCUBE displays a message prompting you to confirm the closure. The closure of an
LC should be authorized by a user, bearing a different User ID, before the End of Day operations
begin.
5.10 Reopening LC
To avail against a closed LC, you have to reopen it. This occurs when the LC comes in for
negotiation after it has been closed. The reopening of the LC will put back the outstanding liability
and availability for the LC.
To reopen a closed LC, you should have defined the event ‘ROPN’ for the product under which
the LC is processed. For this event, you should have ideally defined the same entries for the LC
outstanding amount and the liability, as you would for the opening (issue or advice) of an LC. You
can levy a charge for reopening an LC.
5.10.1 Procedure for Reopening LC
Click ‘Reopen’ icon when the details of the LC are being displayed in the Detailed View screen.
Oracle FLEXCUBE will prompt you to confirm the reopening of the LC.
When you reopen a letter of credit, the system automatically levies a charge based on a given
tariff. The system uses the amount tag ‘OLD_OS_AMT’ for the charge. This charge is calculated
for a period between the last expiry date and the new expiry date defined while reopening the LC.
At times, the customer may request to reopen an expired LC with an increment in the LC amount.
In such cases, the system considers the new LC amount as the basis amount for computation of
the commission. Based on the LC product preferences, this commission can be collected in
advance or arrears. This commission is applied during ROPN event.
Example
Consider an LC with the following details:
Original LC Amount
: 100000 USD
Availed LC Amount
: 75000 USD
LC Outstanding Amount
: 25000 USD
This LC expired on March 25, 2008. On expiry, the LC had an outstanding balance of USD 25,000. In
August 2008, the customer requests to reopen the LC with the new expiry date as September 25, 2008. The
customer also needs the LC amount to be increased by USD 10,000.
Commission good until date: March 31, 2008
The bank extends the LC through reinstatement. The commission charged will be the sum of following two
components.
The commission on the old basis amount is charged from last expiry or GUD, whichever is greater. In this
case, it is charged from March 31, 2008, till the date of amendment/reinstatement of the LC. This
commission is charged on the previous outstanding LC value of USD 25,000.
5-69
The commission on the new basis amount is charged from the date of amendment/reinstatement till the date
of new expiry. This commission is charged on the current outstanding LC value of USD 35,000, as per the
given tariff.
You can modify the following details while reopening an LC:

LC Amount

Expiry Date

Shipment Details

Details under Party Limits Tab

Cash Collateral Details
However, you cannot modify the other details of the LC.
Once you have made the required modifications, save the contract. The system posts contingent
entries defined for ROPN event with the modified LC amount. The system also tracks the limits
for the LC.
When the LC amount is increased, there may be a corresponding increment against the
respective parties in the New Limits tab. However, you need to manually handle such changes.
Reopening of an LC needs to be authorized by a different user having sufficient user rights.
Reopening Import LC
On authorization of reopening of an import LC, the system generates MT707. If a reimbursement
bank is also involved in the import LC, MT747 is generated.
Reopening Export LC
When an export LC is closed, the system receives MT707 as a request for amendment. This
message is moved to the repair queue. In such cases, you need to manually reopen and amend
the LC. If a reimbursement bank is involved, the system receives MT747. Reopening and
amendment need to be handled manually.
If the parent LC of a transferred export LC is closed, you need to reopen the parent LC first. If you
directly try to reopen the transferred export LC, the system displays an error message. This is
applicable to reopening of back-to-back LCs as well.
Reopening Letter of Guarantee
In case of a letter of guarantee, the system generates MT767 on authorization of reopening.
You can reopen the closed LCs only. In case PCLS event has been triggered, you need to
manually close the LC before reopening.
5-70
5.11 Reassigning a Contract to another User
A contract can be deleted only by the user who entered it. If a contract has to be deleted and the
user who input the same is not available to do it, you can reassign the contract to another user so
that the other user can delete it. Typically, this situation may arise during EOD operations, when a
contract that is not authorized has to be deleted and the user who input it has left office for the
day.
You can invoke the ‘Letters of Credit Contract Reassign’ screen by typing ‘LCDTREAS’ in the
field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
To reassign a contract to another user, the following steps are required:
Product Code
Indicate the product associated with the bill. You can select a product code from the option list,
which contains a list of the authorized products that you have created.
Contract Reference Number
Indicate the contract reference number of the bill you wish to reassign, to another user. You can
select a reference number from the option list, which contains a list of all the active bills.
Current User ID
The current user ID is displayed.
New User ID
Select the User ID of the user to whom you are assigning the contract.
5-71
This user to whom you reassign a contract should have access rights to enter bill contracts.
Your User ID will be defaulted from the login screen. Click save icon to save the specifications
you have made. Click ‘Exit’ or ‘Cancel’ button if you do not want to save the details that you
entered.
5.12 Liquidating Components
You can prepay the commission or liquidate the overdue components i.e. Normal and Penal
components partially or fully through the ‘Payment Input’ screen.
You can invoke the ‘Letters of Credit Payment Input’ screen by typing ‘LCDTRPAY’ in the field at
the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
Specify the following in this screen:
Contract Reference
Specify the contract you want to liquidate. You can also select the contract from the adjoining
option list. The list displays all the active contracts with bill amount ‘zero’
5-72
Click ‘P’ button to display the outstanding amount. This screen also displays all the overdue
interest and penalty interest on Principal.
On clicking ‘L’ button, the system will allocate the payment amount towards each component. On
clicking ‘S’ button, the system displays the total amount paid and this total amount will be
displayed in the ‘Total Paid’ field.
You can choose to liquidate the overdue components only if the interest component is
specified as Arrears.
In case the components are liquidated, the screen amends the status of the contract as
liquidated. You can also reverse the interest component that is liquidated.
On saving the transaction after entering all the required details in the system, the system
validates the value of the contract amount against the following:

Product transaction limit

User Input limit
If the transaction currency and the limit currency are different, then the system converts the
amount financed to limit currency and checks if the same is in excess of the product transaction
limit and user input limit. If this holds true, the system indicates the same with below
override/error messages:

Number of levels required for authorizing the transaction

Transaction amount is in excess of the input limit of the user
5.12.1 Authorizing a Contract
A contract that you have entered should be authorized before the EOD is run. You can authorize
a payment by clicking the ‘Authorize’ icon on the Application toolbar.
You cannot authorize a contract from the ‘Letters of Credit Payment Input’ screen in the
following cases:

The contract has multilevel of authorization pending, the same will be done using the
‘Multilevel Authorization Detailed’ screen

The level of authorization is greater than or equal to ‘N’

The ‘Nth’ or the final level of the users authorization limit is less than the difference
between amount financed and sum of the limits of all the users involved in authorizing a
transaction, this case holds good when the ‘Cumulative’ field is checked in the ‘Product
Transaction Limits Maintenance’ screen

The transaction amount is greater than the authorizer’s authorization limit if the
‘Cumulative’ field is unchecked in the ‘Product Transaction Limits Maintenance’ screen
5-73
6.
6.1
Capturing Additional Details
Introduction
The buttons on the contract screen enable you to invoke a number of functions vital to the
processing of an LC Contract.
These buttons have been briefly described below.
Buttons
Description
Drafts
Click this button to capture the details of draft drawn for the LC. You can
specify the name of the insurance company that is covering the goods traded
under the LC.
Commission
On invoking this button Commission details of the contract is displayed
6-1
Charges
This button invokes the Charges, Commissions and Fees (ICCF) service.
On invoking this function you will be presented with a screen where the ICCF
rate, amount, currency and the waive charge parameter can be specified.
The Processing Charges and Fees manual, details the procedure for
maintaining charge rules. It also deals with the linking of a charge rules to a
product and the application of the rule on an LC.
The Processing Commissions manual, details the procedure for maintaining
commission rules. It also deals with the linking of a commission rule to a
product and the application of the rule on an LC.
Settlement
Click this button to invoke the Settlement screens. Based on the details that
you enter in the settlement screens the LC will be settled. The details of these
screens have been discussed in the Settlements manual.
Tax
This button invokes the Tax services. The Processing Tax manual details the
procedure for maintaining tax rules and schemes. It also deals with the linking
of a tax scheme to a product and the application of the scheme on an LC.
Collateral
In the screen that corresponds to this button, you can specify details of the
cash that you collect as collateral form a customer for the LC that you process.
The details of this screen are discussed under the head Specifying Collateral
details for an LC.
Events
Click this button to view the details of the events and accounting entries that a
contract involves.
Linkages
Clicking this button invokes the Contract Linkages screen. In this screen, you
can link an LC to a deposit or account, and indicate the funds that you would
like to block.
Fields
Click this button to specify values for the user defined fields (UDFs).
MIS
Click this button to define MIS details for the LC.
Transfer
Details
If the LC is transferred to a new party, you can view the transaction details.
BC Linkages
Click this button to specify BC linkages
Split
Settlement
Click this button to specify split settlement details
Loan
Preference
Click this button to invoke the Loan Preference screen. You can maintain the
details of the Loan here.
Brokerage
Use this button to capture the brokerage details for the LC contract and set
your preferences for sharing the brokerage amount among multiple brokers.
All Messages
Click this button to view all messages associated to contract.
6-2
Enter valid inputs into all the mandatory fields in screens that can be invoked from the buttons or
you will not be able to save the contract. After making the mandatory entries for the LC, save the
contract by either clicking save icon in the toolbar.
A contract that you have entered should be authorized by a user bearing a different Login ID,
before the EOD is run.
You have the option to amend all the unauthorized entries made for an LC. However, after
authorization, certain fields cannot be amended.
Click ‘Exit’ or ‘Cancel’ button to go back to the Application Browser.
6.2
Capturing Draft Details
You can capture the details of the draft that is drawn for the LC, in the Drafts screen. In addition,
you can also specify the name of the insurance company that is covering the goods traded under
the LC. Click ‘Drafts’ button in the LC Contract to invoke the screen:
You can capture the following details:
6-3
Draft Tenor
Specify the tenor of the draft.
Amount/Percentage
Specify whether the draft is a percentage of the LC amount or a Flat amount.
Subsequently, specify the Amount or the Percentage (based on your selection).
Credit Days From
The Date from which the tenor of the draft begins.
6.2.1.1 Specifying Drawee Details
Specify the following details.
Drawee
Specify the party on whom the draft is drawn. You can select the drawee’s CIF from the adjoining
list. This will contain a list of all the open and authorized CIF maintained in the Customer
Directory. This information is captured from the BIC directory.
Address 1 to 4
Specify the address of the drawee.
6.2.1.2 Specifying Insurance Company Details
Specify the following details.
Company Name
Specify the Insurance Company to be associated with the LC.
Company Code
You can select the appropriate company code from the option list. The list will display all
authorized and active company codes. If you have specified an open insurance policy in the
‘Insurance Policy Number’ field, the option list will display the company code associated with the
chosen insurance policy number. Upon selection of the company code, the following details will
be automatically displayed by the system:

Company Name

Address of the company

Telephone Number

Fax Number

Policy Utilized Amount
6-4

Cover Date

Insurance Amount

Telex Address

Warehouse Address
Open Policy
Check this option to link an open insurance policy to the LC.
Insurance Policy Number
Specify the insurance policy number here. The adjoining option list displays all insurance policy
codes maintained in the system. If you check the option ‘Open Policy’ the option list will display
the open insurance policies maintained in the system. You can select the appropriate one.
If you have checked the ‘Open Policy’ option and the policy number is specified here is invalid
(i.e. not maintained in the ‘Open Policy Maintenance’ screen) or blank, the system will display an
error message.
Expiry Date
Enter the expiry date of the Policy.
6.2.1.3 Specifying Breakup Details
The breakup details of the draft will be displayed here as follows:

Amount Name

Amount
The draft amounts for the different components (Insurance, Interest, Invoice, Freight)
You can also choose to associate an Insurance Company that is not maintained in the
system. When you are specifying a company code that does not exist, the system will display an
override (based on your requirement, you can configure the override to be a warning or an error
message). On confirmation of the override, the company code will be automatically changed to
‘XXXXXXXXX’. Subsequently, you can specify any company name to be associated with the
contract. The system will not perform any validations. The remaining fields in the screen will be
disabled in this case.
6-5
6.3
Specifying Settlement Instructions
Through the settlement screens, you should specify the customer accounts to which entries for
the commissions, charges, taxes and collateral should be posted.
Click ‘Settlement’ button in the Contract Main screen, for a display of the Settlements screen.
Besides the account details, you can specify:

The currency in which the component is expressed

The payment account and its currency
If you have specified an account that uses an account class that is restricted for the product,
an override is sought.

The branch of your bank to which the account belongs

The exchange rate (in the case of the component currency being different from the
account currency)

The ERI Currency

The ERI Amount
Refer to the chapter titled ‘Making Availment’ in this user manual for details.
6-6
6.4
Viewing Event Details
The event details screen of contract processing will show the details of the accounting entries
generated for an LC. Click ‘Events’ in the LC Contract Detailed View screen to go to the LC
Contract View Events screen.
The details of events that have already taken place on the contract will be displayed, along with
the date on which the event took place.
Click ‘Accounting Entries’ to view the accounting entries for the event that is highlighted. Click
‘Message’ to view the messages applicable to the event. Click on ‘Exit’ or ‘Cancel’ to go back to
the LC Contract Detailed View screen.
6-7
6.4.1 Viewing the Accounting Entries Passed for the LC
From ‘LC Contract - View Events’ screen, click ‘Accounting Entries’ to view the Accounting
Entries for the event. The accounting entries that are passed depend on the type of LC that you
are processing.
The following information is provided for each event:

Branch

Account

Transaction Code

Booking Date

Value Date

Dr/Cr indicator

Currency

CCY (Currency)

Amount in contract CCY
6-8

Amount in local currency

All the overrides that were given for an event will also be displayed
Click ‘Exit’ or ‘Cancel’ to go back to the screen from where you invoked the Accounting Entries
screen.
6.4.2 Viewing Advices Applicable to Contract
Click ‘Message’ from the View Events screen to view the list of advices applicable to a particular
event in the lifecycle of the LC.
The following details of a message are displayed:

The message type

The Name and ID of the recipient of the message and

The status of the message
To view the text of a message, highlight the message and click on the ‘Message’ button. Click
‘Exit’ or ‘Cancel’ to exit the screen.
6-9
6.5
Capturing MIS Details
Click ‘MIS’ button to invoke the following screen.
Refer the MIS User Manual for further details on capturing MIS details.
6.6
Defining Commission Details
Besides the LC amount, the other components of an LC include the commissions that you collect
and the charges that you levy on the parties involved in an LC.
6-10
While defining Accounting Roles for a product you must specify the internal accounts that should
be picked up when commissions are collected and when charges are levied.
For an LC having the operation code ‘Reimbursement’, you will not be able to save commission
related details. While saving the contract, the system will display an error message if you enter
details in the ‘ICCF screen’.
While creating or amending an authorized contract, you can modify the percentage of
commission to be charged. Enter the rate and click ‘Re-compute’ button to recalculate the
commission percentage to be charged.
The details of the commissions that can be collected and the procedure of making them
applicable to the LC you are processing has been detailed in the chapter Processing
Commissions in the Modularity User Manual.
6.7
Defining Charge Details
Click ‘Charges’ button to invoke the following screen.
6-11
Refer the Charges and Fees User Manual under Modularity for further details about this screen.
6-12
6.8
Specifying Tax Details
Click ‘Tax’ button to invoke the following screen.
Refer the Tax User Manual under Modularity for further details on tax processing.
6.9
Maintaining Collateral Details
LCs that are issued or confirmed is often processed with cash collateral. In cases like a in a
Guarantee, you may even take a 100% cash collateral. This is when an applicant is not a
customer of your bank and the credit worthiness of the applicant is not known. Details of such
cash collateral can be maintained in the LC Contract - Collateral Details screen.
6-13
To invoke this screen, click ‘Collateral’ in the LC Contract Details screen. The LC Collateral
Details screen is displayed.
The cash collateral percentage is defined for the product under which an LC is processed. This
percentage is picked up by default for the LC being processed.
6.9.1.1 Specifying Value of the Cash Collateral
The value of collateral can be expressed either as an amount or as a percentage of the LC
amount.
Collateral Currency
Specify the currency of the collateral.
Percentage
If you specify the cash that is to be collected as collateral as a percentage of the LC amount, the
equivalent amount is displayed. This amount is taken to be in the currency, defined as the
collateral currency.
Amount
You can specify the cash collateral as an amount. In this case you do not need to specify a
percentage. However if you specified the collateral as a percentage of the LC amount, the actual
amount is computed in the collateral currency by the system.
Exchange Rate
If the collateral currency and the currency in which the LC is issued are different, you should also
specify an exchange rate to be used in the conversion. The value of the collateral is determined
based on this exchange rate.
6-14
Description
Give a brief description of the collateral.
6.9.1.2 Specifying Adjustment Details for a Collateral
At any time during the lifecycle of an LC, you may want to increase or decrease the value of the
cash, accepted as collateral on LC. This is done by way of an amendment to the LC. The cash
collateral can be increased or decreased, without changing the LC amount. On the other hand, a
change in the LC amount may necessitate a change to the collateral amount.
Type
If you wish to increase the collateral amount, indicate ‘Increase’ on this screen.
If you wish to decrease the collateral amount that you have collected while issuing an LC, indicate
‘Decrease’ on this screen.
Amount
Enter the amount by which you want to increase or decrease the cash accepted as collateral. The
collateral deposit account will automatically increase or reduce based on the specifications you
make.
If at the time of availment, you want to pay from the collateral account, you can include it in
the accounting entries for the event, Availment.
6.10 Linking Contracts to Deposits and Accounts
You can link an LC contract to deposits and accounts.
Type of
linkage
Description
Linking a
deposit
The entire LC amount, or a portion of it, can be linked to a
deposit. The outstanding amount in the deposit should always be
greater than or equal to the LC amount.
You can link several LCs to the same deposit, provided sufficient
funds are available in the deposit.
Linking
an
account
You can link the entire contract amount or a portion of it, to a
savings or current account that is maintained with you. The
available balance in the account should always be equal to or
greater than the contract amount that is outstanding. You can
link any number of contracts to an account provided a balance
greater than or equal to the total outstanding contract amount(s)
is available in the account.
The entire contract amount or a portion of it can be linked to any number of deposits or account
or to both. From the LC Contract Details screen, you can invoke the ‘Linkages Details’ screen by
clicking ‘Linkage Details’ button.
6-15
In this screen, you can specify any account/deposit with you, and indicate the funds that you
would like to block.
Specify the following details.
Type
In the Contract Details screen, you can specify the type of linkage. The LC can be linked to a:

deposit

account

LC

EL
If you select the EL type, then LC reference number will be available in Linked to Reference
Number option list. Only Export type of LC is displayed in option list. You can link Export type of
LC, only for bill availing under reimbursement type of LC.
Linked To Reference Number/Account
If the LC is linked to a deposit, you should enter the Reference Number of the deposit. The
deposit should be a valid contract in Oracle FLEXCUBE, with a Value Date that is earlier than or
the same as the Value Date of the LC contract. The Maturity Date should be the same as, or later
than that of the contract.
If the linkage is with an account, enter the account number to which you are linking the LC. The
account you specify has to be a customer account (a Current account or a Savings Bank
account).
If the linkage is with LC, linked reference number will be the reference number that you entered in
the main page.
6-16
Currency
The currency of the linkage type to which the LC is linked is displayed once the linkage details
are specified.
Available Amount
The system displays the amount available against the linked contract or account.
Exchange Rate
If the currency of the LC is different from the currency of the deposit or account to which it is
being linked, the mid-rate for the day will be picked from the Exchange Rate table and displayed
in the screen.
Converted Linked Amount
The system displays the converted linked amount.
Linked Amount
Indicate the contract amount that has to be linked to the deposit or account. This amount can be
the entire amount of the LC or a portion of it. The amount available for linkage, in the specified
deposit or account, is arrived at, by taking into account other linkages and the uncollected and
unauthorised balance (in the case of an account).
Once the linked amount is specified, the system displays the following values.
Account/Deposit
The system displays the amount linked to each contract or account.
Uncovered Amount
The system displays the contract amount that has not been linked, in the case of a partial linkage.
6.11 Viewing Amended Details of Contract
You can view the changes made in a specific version of an LC contract. To do this, navigate to
the version of the contract that you would like to view in the Contract Details screen. Click
‘Change Log’ in the vertical array of buttons on the Contract Details screen.
The fields that were modified in the version will be displayed along with the old (inherited) and the
changed values.
6-17
6.12 Specifying Transfer Details
Click ‘Transfer Details’ button to invoke the following screen.
Specify the following details.
To Letter Of Credit reference
Specify the destination to which the goods transacted under the LC should be sent by selecting
the appropriate option from the list of values.
Transfer Amount
Specify the amount that should be transferred from the original LC. You can only transfer an
amount that is less than or equal to the amount available under the original LC.
Transfer Date
The system date is displayed as the date of the transfer. This cannot be modified.
Expiry Date
The expiry date is the date up to which the transferred LC is valid. The expiry date of the original
LC is displayed here. You can modify this, provided that the expiry date is not earlier than the LC
issue date or the system date.
Shipment Date
This is the latest date by which the shipment of the goods specified for the transferred LC can
take place. The latest shipment date of the original LC is displayed here. You can modify this,
provided that the date you enter is neither earlier than the Issue Date of the LC, nor later than the
expiry date.
6-18
6.13 Capturing UDF Values
Click ‘Fields’ button to invoke the following screen.
The User Defined Fields (UDFs) maintained for the linked function id are displayed here. You can
specify values for them.
Refer the User Manual titled ‘User Defined Field’ for details about defining UDFs.
6.14 Specifying Loan Preferences
Click ‘Loan Preferences’ button to invoke the following screen:
6-19
Specify the following details;
Contract Reference
The contract reference number is displayed here.
Latest Sequence Number
The system generates a sequence number and displays it here.
Product
The loan product is displayed here. However, you can change the loan product if required.
Specify the loan product that should be used for loan contract creation. The adjoining option list
gives a list of loan products maintained in the Consumer Lending module. Choose the
appropriate one.
Counterparty
The system displays the customer ID (CIF) of the shipping guarantee.
Currency
Specify the currency in which the loan should be initiated. The adjoining option list gives a list of
valid currency codes maintained in the system. Choose the appropriate one.
Tenor
Specify the loan tenor. By default the system displays the LC tenor. However, you can change it.
6-20
Units
Specify the units in which the tenor is specified.
Contract Reference Number
The contract reference number is displayed here.
Event Sequence Number
The system displays the event sequence number.
Bill Outstanding Amount
The bill outstanding amount is displayed here.
Rate
You can capture the exchange rate details here.
Middle Rate
Select the rate to be applied for conversion. The options available are Middle rate and Buy/Sell
Rate.
Exchange Rate
For a customer availing any Relationship Pricing scheme, the customer specific exchange rate
derived by adding the original exchange rate and the customer spread maintained for the
relationship pricing scheme gets displayed here.
If Relationship Pricing is not applicable, Exchange Rate will be the same as the Original
Exchange Rate.
For more details on customer specific exchange rates, refer the section titled ‘Specifying Pricing
Benefit Details’ in Relationship Pricing user manual.
Rate type
Specify the rate type used for exchange rate. The adjoining list gives a list of rate types. Choose
the appropriate one. The default rate type is Standard.
Original Exchange Rate
The base or the actual exchange rate between the contract currency and collateral currency gets
displayed here.
Payment Mode
Specify the mode of payment.
6-21
Loan Value Date
The system displays the debit value date. However, you can change it.
Maturity Date
The system computes the maturity date based on loan tenor and displays it here. However, you
can change it.
Credit Product Account
Specify the credit settlement account of the loan.
Debit Product Account
Specify the debit settlement account of the loan.
Debit Account Branch
Specify the branch where the debit settlement account used for the loan resides.
Credit Account Branch
Specify the branch where the credit settlement account used for the loan resides.
While creating a loan from a shipping guarantee, the system defaults the interest rate and
exchange rate specific to the customer. These rates are taken from the section ‘Promotion
Maintenance’ of the ‘Customer Maintenance’ screen. In case the default rates are not available,
the system defaults the standard mid rate.
The system will calculate the penalty based on the loan creation date. That is, even if the value
date is different from the loan creation date, the penalty will be calculated after the expiry of the
penal start days counted from the date of creation of the loan. You can manually change the
number of penal value days in order to start applying the penalty from a different date.
6.15 Split Settlement Screen
Click ‘Split Settlement’ button to invoke the following screen.
6-22
Specify the following details.
6.15.1 Specifying Settlement Split Master
You can specify the details of the settlement split master in the following fields:
Basis Amount Tag
Specify the amount tag involved in the contract. The adjoining option list displays all valid amount
tags maintained in the system. You can choose the appropriate one. For example, on booking a
new contract, the only tag allowed is PRINCIPAL. This is referred to as the basis amount tag.
Currency
The system displays the currency associated with the amount tag.
Amount
The system displays the basis amount associated with the amount tag. For example, the amount
involved in the contract would be displayed against the amount tag ‘PRINCIPAL’. The amount is
in terms of the currency associated with the amount tag.
You can use ‘Get Exchange Rate’ button to get the original exchange rates defaulted in the
screen.
6-23
6.15.2
Specifying Settlement Split Details
For each spilt amount tag, you need to specify the following details:
Amount
Specify the amount for the split amount tag. This amount should not be greater than the amount
of the corresponding basis amount tag. The split amount is in the currency of the basis amount
tag. This is a mandatory field and you will not be allowed to save the details if you do not specify
the amount.
Loan Account
Check this box to indicate that the specified account should be the loan account.
Exchange Rate
Specify the exchange rate that should be used for the currency conversion.
Negotiated Cost Rate
Specify the negotiated cost rate that should be used for foreign currency transactions between
the treasury and the branch. You need to specify the rate only when the currencies involved in
the transaction are different. Otherwise, it will be a normal transaction.
The system will display an override message if the negotiated rate is not within the exchange rate
variance maintained at the product.
Negotiated Reference Number
Specify the reference number that should be used for negotiation of cost rate, in foreign currency
transaction. If you have specified the negotiated cost rate, then you need to specify the
negotiated reference number also.
Oracle FLEXCUBE books then online revaluation entries based on the difference in
exchange rate between the negotiated cost rate and transaction rate.
6.16 Capturing Brokerage Details
You can capture the brokerage details for an LC contract and set your preferences for sharing the
brokerage amount among multiple brokers using ‘Brokerage’ screen. To invoke the screen, click
‘Brokerage’ button on ‘Letters of Credit Contract Details’ screen.
6-24
You can capture the following details:
Contract Reference
The system displays the reference number of the contract.
Contract Currency
The system displays the currency of the bills contract. You cannot modify the contract currency.
Brokerage Percentage
Specify the percentage of the contract amount that should be paid as brokerage. Based on the
percentage set here, the system calculates the brokerage amount. The brokerage amount
calculation takes place at the Bills contract level.
In case of Bills contracts, you may directly enter the brokerage amount. However, if you specify
the brokerage percentage as well as the amount, the system ignores the amount and calculates it
afresh based on the percentage specified here.
Brokerage Amount
Specify the brokerage amount to be paid. However, if you have entered the brokerage
percentage, the system ignores the amount mentioned here and calculates it afresh based on the
brokerage percentage.
You can directly enter the contract amount for Bills contracts only. In case of LC contracts, the
system displays the amount based on the brokerage percentage and contract amount. You
cannot modify the brokerage amount in that case.
6-25
Brokerage Details
You can share the brokerage amount among multiple brokers. Click add button to add more
brokers to the list.You can define the percentage of brokerage amount to be paid to each broker
selected under this list
Broker
Specify the broker ID. The option list displays all valid broker IDs maintained in the system.
Choose the appropriate one.
You can maintain multiple records for the same broker ID.
Broker Name
Based on the broker ID selected, the system displays the name of the broker.
Broker Account
Specify the broker account. The option list displays all valid accounts maintained for the selected
broker along with the Nostro accounts and GLs for which posting is allowed. Choose the
appropriate one.
Broker Currency
The system displays the currency of the selected broker account.
Percentage
Specify the percentage of total brokerage amount that should be paid to the selected broker. This
will make the selected broker eligible for that percentage of the total brokerage amount shown
above.
You can allot a specific percentage of the brokerage to each broker selected here. The system
will verify whether the percentages allotted for all brokers together equals to 100 or not.
Amount in Account Currency
The system displays the portion of brokerage amount allotted to the selected broker in terms of
local currency.
Exchange Rate
The system displays the exchange rate between the local currency and the account currency.
This rate is used to convert the brokerage amount into the account currency. You can modify the
exchange rate.
Amount in Contract Currency
The system calculates and displays the portion of brokerage amount allotted to the selected
broker in terms of contract currency.
6-26
Original Exchange Rate
The system displays the actual exchange rate. This rate is inclusive of all available customer
spreads.
Negotiated Rate
Specify the rate of exchange agreed upon after the negotiations with the broker.
The system will display an override message if the negotiated rate is not within the exchange rate
variance maintained at the product.
Negotiation Reference Number
Specify the negotiation reference number.
Once you have captured the details, save the contract. The system allows modification of
brokerage details until its liquidation.
The system will default the brokerage details to the bill contracts associated with this LC. You
may modify the brokerage details at the bills contract level.
You can use ‘Exchange Rate’ button to get the exchange rates between the broker account
currency and bill currency for all the brokers listed in the screen.
The system defaults the brokerage details in ‘Spilt Settlements’ screen. Those details are then
used in settlements. You can enter the routing details for the messages in case the settlement
takes place through Nostro account. If you modify the default brokerage details in ‘Split
Settlements’ screen, the system displays an error message.
During liquidation of the brokerage, the system generates credit advices for each of the brokers
involved.
6-27
6.17 Specifying Document details
You can capture the customer related documents in central content management repository
through the ‘Document Upload’ screen. Click ‘Documents’ button to invoke this screen.
Here, you need to specify the following details:
Document Category
Specify the category of the document to be uploaded.
Document Type
Specify the type of document that is to be uploaded.
Document Reference
The system generates and displays a unique identifier for the document.
Remarks
Specify the additional information, if any.
6-28
Upload
Click ‘Upload’ button to open the ‘Document Upload’ sub-screen. The ‘Document Upload’ subscreen is displayed below:
In the ‘Document Upload’ sub-screen, specify the corresponding document path and click the
‘Submit’ button. Once the document is uploaded through the upload button, the system displays
the document reference.
View
Click ‘View’ to view the document uploaded.
6.18 Viewing all Messages
Click ‘All Messages’ button to invoke the ‘View Message’ screen. This screen displays all the
messages associated to the contract.
6-29
The following details are displayed:
Contract reference number – Displays Reference number of the contract, for which messages are
generated.
Message Date – Displays the message generation date or received date
Direction – Displays whether the message is an incoming or outgoing message.
DCN – Displays document reference number of a contract.
Media – Displays whether the message is swift message or mail message.
Message Type – Displays the type of message
Swift Message Type – Displays the Swift MT number of the message sent or received.
Receiver/Sender – Displays Receiver or Sender ID.
Name – Displays the name of the Sender or Receiver.
Message Status – Displays current status of message.
Test Status – Displays the test status.
Authorized – System displays whether the status is authorized or unauthorized.
Acknowledgement Status – Displays the Ack/Nack Status of a message
6-30
PDE Flag – Displays the PDE flag.
Select a message and click on Message button to view details of the message.
6-31
7.
7.1
Making Availment
Introduction
On receipt of the bills or on notification from the negotiating bank, you can record an availment
under an LC. The availment on an LC can be made only up to the Maximum LC amount,
specified in the Contract Main screen.
Once an availment is recorded, the current availability under the LC will be reduced and the
outstanding liability updated automatically. It will be reduced by the availment amount. When an
availment is recorded and there is cash collateral outstanding against the LC, invoke the cash
collateral screen and specify the amount of cash collateral to be released.
7.2
Capturing Availment Details
You can invoke the ‘Letters of Credit Availment Input’ screen by typing ‘LCDAVMNT’ in the field
at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button. Click
new icon in the toolbar. The ‘Letters of Credit Availment Input’ screen with no values in the fields
is displayed.
7-1
Specify the following details:
Contract Reference
Specify or select the contract reference number from the option list provided.
You can fetch the transactions of all branches by choosing either contract reference number or
branch from this option list.
Click ‘P’ button.
The following contract details will be displayed:

Event

Description
7-2

Issue Date

Expiry Date

User ref No

Version No

Currency

Counterparty

Related Reference Number

Amount

Liability

Outstanding Amount

Available Confirmed Amount

Availed Unconfirmed Amount

Undertaking Amount

Availed Not Undertaking Amount
The system will not display ‘LC with Pre-advice’ operation contract in the adjoining option list.
Availment Details
Specify the following details.
Availment Amount
You can specify the amount being availed under the LC, in this screen. The availment amount
that you specify cannot be greater than the Outstanding LC Amount displayed in this screen.
Partial amounts can be availed against an LC. The availment thus need not always be the
amount available under the LC.
After an availment is made on an LC, the LC amount is automatically reduced. The LC amount
after the availment is displayed in the Outstanding LC Amount field of the ‘LC Contract Main’
screen.
If the LC is linked to an open insurance policy for which the option ‘Update utilization
Automatically’ is checked, the system will decrease the utilization on the policy with the LC
availment amount. Similarly, if the availment is reversed or a reversal is deleted, then the
utilization amount will be increased or decreased respectively to the extent of the availment
amount.
On saving the transaction after entering all the required details in the system, the system
validates the value of the availed amount against the following:

Product transaction limit
7-3

User Input limit
If the transaction currency and the limit currency are different, then the system converts the
amount financed to limit currency and checks if the same is in excess of the product transaction
limit and user input limit. If this holds true, the system indicates the same with below
override/error messages:

Number of levels required for authorizing the transaction

Transaction amount is in excess of the input limit of the user
Value Date
An availment can be made either as of a date in the past or today. By default, the system displays
the current date. You can change it to a date in the past.
Availment Type
Specify the type of availment to be recorded under the LC. Click the adjoining drop-down list and
select one of the following values:

Payment

Acceptance

Negotiation
If the entry to this field does not adhere to the conditions specified above you will be prompted for
an override.
Liability Amount
The Liability Amount refers to the customer’s liability to the bank. For an availment you can
specify the amount that should be reduced, from the Outstanding Liability amount.
The Outstanding Liability amount can be reduced by an amount that is greater or less than the
amount currently being availed. By default, the availment amount specified in the Availment
Amount field will be defaulted here.
The liability amount that you specify should not result in the Outstanding Liability Amount
being less than the Outstanding LC Amount. If the values entered as the Availment Amount and
the Liability Amount result in the liability amount being less than the LC amount, an error
message will be flashed. The message will prompt you to re-enter values to the relevant fields.
Internal Remarks
Click the adjoining icon and enter information about the availment in the window that pops up.
This information is intended for the internal reference of your bank. These remarks will be
displayed when the details of the availment are retrieved or printed. However, this information will
not be printed on any correspondence with the customer.
7-4
Outstanding
Specify the following details:
Liability
On clicking ‘P’ button after specifying the contract reference number, the system displays the
current liability amount.
Amount
On clicking ‘P’ button after specifying the contract reference number, the system displays the
current outstanding amount.
Confirmed Amount
On clicking ‘P’ button after specifying the contract reference number, the system displays the
current confirmed amount.
Unconfirmed Amount
On clicking ‘P’ button after specifying the contract reference number, the system displays the
current unconfirmed amount.
Available Confirmed Amount
On clicking ‘P’ button after specifying the contract reference number, the system displays the
current available confirmed amount.
Available Unconfirmed Amount
On clicking ‘P’ button after specifying the contract reference number, the system displays the
current available unconfirmed amount.
7.2.1.1 Reversing LC Liability
When an LC is availed using a Bill (or using the Availment function from the Browser), the
Availment Amount and the Liability Percentage specified for the underlying LC contract, will be
used in computing the default Liability Amount. The default value that is displayed can be
changed.
The following example illustrates this.
Example
You have specified the following details for an LC instrument.
LC Amount
1,000,000
Positive Tolerance
10%
Liability Percentage
5%
7-5
LC Amount
1,000,000
LC Liability Amount
100,000 + 10% (100,000) + 5% (100,000) = 115,000
When you avail this LC to a tune of 200,000, the Liability Amount will default as follows:
LC Amount
200,000
Liability Amount
200,000 + 5% (200,000) = 210,000
During availment, the Positive Tolerance Percentage specified for the LC is not taken into
account to compute the default value of the Liability Amount.
The LC availment screen displays buttons that invoke the various functions necessary to make an
availment on an LC. The buttons have been briefly described below:
Icons
Description
Advices
Click this button to define the advices that will be generated for the
availment.
Commission
This button invokes the Charges, Commissions, or Fees service. The
chapter titled Processing Charges on LCs details the procedure of
maintaining charge rules. It also deals with the application of the scheme
on an availment.
Tax
This button invokes the availment tax services. The tax details applicable
for the availment will be shown and you can choose to waive it, if
necessary.
The chapter titled Processing Tax for LCs details the procedure of
maintaining tax rules and schemes. It also deals with the linking and
application of the scheme on an availment.
Settlement
Click on this button to invoke the Settlement screens. You can specify
settlement details for the availment like:
the accounts to be used for the availment
message details and
party details
Based on the details that you enter in the settlement screens, the
availment will be settled. The details of these screens have been
discussed under the head Maintaining Settlement Instructions in this
chapter.
Collateral
In the screen corresponding to this button, you can specify the adjustments
that you want to make, on the cash collected as collateral.
Event
Click this button to view the details of the events and accounting entries
that an availment entails. This icon also gives the details of other events on
7-6
Icons
Description
the LC.
Charge
Click this button to capture charge details.
Enter valid inputs into all the mandatory fields before you save the availment. Save the contract
by either clicking save in the toolbar. On saving the availment, your User Id will be displayed in
the Entry By field at the bottom of the screen. The date and time at which you saved the record
will be displayed in the Date/Time field. A user bearing a different User ID should authorise an
availment that you have entered, before the EOD is run. The ID of the user who authorised the
availment will be displayed in the Auth By field. The date and time at which the availment has
been authorised will be displayed in the Date/Time field. The current status of the LC contract on
which you are processing the availment, is also displayed in the field Contract Status. The field
will display one of the following:

Active

Closed

Reversed

Cancelled

Hold
7.2.2 Viewing Event Details
Click ‘Events’ button in the ‘LC Availment’ screen, to go to the ‘Events’ screen. The details of
events that have taken place on the contract including the last availment, that you are have just
entered will be displayed.
7-7
The date on which the event took place will also be displayed.
Click ‘Exit’ or ‘Cancel’ button to go back to the main screen.
7.2.2.1 Viewing Accounting Entries
From the ‘View Events’ screen, click ‘Accounting Entries’ button to view the Accounting Entries
for the event. You can view the details of the accounting entries that were passed only for the
event displayed in the availment – ‘View Events’ screen.
7-8
The following information is provided for each event:

Branch

Account

Transaction Code

Booking Date

Value Date

Dr/Cr indicator

Currency

CCY (Currency)

Amount in contract CCY

Amount in local currency.
All the overrides that were allowed for an event will also be displayed
Click ‘Exit’ or ‘Cancel’ button to return to the screen from where you invoked the ‘Accounting
Entries’ screen.
7-9
The system will display an override message if the date when the availment is made i.e. the
value date of the availment falls after the expiry date for the LC issued. You may use your
discretion to proceed or cancel the contract. You can also have this override configured as an
error message in which case, the system will not allow you to proceed until you make the
necessary changes.
7.2.2.2 Reversal of Availment
You can reverse the last availment made on an LC. All availments made on the LC will be
displayed. You can select the last availment performed on the LC for reversal.
To reverse the details of an LC, click reverse icon in the toolbar. On reversing an availment on an
LC, the system passes reversal entries for the availment.
An availment can be reversed, only if it was the last event that took place on the LC contract.
Reversal of LC Liability
When an LC is availed using a Bill (or using the Availment function from the browser), the
Availment Amount and the Liability Percentage specified for the underlying LC contract will be
used in computing the default Liability Amount. This default value can be changed.
The following example illustrates this.
Example
You have specified the following details for an LC instrument.
LC Amount
1,000,000
Positive Tolerance
10%
Liability Percentage
5%
LC Liability Amount
100,000 + 10% (100,000) + 5% (100,000) = 115,000
When you avail this LC to a tune of 200,000, the Liability Amount will default as follows:
LC Amount
200,000
Liability Amount
200,000 + 5% (200,000) = 210,000
Note that during availment, the Positive Tolerance Percentage specified for the LC is not
taken into account to compute the default value of the Liability Amount.
7.2.3 Specifying Collateral Details
If the LC that you are processing has been backed by cash collateral, you can specify the cash
collateral to be released as a result of the availment.
7-10
By default, the collateral amount proportional to the amount availed will be adjusted automatically.
This default amount can be reduced or increased.
Click ‘Collateral’ button in the LC availment screen.
Specify the following details:
Contract Reference
The system displays the contract reference number.
Latest Even Sequence Number
The system displays the latest even sequence number.
7.2.3.1 Specifying collateral details
Collateral Currency
The currency of the collateral is displayed here.
Percent
The system displays the percentage of LC amount that should be considered for the collateral
amount.
Exchange Rate
The exchange rate to be used in the conversion is displayed here. The value of the collateral is
determined based on this exchange rate.
7-11
Amount
The collateral amount is displayed here.
Description
A brief description of the collateral is displayed here.
7.2.3.2 Specifying Adjustment details
Specify the following details.
Type
You can increase the collateral amount that is calculated by default. Choose ‘Increase’ option and
enter the amount by which the cash collateral should be increased. Choose the ‘Decrease’ option
Amount
Specify the amount by which the cash collateral should be increased or decreased.
If you are adjusting the collateral against an availment, you should have defined the appropriate
accounting entries for the event code AVAL.
Not invoking the ‘Collateral’ screen during the availment session will mean that you do not want to
adjust the collateral. This would be so even if you have defined the accounting entries for
availment reduction. An override to this effect will be displayed when you save the availment.
7.2.4 Maintaining Settlement Instructions
Apart from the details of the accounts involved in the availment, you may have to capture party
details for messaging requirements. The default settlement instructions for the customer will be
shown in the ‘Settlement Details’ screen. You can modify them. The accounts involved could be
the settlement account for the availment amount, charges and tax, if they are applicable.
Click ‘Settlement’ button in the ‘LC Availment’ screen and invoke the ‘Settlement Details’ screen.
7-12
Here you can specify the following details.
7.2.4.1 Account Details Tab
Click ‘Account Details’ tab to specify the details of the accounts involved in the availment. The
accounts and amount involved in the Debit and Credit legs of the accounting entry, for the
availment amount will be displayed in the ‘Account Details’ screen. These details cannot be
changed here. If a change is necessary, the same would have to be specified in the ‘LC
Availment’ screen.
The other details shown in this screen are the:

Component and its currency

Payment account and its currency

Branch of your bank to which the account belongs

Original Exchange rate (in case the component currency is different from the account
currency)

Exchange rate, which is the customer specific exchange rate derived by adding the
original exchange rate and the customer spread (applicable for Relationship Pricing
customers). If Relationship Pricing is not applicable, the Exchange rate will be the same
as the Original Exchange rate.

ERI Amount (Euro Related Information)

ERI Currency

Rate code

Spread definition
7-13

Customer spread
For more details on customer specific exchange rates, refer the section titled ‘Specifying Pricing
Benefit Details’ in Relationship Pricing user manual.
When settling charges for an LC or a guarantee, you can use a Receivable Account instead
of a Customer Account. In such a case, you can send a charge claim advice to the customer.
ERI Currency and Amount
SWIFT messages (MT 100/MT 202) generated towards settlement, can furnish the value of the
settlement amount in the settlement account currency and in the ERI currency.
If you choose to furnish the ERI value of the amount, you have to enter the following in the
‘Settlement Message Details’ screen:

The ERI currency

The ERI Amount
The system defaults to the ERI currency specified for the customer and currency combination.
The default ERI currency can be changed. The ERI amount will be validated against the
Tolerance Limit, specified for the ERI currency.
On 1 January 1999, eleven countries that are part of the European Union embarked on the
first phase of economic integration, called the ‘Economic and Monetary Union’ (EMU). The EMU
ushered in a new, single European currency: the Euro (EUR). The Euro, in Oracle FLEXCUBE,
can be handled by capturing information such as the ERI details, in this screen.
Generate Message
Settlement messages, defined for components that fall due, will be generated automatically when
you the Settlement Generation function at the End of Day. To suppress the generation of the
settlement message defined for a component, uncheck the Gen Message field of the ‘Contract
Settlement Message Details’ screen.
Debit/Credit Indicator
The default settlement instructions for the customer will be shown in the Settlement Accounts
screen. The default can be modified.
The direction of settlement indicates whether the account being shown, will be debited or
credited:

P - Indicates Pay, meaning that the account should be credited

R - Indicates Receive, meaning that the account should be debited
Netting
Check this box to indicate that you would like to enable the Netting option for the various
components (Amount Tags) involved in the transaction. These components could be commission,
interest, tax, charges etc.
7-14
Component Description
Give a brief description for the chosen component.
7.2.4.2 Verifying Signatures
Click ‘Signature Verification’ button to verify signatures for the transaction.
7.2.4.3 Message Details Tab
A Letter of Credit can be settled either in the form of an instrument or a Message (a SWIFT,
TELEX or Mail message to be sent to the concerned party). The details regarding the instrument
or message have to be specified in the ‘Message Details’ screen. The message details that you
specify in this screen are applicable only for SWIFT. The type of SWIFT message that is
generated depends on the parties involved in the LC.
Based on the method of settling the LC, you should input either Instrument or Message details.
Instrument Details
Specify the following details.
7-15
Instrument Type
If the payment is through an instrument, indicate the type of instrument. It could be Manager’s
Check, Check or a Demand Draft.
Number
Specify the number that will identify the instrument. This number will be printed on the instrument.
If the settlement is through an instrument, the party details cannot be specified for the transfer.
Typically, an LC availment entails the debiting or crediting of the customer account, for the
settlement amount. If the customer is being credited (in the case of your customer being the
beneficiary, of the availment,) you may want to generate an instrument.
Details of Charges
Specify who should bear charges for the message. Choose one of the following options:

Remitter all Charges

Beneficiary all Charges

Remitter our Charges
Message Details
For a SWIFT message, you have to specify the following.
Cover Required
Check this box to indicate that a Cover has to be sent to the Reimbursement Bank, along with the
payment message to the receiver.
Details of Payment 1 to 4
Specify bank to bank payment details (these can be in the form of instructions or additional
information to any of the parties involved in the transfer).
Sender to Receiver Information 1 to 6
Tag 72 will be used to specify the sender to receiver information. This tag is applicable to MT740
message type.
RTGS Payment
Check this box to indicate the payment mode is RTGS.
RTGS Network
Specify the RTGS Network used for the transaction.
7-16
Transfer Type
Specify the type of transfer. It can be any one of the following:

Bank Transfer

Customer Transfer

Bank Transfer for own A/c

Direct Debit Advice

MCK

None
Banking Priority
Indicate the priority for the payment. Choose any one of the following options:

Highly Urgent Payments

Urgent Payment

Normal Payment
7.2.4.4 Parties Tab-1
To process an availment on an LC, the funds may have to pass through a series of banks, before
it actually reaches the Ultimate Beneficiary. Through the Parties screen you can capture details of
all the parties that are involved in the transfer of funds.
7-17
The details you enter in these screens depend on the type of LC being processed.
An Intermediary Reimbursement Institution is the financial institution between the Sender’s
Correspondent and the Receiver’s Correspondence.
Reimburse Institution 1 to 5
Specify the institution through which reimbursement of the funds should take place.
Intermediary 1 to 5
The Intermediary in a LC refers to the financial institution, between the Receiver and the Account
With Institution through which the funds must pass.
The Intermediary may be a branch or affiliate of the Receiver or the account with Institution or an
altogether different financial institution. This field corresponds to field 56a of S.W.I.F.T. Here you
can enter either the:

ISO Bank Identifier Code of the bank

Name and address of the bank
Receiver’s Correspondent 1 to 5
The Receiver’s Correspondent is the branch of the Receiver or another financial institution, at
which the funds will be made available to the Receiver. This field corresponds to field 54a of
SWIFT. You can enter one of the following:

ISO Bank Identifier Code of the bank

The branch of the Receiver’s Correspondent

Name and address of the Receiver’s Correspondent
Account With Institution 1 to 5
An Account With Institution refers to the financial institution at which the ordering party requests
the Beneficiary to be paid. The ‘Account With Institution’ may be a branch or affiliate of the
Receiver, or of the Intermediary, or of the Beneficiary Institution, or an entirely different financial
institution. This field corresponds to field 57a of SWIFT.
Receiver of Cover
You can enter one of the following:

ISO Bank Identifier Code of the bank

The branch of the Receiver’s Correspondent

Name and address of the Receiver’s Correspondent

Other identification codes (for example, account number)
Receiver
The ID of the receiver in the transaction will be displayed. You can change the same.
7-18
7.2.4.5 Parties Tab-2
Click ‘Parties’ tab to capture party details.
You can capture the following details.
Ordering Institution 1 to 5
The Ordering Institution is the financial Institution that is acting on behalf of itself, or a customer,
to initiate the transaction. This field corresponds to 52a of SWIFT.
In this field, you can enter one of the following:

The ISO Bank Identifier Code of the Ordering Institution

The branch or city of the Ordering Institution

The Name and address of the Bank
7-19
Ordering Customer 1 to 5
The Ordering Customer refers to the customer ordering the transfer. Here you can enter the
name and address or the account number of the Customer, ordering the transaction. This field
corresponds to field 50 of SWIFT. You will be allowed to enter details in this field only if you have
initiated a customer transfer (MT 100 and MT 102).
Beneficiary Institution 1 to 5
In this field you can enter details of the institution in favour of which the payment is made. It is in
reality the bank that services the account of the Ultimate Beneficiary. This field corresponds to
field 58a of SWIFT.
Entries into this field are permitted only for Bank Transfers (when the remitter and beneficiary of
the transfer are financial institutions - MT 100 or MT 202). Here you can enter either of the
following:

The ISO Bank Identifier Code of the Beneficiary Institution

The Name and Address of the Beneficiary Institution
Ultimate Beneficiary 1 to 5
The Ultimate Beneficiary refers to the Customer to whom the availment amount is to be paid. This
field refers to field 59 of SWIFT. Entries into this field are permitted only for a customer transfer
(MT 100 and MT 202). The number of banks involved in the transfer would therefore depend on
the following:

Relationships and arrangements between the sending and receiving banks

Customer instructions

Location of parties

The banking regulations of a country
Beneficiary Institution For Cover 1 to 5
Select the institution in favor of which the payment is made, from the option list. If you click on the
adjoining button, a notepad editor emerges. You can specify further details about the institution
here..
Counterparty Bank
The clearing bank code here gets populated with the value specified in the contract screen.
However you can change it. Select the relevant clearing bank code from the adjoining option list.
Counterparty Account
Specify the counterparty account. All the counterparty accounts pertaining to the selected
Counterparty Bank will appear for selection in the adjoining option list. On selecting the
Counterparty Account, the system will default the Counterparty Name as maintained for that
account.
If at the time of selecting Counterparty Account, Counterparty Bank is Null, then the Counterparty
Bank will also appear by default.
7-20
Counterparty Name
Specify the name of the counterparty.
Agreement Identification
For processing direct debits on transactions you will also need to capture the Agreement ID of the
counterparty in order to facilitate a cross-referencing between the contract payment and the direct
debit instruction when a reversal of payment is carried out due to rejection of the outbound DD.
Specify the Agreement ID in this field. Typically, you will need to specify this only for the Receive
leg. This field is disabled for the Pay leg.
Clearing Network
Specify a clearing network during settlement instruction maintenance for the Pay Leg.
Post Accounting
Check this option to indicate that accounting entries maintained for the product should be posted.
7.2.4.6 Clearing Details Tab
Click ‘Clearing Details’ tab to invoke the following screen.
7-21
Specify the following details.
Bank Operation Code
Select the bank operation code that should be inserted in field 23B of an MT103 message, from
the adjoining drop-down list. The list contains the following codes:

SPRI

SSTD

SPAY

CRED
This specification is defaulted from the settlement instructions maintained for the customer,
currency, product, branch and module combination. However, you can change it.
Transaction Code
The transaction code maintained in the settlement instructions is defaulted here. However, you
can change the code.
Regulatory Report 1 to 3
Select the Regulatory Reporting Details from the drop-down list displaying the following values:

/BENEFRES/

/ORDERRES/
Time Indicator 1 to 3
Time Indication, specifies one or several time indication(s) related to the processing of the
payment instruction. Select the time indication code from the following values available in the
option list:

/CLSTIME/ - Time by which funding payment must be credited, with confirmation, to the
CLS Bank's account at the central bank, expressed in CET.

/RNCTIME/ - Time at which a TARGET payment has been credited at the receiving
central bank, expressed in CET

/SNDTIME/ - Time at which a TARGET payment has been debited at the sending central
bank, expressed in CET
Instruction Code 1 to 5
Select the instruction code that should be inserted in field 23E of an MT103 message involving
the customer of the contract, from the adjoining drop-down list. This list contains the following
codes:

CHQB

TELE

PHON
7-22

PHOI

REPA

INTC

TELI

SDVA

PHOB

TELB

HOLD

CORT

BONL
This specification is defaulted from the settlement instructions maintained for the customer,
currency, product, branch and module combination. However, you can change it.
Description
Specify additional information that should be inserted to qualify the Instruction Code in field 23E
of an MT103 message involving the customer of the contract. For instance, if the Instruction Code
is REPA and the description is "Repayment" then the text ‘REPA/Repayment’ will be inserted in
Field 23E. You can give a description for the following instruction codes only:

PHON

PHOB

PHOI

TELE

TELB

TELI

HOLD

REPA
This specification is defaulted from the settlement instructions maintained for the customer,
currency, product branch and module combination. However, you can change it.
Envelope Contents 1 to 5
Specify details of envelope contents, if required.
7.2.4.7 Local Clearing Tab
Click ‘Local Clearing’ tab to invoke the following screen.
7-23
Specify the following details:
Message Details
Specify the following details.
Ultimate Bank Code
Specify the bank code where the ultimate beneficiary account rests.
Sender Receiver Participant
Specify the sender receiver participant name.
7-24
Additional Identifier
Specify the additional identifier.
Sorbnet Specific Details
Specify the following details.
Payment Code
Specify the Sorbnet payment code.
Additional Information
Specify additional information if required.
ZUS Transaction
Specify the following details.
Nip Payer
Specify the Nip payer.
Payer Identifier
Specify the payer identifier.
Declaration
Give a declaration for the payment.
Supplement Identification
Select the supplement identification from the adjoining drop-down list.
Payment Type
Select the payment type from the drop-down list.
Number of Declaration
Specify the number of declaration.
Sender Receiver Information 1 to 6
Include any message that the sender wishes to pass on to the receiver as part of the funds
transfer.
Free Text 1 to 3
Specify the free text for settlement messages.
7-25
Additional Information 1 to 4
Specify additional information for settlement messages.
Receiver Information
Specify the following details.
Receiver Name
Specify the name of the receiver.
Address 1 to 3
Specify the receiver’s address.
Repair Reason 1 to 4
Specify the repair reason.
7.2.5 Viewing Advice Details
Click ‘Advices’ button and invoke the ‘Advice Details’ screen.
You can view advices generated for the contract during availment.
7-26
7.2.6 Specifying Charge Details
Click ‘Charges’ button and invoke the ‘Charge Detail’ screen.
Refer the Charges and Fees User Manual under Modularity for further details about charge
maintenance.
7-27
7.2.7 Specifying Commission Details
Click ‘Commission’ button and invoke the ‘Commission Details’ screen.
Refer the Commission User Manual under Modularity for further details about commissions
processing.
7.2.8 Specifying Tax Details
Click ‘Tax’ button and invoke the ‘Tax Details’ screen.
7-28
Refer the Tax User Manual under Modularity for further details about tax processing.
7.2.9 Authorizing Availment
An availment that you have entered should be authorized before the EOD is run. You can
authorize the same by clicking the ‘Authorize’ icon on the Application toolbar.
You cannot authorise an availment from the ‘Letters of Credit Availment Input’ screen in the
following cases:

the contract has multilevel of authorization pending, the same will be done using the
‘Multilevel Authorization Detailed’ screen

the level of authorization is greater than or equal to ‘N’

the ‘Nth’ or the final level of the users authorisation limit is less than the difference
between amount financed and sum of the limits of all the users involved in authorizing a
transaction, this case holds good when the ‘Cumulative’ field is checked in the ‘Product
Transaction Limits Maintenance’ screen

the transaction amount is greater than the authoriser’s authorisation limit if the
‘Cumulative’ field is unchecked in the ‘Product Transaction Limits Maintenance’ screen
7-29
7.3
Viewing LC Availed
You can view the LC availed using ‘Letters of Credit Contract Summary’ screen. To invoke this
screen, type ‘LCSAVMNT’ in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and click
the adjoining arrow button.
You can click ‘Search’ button to view all the pending functions. However, you can to filter your
search based on any of the following criteria:
Authorized
Select the authorization status of the contract from the drop-down list.
Contract Reference
Select the contract reference number from the option list.
Product Code
Select the product code from the option list.
Branch
Select the branch code for which you want to check the contract from the option list.
7-30
Contract Status
Select the status of the contract for which you want to check the pending function from the dropdown list.
User Reference
Select the user reference number from the option list..
Customer Identification
Select the customer identification number from the option list..
When you click ‘Search’ button the records matching the specified search criteria are displayed.
For each record fetched by the system based on your query criteria, the following details are
displayed:

Authorized

Contract Status

Contract Reference

Product Code

Currency

Contract Amount

User Reference

Source Reference

Date

Party Type

Issue Date

Expiry Date

Branch
Click ‘Advanced Search’ to display the screen below:
7-31
You can query a contract based on any of the following details:

Currency

Contract Amount

Issue Date

Effective Date

Expiry Date

Closure Date

Customer Type

Customer Reference

Customer Reference Date

Max Amount

Liability Amount

Amount

Outstanding Amount

Settlement Method

Latest Shipment Date
7-32

External Reference Number

Branch
8.
8.1
Amending Details of LC
Introduction
An amendment to an LC signifies any change made to the terms of an LC after it has been
authorised. An amendment can be made at anytime after an LC has been authorised and before
its expiry date.
The following are some examples when you would amend the details of an LC:
8.2

You as the issuing bank have got an application from your customer to change the terms
of the LC.

You as the advising bank have received instructions from the issuing bank to amend an
LC advised by you.
Procedure for Amending LC
While in the detailed view of the LC, click unlock icon on the toolbar. All the details entered for the
LC will be displayed. You can amend the details of the contract depending on whether:

The LC has been authorized

The LC has not been authorised even once after it was input
Depending on the authorisation status of an LC contract, you can amend its details as follows:

When you have captured the details of a contract and it is not yet authorized, its
attributes, financial as well as non-financial, can be changed, even if the details have
been saved. If accounting entries are involved in the change, the old entries are deleted
and new ones passed.

Once a contract has been authorised, additional entries will be passed, depending on the
nature of amendment.
For each amendment, a new version of the LC will be generated. Different versions of the LC will
also be generated by events like reinstatement and reopening. In the ‘Contract Detailed View’
screen, you can view the different versions by clicking the arrow buttons for the previous and the
next versions.
When a customer requests for changes in the terms of the contract, the details of the LC are
amended accordingly and an amendment instrument is generated. The amendment of the
following details of an LC, result in the generation of an amendment instrument:

An amendment in the LC amount

An amendment in the expiry date
8-33

A change in the latest shipment date

Any change to the free format instructions for the LC
If there are changes in the terms of the LC other than IN the amount, the expiry date or latest
shipment date, indicate the same in the form of a free format instruction, for the amendment
instrument.
If you modify the shipment date, the system will recalculate the shipment days on
confirmation of the amendment.
In case of amendment, you have the option to reissue the Guarantee. If you choose to do so, the
REIS (Reissue of Guarantee) event will be triggered. The system checks for any previous
amendment. In case no amendment has been performed, the system will pop up the following
screen:
Click on OK to reissue the Guarantee or click on Cancel to process the amendment of
Guarantee.
The system checks if REIS event is maintained for the product. If the event is maintained, the
system does not allow any further change in the LC contract details apart from FFT fields, which
can be modified/added but you cannot delete the existing data.
The system creates a new version for the Reissue event and the event inherits all the contract
information defined for the authorized BISS event. The version also inherits the information from
the subsystem excluding Charges and Commission. No commission is associated with the
Reissue event and charges can be maintained for the REIS event, which is processed along with
the reissue event.
When the Reissue event is authorized, the advices maintained in the REIS event are processed.
8-2
8.2.1 Indicating Change of Value for a Field
When the LC amount is being changed, the new amount of the LC should be indicated after the
amendment.
Example
The original LC amount was USD 100,000 and you want to make it USD 150,000. In the LC amount field,
during amendment, enter the amount as USD 150,000. The system will calculate the increase in amount
and pass the appropriate entries. The LC amendment instrument will have both the old and new values.
The original LC amount was USD 100,000 and you want to change it to USD 75,000. In the LC amount field,
during amendment, enter the amount as USD 75,000. The system will calculate the decrease in amount and
pass the appropriate entries. The LC amendment instrument will have both the old and new values.
When you are changing the expiry date or the latest shipment date, you should enter the new date in their
respective fields.
8.2.2 Commission and Charges for Amendment
While amending the details of an LC, you can specify the commissions and charges that you
want to levy for processing the amendment. These will be effective from the date of amendment.
It will not affect the booking commission in any way.
Refer to the Commissions User Manual for details on how commission is calculated, for an
amendment.
8.2.3 Amendment of an Unauthorized LC
The amendment of an unauthorised LC is considered as a modification. When an LC that you
have entered is not yet authorized, you can change all its details except the details in the header
(contract reference number, the product and type of operation). To change any detail on an LC
that has been stored and not authorised, delete the LC and input a new one.
After amending the details of the unauthorised LC, save the contract with the new information. On
saving the amendment, all the accounting entries that were passed during the input of the
contract and the earlier accounting entries specified for the LC, will be deleted. A fresh set of
accounting entries will be passed for the amended LC contract.
As the advices to be generated for an LC, are generated only at the time of authorisation, no
action needs to be taken regarding messages.
For an unauthorized LC Contract which has never been authorized, it is recommended to
amend the following fields from the ‘Amendment Confirmation’ screen. However, for an
unauthorized LC contract you can amend the following fields by clicking the ‘P’ button located
next to the ‘Product Code’ field in the ‘Letters of Credit Amendment Confirmation Input’ screen.
The system will not allow you to amend the following fields in the ‘LC Contract’ screen:

Their Reference Number for Party Types ABK, BEN, COB and ISB (in the ‘Parties’ tab)
8-3

Issue Date (in the ‘Main’ tab)

Expiry Date (in the ‘Main’ tab)

LC Amount (in the ‘Main’ tab)
You can edit this field for an unauthorised LC Contract which has never been authorised
by clicking ‘P’ button located next to the ‘Product Code’ field in the ‘Letters of Credit
Amendment Confirmation Input’ screen.

Positive and Negative Tolerance (in the ‘Main’ tab)

Additional Amount Covered message (in the ‘Others’ tab)

Shipment From (in the ‘Ship/Docs’ tab)

Shipment To (in the ‘Ship/Docs’ tab)

Port of Loading (in the ‘Ship/Docs’ tab)

Port of Discharge (in the ‘Ship/Docs’ tab)

Latest date of shipment (in the ‘Ship/Docs’ tab)

Shipment period (in the ‘Ship/Docs’ tab)

Sender to receiver information (in the ‘Parties’ tab)
However, you can amend the above fields in the ‘Amendment Confirmation’ screen. This screen
is explained in the following section.
For an unauthorized LC Contract which has never been authorized, it is recommended to
amend the above fields from the ‘Amendment Confirmation’ screen. However, for an
unauthorized LC contract you can amend the above fields by clicking the ‘P’ button located next
to the ‘Product Code’ field in the ‘Letters of Credit Amendment Confirmation Input’ screen.
The ‘Amendment Confirmation’ screen is explained in the following section.
8.2.4 Amending Import Pre-advice LC Contract
Oracle FLEXCUBE facilitates amendment of Import Pre-Advice LC. You can amend an import
pre-advice in two ways.
1. If the applicant approaches Issuing Bank for changes in values for a Pre-advice LC, which
was created early.
The system enables you to modify both financial and non-financial values of the Preadvice LC, including the fields enabled for Operative Import LC.
2. If the applicant approaches Issuing Bank with Document credit details and wishes to change
pre-advice LC to an operative LC. The issuing bank amends the existing Pre-advice LC as an
operative LC.
8-4
The additional details which were not entered while booking a Pre-advice LC have to be
specified. You can modify LC Amount, Expiry Date, Credit Line and Collateral Amount.
When LC amount is modified, the system will track additional limit and reduction of limit
based on the increase or decrease of the amount, respectively.
You can amend a pre-advice LC contract using ‘Letters of Credit Contract Details’ screen.
8.3
Confirming LC Amendment
The option to amend these fields is also available in the ‘Letters of Credit Amendment
Confirmation Input’ screen. However, the amendments will become effective only upon receiving
the confirmation from the beneficiary.
You can invoke this screen by typing ‘LCDAMEND’ in the field at the top right corner of the
Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button. The screen will be displayed
without any details, as shown below:
You can specify the following details:
Contract Ref No
Select the reference number of the contract to be amended from the option list provided. This
option list will display all contracts that are authorized.
8-5
Once you have specified the contract reference number, click ‘P’ button. The system displays the
details of the contract under three tabs viz. Details, Parties and Advices.
8.3.1 Details Tab
Under ‘Details’ tab, you can view and modify the details pertaining to shipment and tolerance of
the letter of credit.
Click ‘Details’ tab on ‘Letters of Credit Amendment Confirmation Input’ screen.
Upon selection of the contract, the following details will be displayed in editable mode:

Version Number

Contract Amount - The amount that is availed under the LC

Currency – The contract currency

Issue Date - The date on which the LC is issued. You cannot specify a future date here

Expiry Date - The date on which the LC is scheduled to expire

Closure Date – This the date LC is scheduled to be closed. You can modify this particular
value.
8-6

Increase Decrease of LC Amount - A display field which indicates the amount of LC
increased or decreased, as the case may be

Additional Amounts Covered - This indicates the value to be carried in field 39C of the
SWIFT messages MT700 and MT740

Latest Shipment Date - The last date by which the shipment of the goods has to take
place. This date should not be earlier than the Issue Date of the LC or later than the
expiry date. If you modify the latest shipment date, the system will recalculate the
shipment days on confirmation of the amendment.

Shipment Period - The extension of the shipping period. You can enter the Shipment
Period only if you have not specified the Latest Shipment Date

Port of Loading – The port from where the goods transacted under the LC will be loaded

Port of Discharge – The destination port to which the goods transacted under LC should
be sent

From Place - The place from where goods are to be dispatched or transported

To Place - The final destination to which goods are to be transported/delivered

Positive Tolerance % - The percentage that is to be added to the LC amount to arrive at
the Maximum LC amount

Negative Tolerance % - The percentage that should be subtracted from the LC amount

Party details in the ‘Parties’ tab of the screen – You can amend ‘Their Reference
Number’ and the ‘Dated’ fields values only.

Free Format Text details in the ‘FFT’ tab of the screen
Make the necessary amendments. Save the changes. To save, click save icon in the toolbar of
the screen.
The system will update the following details in the audit trail of the screen:

Input By – Your login id

Date Stamp – The date and time at which you saved the contract

Amendment Status – The status will always be ‘Unconfirmed’

Auth Status – The status will always be ‘Unauthorized’
For details on the amendable fields, refer the chapter ‘Processing an LC contract’ in this User
Manual.
8-7
8.3.2 Parties Tab
Click the ‘Parties’ tab to view and specify the following details:
Confirm Parties
Party Type
The system defaults the party type. The user can edit the party type using the adjoining option list
that displays all the party types available for the LC..
Customer
The system defaults the customer number. However, you can modify it.
8-8
Customer Name
The system defaults the customer name. However, you can modify it.
Country
The system defaults the country of the customer. However, you can modify it.
Party Description
The system defaults the party description. However, you can modify it.
Dated
The system defaults the date on which the party joined. However, you can modify it.
Customer Reference
The system defaults the customer reference number. However, you can modify it.
Address 1 to 4
The system defaults the address of the party.
Language
The system defaults the language in which advices are sent to the customer.
Issuer Bank
The system defaults the name of the issuer bank.
Other Addresses
Media Type
The system defaults the media type. You can select a different medium from the adjoining option
list.
Address
The system defaults the other address of the party. However, you can edit this field.
Account
The system defaults the account number. However, you can edit this field.
8-9
8.3.3 Advices Tab
Click the ‘Advices’ tab to view and specify the following details:
Advices Details
Message type
Check the box to view the advice details.
Party type
The system displays the party type for which the advice is generated.
8-10
Party Id
The system displays the party id for which the advice is generated.
Party Name
The system displays the name of the party for which the advice is generated.
Medium
The system displays the medium through which the advice is sent. The user can select a different
medium from the list. If the medium is modified, the user must provide the new address in the
‘Other Addresses’ section, in the ‘Parties’ tab.
Priority
The system displays the priority of sending the advice. However, you can change the priority.
Suppress
The system displays if the advice is suppressed or not. However, you can edit this field.
Charges
The system displays the charges involved. However, you can edit the charges.
FFT Details
The user can select a message from the ‘Advices Details’ section and associate a code and a
description to it.
Code
The user can select the appropriate code from the adjoining option list.
Description
The system displays the description of the selected code. However, you can modify this
description.
Advices for a party are sent to the default media maintained in the Customer Addresses table.
However, you can send the advices through a different medium by doing the following:

Maintaining media details in ‘Other Address’ in Parties screen

Indicating the medium in the Advices screen

Suppressing the Advices which is ‘N’ by default.
8-11
8.3.4 Specifying Collateral Details
You can invoke the ‘Collateral Details’ screen by clicking the ‘Collateral’ button in the ‘Letters of
Credit Amendment Confirmation Input’ screen. In the screen, you can specify details of the cash
that you collect as collateral form a customer for the LC that you process.
Specify the following details here. You will be allowed to amend the percentage, collateral
amount, and adjustment type.
Contract Reference Number
The contract reference number is displayed here.
Latest Event Sequence Number
The system displays the event sequence number.
Collateral
Currency
The currency is displayed here.
Percent
The percentage is displayed here. However, you can modify it. An override message will be
displayed when you modify the percentage.
Exchange Rate
The exchange rate is displayed here.
8-12
Collateral Amount
The collateral amount is displayed here. However, you can modify it. An override message will be
displayed when you modify the collateral amount.
Description
The amount description is displayed here.
Adjustment
Type
Choose ‘increase’ if you want to increase the percentage of the collateral amount or ‘decrease’ to
decrease the percentage of the collateral amount.
Amount
The new amended amount after calculation is displayed here.
Note the following:
The system prompts override messages:

If the LC expiry date is later than any linked collateral’s expiry date.

If the LC expiry date extended as part of amendment is later than any limit line’s expiry
date.
The system will validate when a new limit line is attached during actions other than New.
8.3.5 Authorizing Amendment Details
On saving the amendment details after entering all the required details in the system, the system
validates the value of the contract amount against the following

Product transaction limit

User Input limit
If the transaction currency and the limit currency are different, then the system converts the
amount financed to limit currency and checks if the same is in excess of the product transaction
limit and user input limit. If this holds true, the system indicates the same with below
override/error messages:

Number of levels required for authorizing the transaction

Transaction amount is in excess of the input limit of the user
You have to get a contract authorised by your supervisor. Follow the steps given below to
authorize:
8-13
3. Click authorise icon in the toolbar. The following screen will be displayed:
4. Click ‘OK’ button to proceed. The system will seek a confirmation for generating the
messages. Click ‘OK’ to proceed.
5. Click ‘Cancel’ button to return to the ‘Amendment Confirmation’ screen. The system will
display a message to confirm successful authorization of the record. The audit trail of the
screen will now display the following details:

Checker ID – Login id of the authorizer

Checker Dt Stamp - The date and time at which you authorized the contract

Auth Status – The status will updated to ‘Authorized’
The accounting entries for the amendment will be posted only after the authorization of the
contract.
You cannot authorise a contract in the following cases:

the contract has multilevel of authorization pending, the same will be done using the
‘Multilevel Authorization Detailed’ screen

the level of authorization is greater than or equal to ‘N’
8-14

the ‘Nth’ or the final level of the users authorisation limit is less than the difference
between amount financed and sum of the limits of all the users involved in authorizing a
transaction, this case holds good when the ‘Cumulative’ field is checked in the ‘Product
Transaction Limits Maintenance’ screen

the transaction amount is greater than the authoriser’s authorisation limit if the
‘Cumulative’ field is unchecked in the ‘Product Transaction Limits Maintenance’ screen
8.3.6 Confirming Amended Details
Once authorized, you will not be allowed to modify these details. The system will provide option
for confirming or rejecting the amendment details. To confirm the details, do the following:
1. Click confirm icon in the toolbar. The system will launch the below screen:
2. Click ‘OK’ in the message window to proceed. The system will display the following message
to confirm the confirmation:
The Record is successfully confirmed.
3. Click ‘OK’ in the message window and this takes you the LC contract online screen. The
charges can be waived using this screen. Note that the ‘Amnd Status’ is updated to
‘Confirmed’ and the ‘Auth Status’ is updated to ‘Unauthorized’ (in the audit trail of the screen).
8.3.7 Amending details using the Contract screen
You can unlock the LC contract screen after clicking ‘OK’ in the message window above. The LC
contract online screen is used for modifying details after confirmation of the amendment action.
The system creates an amendment on the LC once the proposed amendment is confirmed.
When this amendment is created the confirmation and amendment events are both left in an
unauthorized state. This allows unlocking of the LC contract to make the necessary amendments.
8-15
Once the confirmation is saved on the amendment screen, the LC contract online screen is
launched with the data modified, and this can be unlocked and modified, or closed as chosen by
the user. These changes are directly made by launching the LC contract screen. However the
amendment can only be deleted by using the amendment screen as described above.
The following LC contract screen is launched when the amendment is confirmed in the LC
amendment confirmation input screen.
The amendment cannot be deleted using the LC contract screen, and can only be deleted using
the amendment screen as part of the confirmation. This is done by deleting the confirmation using
the amendment screen.
Hence the process is carried out as follows:
4. The amendment is confirmed using the LC Credit Amendment confirmation screen. It is
completed by clicking ’C’ and saving the confirmation.
6. The LC contract screen is launched once the confirmation is saved. This screen contains the
details of the amendments done in the confirmation input screen.
8-16
7. This screen is unlocked and the details are made available for modification. Subsystem
details like charges and commission can be modified or waived as required.
During an auto authorization of Amendment Confirmation, the amendment created by this
confirmation is also authorized.
When the LC Amount is amended from ‘LC Amendment’ screen, the values mentioned in
‘Confirmation Percent’ at the contract level are considered for confirming the amended amount.
However, you can amend the Confirmation Percent/Confirmation Amount at the contract level.
8.3.7.1 Accounting Entries for amending LC amount
On increasing the LC Amount as part of amendment):
Dr/
Cr
Account role code
Amount tag
LCY Amount Description
Dr
LC_OCU_OFFSET
(Unutilized Credit Offset)
CNF_LIAB_INCR_AMT
Delta Confirmation Amount
Cr
LC_OCU (Outstanding Credit
Unutilized)
CNF_LIAB_INCR_AMT
Delta Confirmation Amount
Dr
LC_CNF (Confirmation of LC)
CNF_LIAB_INCR_AMT
Delta Confirmation Amount
Cr
LC_CNF_OFF (Confirmation
of LC Offset)
CNF_LIAB_INCR_AMT
Delta Confirmation Amount
On decreasing the LC Amount as part of Amendment:
Dr/
Cr
Account role code
Amount tag
LCY Amount Description
Dr
LC_CNF_OFF (Confirmation
of LC Offset)
CNF_LIAB_DECR_AMT
Decreased Amount
Cr
LC_CNF (Confirmation of LC
Offset)
CNF_LIAB_DECR_AMT
Decreased Amount
Dr
LC_OCU (Outstanding Credit
Unutilized)
CNF_LIAB_DECR_AMT
Decreased Amount
Cr
LC_OCU_OFF (Outstanding
Credit Unutilized Offset)
CNF_LIAB_DECR_AMT
Decreased Amount
8-17
8.3.7.2 Authorizing Confirmation
Your supervisor now needs authorize the confirmation to view the changes made. The steps to
authorize are given below:
8. After logging in, invoke the ‘Amendment Confirmation’ screen and navigate to the record that
needs to be authorized.
9. Click authorise icon in the toolbar of the screen. The system will create a new version of the
contract and display the details of the contract in the ‘LC Contract’ screen, as shown below.
10. After confirming the changes, click save icon in the toolbar of the screen to save the details.
You can delete the amendment if the ‘Amnd Status’ of the contract is ‘Confirmed’ but
unauthorized.
8.3.8 Rejecting Amended Details
To reject the amendment details, do the following:
1. Click the close icon in the toolbar of the screen. The system will display the following
message to confirm the rejection:
2. Are you sure you want to reject the current record?
3. Click ‘OK’ in the message window to return to the ‘Amendment Confirmation’ screen. The
system will display a message to confirm successful rejection of the record.
4. The ‘Amnd Status’ will be updated to ‘Rejected’.
8.3.8.1 Authorizing Rejection
Your supervisor now needs authorize the rejection. The steps to authorize are given below:
1. After logging in, invoke the ‘Amendment Confirmation’ screen and navigate to the record that
needs to be authorized.
2. Click authorize icon in the toolbar. The system will display the following screen.
8-18
3. Click ‘OK’ icon to proceed. You will return to the ‘Amendment Confirmation’ screen and the
system will display a message to confirm successful authorization of the record.
4. The ‘Amnd Status’ of the record will be ‘Rejected’ while the ‘Auth Status’ will be updated to
‘Authorized’.
Note the following:

If a contract is amended and confirmed, you can amend it again by creating a new
amendment record in ‘Amendment Confirmation’ screen for already amended LC
contracts.

The system will not allow you to perform any operations on an LC pending confirmation
or rejection.

The amended details will take effect only after confirmation from the beneficiary.

If the amendment is rejected, the system will retain the original or the last amended
confirmed LC.
You can amend the same contract several times in ‘Amendment Confirmation’ screen as long as
the amendment is not authorized.
8-19
8.4
Viewing LC Amendment
You can view the LC amendment using ‘Letters of Credit Contract Summary’ screen. To invoke
this screen, type ‘LCSAMEND’ in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and
click the adjoining arrow button.
You can click ‘Search’ button to view all the pending functions. However, you can to filter your
search based on any of the following criteria:
Authorization Status
Select the authorization status of the amendment from the drop-down list.
Contract Reference Number
Select the contract reference number from the option list.
Branch Code
Select the branch code for which you want to check the amendment from the option list.
8-20
Contract Status
Select the status of the amendment for which you want to check the pending function from the
drop-down list.
Product Code
Select the product code from the option list.
When you click ‘Search’ button the records matching the specified search criteria are displayed.
For each record fetched by the system based on your query criteria, the following details are
displayed:

Customer

Contract Currency

Contract Amount

Issue Date

Effective Date

Expiry Date

Closure Date

Customer Type

Customer Reference Number

Customer Reference Date

Maximum Contract Amount

Maximum Liability Amount

Current Availability

Outstanding Liability

Latest Shipment Date

External Reference Number

Branch Code
8-21
Click ‘Advanced Search’ to display the screen below:
You can query a contract based on any of the following details:

Customer

Contract Currency

Contract Amount

Issue Date

Effective Date

Expiry Date

Closure Date

Customer Type

Customer Reference Number

Customer Reference Date

Maximum Contract Amount
8-22
8.5

Maximum Liability Amount

Current Availability

Outstanding Liability

Latest Shipment Date

External Reference Number

Branch Code
Operations on Confirmation Record
In addition to the operations discussed above (Save, Authorize, Confirm), you can perform the
following operations in the ‘Amendment Confirmation’ screen:
8.6

New

Delete

Close

Unlock
Uploading LC Amendment
While uploading an amendment, the system checks the user reference number in the contract
with the external reference number of the incoming message. If a contract exists with the
reference number and its status is ‘Authorized’ and ‘Active’, then the system will amend it
provided the upload action is ‘AMND’.
If upload action is ‘NEW’ and the external reference number exists, the system will display an
error message. In case of contract amendment through STP of MT707, the following fields are
updated:

Expiry date (31E field)

LC amount (34B field)

Tolerance details(Negative and positive tolerance) (39A field)

Additional amounts covered (39C field)

Shipment from (44A field)

Shipment to (44B field)

Latest date of shipment (44C field)

Shipment period(44D field)

Issuing bank amendment date(30 field)
Once an amendment is uploaded, the event ‘AMND’ will be triggered on the LC contract in the
system.
8-23
8-24
9.
9.1
Transferring LC
Specifying LC Transfer Details
In Oracle FLEXCUBE, you can make transfers from an LC. A transferable LC is one where at the
request of the beneficiary (‘first beneficiary’) the LC is made available in whole or in part to
another beneficiary (‘second beneficiary’). This is usually done where the first beneficiary is not
the actual manufacturer of the goods and is sourcing it from others.
For an LC to be transferable, the LC must specifically state it to be transferable.
A transferred LC cannot be transferred at the request of a second beneficiary to any subsequent
beneficiary. The first beneficiary is not considered to be a subsequent beneficiary i.e. an
unutilized transferred LC can be transferred back to the first beneficiary only. This is new to UCP
600 and FCC has taken this into consideration.
You can invoke the ‘Letters of Credit Transfer Input’ screen by typing ‘LCDTRANF’ in the field at
the top right corner of the Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
9-1
While transferring funds from an LC, you need to note the following conditions:

The transferred LC will always be of the same type as the old LC and will be created
under the same product

The charges applicable to the transfer should be associated with the event TRNF defined
for the product

You can only transfer an amount that is less than or equal to the amount available under
the original LC

An Import LC can be transferred only if the Applicant and Beneficiary are customers of
your bank
Specify the following details in the ‘Letters of Credit Transfer Input’ screen.
From Ref No
Indicate the LC from which you want to effect the transfer. Click the adjoining option list and
select a valid LC Reference. The manner in which Oracle FLEXCUBE handles a transfer is
different for import and export LCs.
Refer to the title ‘A note on transfers made from Import and Export LCs’ for more details.
Transfer Amount
The transfer amount is the amount that should be transferred from the original LC. You can only
transfer an amount that is less than or equal to the amount available under the original LC.
On saving the transaction after entering all the required details in the system, the system
validates the value of the transfer amount against the following:
 Product transaction limit
 User Input limit
If the transaction currency and the limit currency are different, then the system converts the
amount financed to limit currency and checks if the same is in excess of the product transaction
limit and user input limit. If this holds true, the system indicates the same with below
override/error messages:
 Number of levels required for authorizing the transaction
 Transaction amount is in excess of the input limit of the user
Expiry Date
The expiry date is the date up to which the transferred LC is valid. The expiry date of the original
LC is defaulted. You can change the defaulted date. However, the expiry date cannot be earlier
than the LC issue date or today's date.
In the case of an export LC, the expiry date can be earlier than today's date to cater to the
late receipt of the LC. However in this case you will be prompted for an override.
9-2
Goods Shipment Date
The shipment date is the latest date by which the shipment of the goods specified for the
transferred LC should take place. The latest shipment date of the original LC is defaulted. You
can change the defaulted date. However, the date you enter should not be earlier than the Issue
Date of the LC and later than the expiry date. If the latest shipping date that you specify for an LC
falls on a holiday in the LC currency, you will be prompted for an override.
It is mandatory for you to enter the Shipment date if you are processing an Import LC.
Period For Presentation
The period of presentation defined for the product - or calculated for the LC, as the case may be will be displayed. You can change the default to suit the LC you are processing.
To Ref No
Specify the reference number to which the LC should be transferred.
To User Ref No
Specify the user reference number to which the LC should be transferred.
Transfer Date
Specify the date of transfer.
LC Available Amount
The amount available on the chosen LC is displayed here.
9.1.1 Parties Tab
The ‘Parties’ tab can be used to record details related to the parties involved in the transfer. The
documents, tracers and messages that are generated will be sent to all the parties concerned,
based on the details you specify in this screen.
9-3
The Party Types that can be involved in the transfer of an LC are the advising Bank and the
Beneficiary. You need to indicate the following details for a party type:

The CIF ID assigned to the party, if the party is defined as a customer in Oracle
FLEXCUBE

The name of the party (It can be 150 characters in length. However, note that only 35
characters will be included in the SWIFT messages that you generate for the transfer)

The country to which the party belongs

The mailing address of the party
Note the following:

Change of parties is not allowed for the old LC contract, however, it is allowed for the
new transferred LC Contract.

The system validates for the ADB membership of the selected Bank. If the Bank is not a
member of ADB and the BIC code for the Bank is maintained as ‘ADB Member’ at BIC
Maintenance level, then the system displays the following override message:
Advising or Issuing Bank is not a member of ADB TFFP
9-4
9.1.2 Documents Tab
Click ‘Documents’ tab and specify details of documents and clauses that should accompany the
goods.
There are some standard documents required under a documentary LC. In this screen you can
specify the documents that are required under the LC being processed. These details will be a
part of the LC instrument sent to the advising bank, the advice through bank or the beneficiary.
9-5
Documents Details
All the documents specified for the product to which the LC is linked will be defaulted to this
screen. The details specified for these documents such as the document type, description, the
number of copies required, the number of copies issued, the clauses specified for the document
are also defaulted from the product. You can edit the description of the document that is defaulted
to suit the LC you are processing.
You can add to or delete from the list of documents that are defaulted. To add a document for the
LC, click add icon. Type in or select the code of the appropriate document from the list of
document codes maintained in the ‘Documents Maintenance’ screen. The other details of the
document will be defaulted to this screen.
To delete a document that is not required for the LC, highlight the document code and click on the
delete icon.
Clauses Details
The Clauses associated with the documents that you specified for the transfer are defaulted.
When you highlight a document code, all the clauses defined for the document are displayed in
the Clauses window. You can add to or delete from the list of clauses that are defaulted.
To add a clause to a document for the LC, click add icon. Specify a valid clause code or select
the code of the applicable clause from the list of clause codes maintained, in the Clause
Maintenance screen. The description of the clause will be defaulted, based on the clause code
that you select.
To delete a clause that is not required for the LC, highlight the Clause code and click delete icon.
9.1.3 Shipment Tab
Click ‘Shipment’ tab and specify details of documents shipment of the merchandise traded under
an LC.
9-6
9.1.3.1 Specifying Shipping Details for an LC
There are certain standard clauses and conditions, associated with the shipment of the
merchandise traded under an LC.

The location from which the goods transacted under the LC should be shipped. In
international trading parlance, this is called the Loading on board/Dispatch/Taking in
charge at/from

The destination to which the goods transacted under the LC should be sent In
international trading parlance, this is called the For transportation to

The latest date of shipment

Besides these details, you can also specify shipping preferences like:

Should Trans-shipment be allowed under the LC

Should partial shipment of the goods be allowed under the LC

Shipping marks

Additional shipment details
9-7
Specifying Goods Details
The details of the merchandise that will be traded under the LC should be clearly specified. You
have maintained various codes that have been allotted, for commodities normally traded in your
country. Pick up the applicable code for the LC you are processing. The description of this code
(which could be 6500 characters long), can be changed to suit the LC you are processing. You
can also enter specifications such as the quality and quantity of the merchandise.
Description for a Pre-advice
If pre-advice is one of the advices for the transfer, you should enter the details of the LC briefly,
as a pre-advice description. This will be a part of the pre-advice that is generated.
Typically, a pre-advice is sent by SWIFT or cable and contains brief details of the LC. This is
followed by the LC instrument will contain all the details of the LC.
Specifying the Port of Loading and Discharge
You can specify the name of the airport from where the goods transacted under the LC are
loaded for shipping. This is called the Port of Loading.
You can also specify the name of the destination port to which the goods transacted under LC
should be sent. This is called the Port of Discharge.
You can amend the value of ‘Port of Loading’ and ‘Port of Discharge’ after authorization.
9-8
9.1.4 Parties Limit Tab
You can track the limits of multiple credit lines while transferring an LC contract. Click ‘Parties
Limit’ tab on ‘Letters of Credit Transfer Input’ screen.
Specify the following details:
Party Type
Specify the type of the party whose credit limits need to be tracked.
If you click ‘Default’ button, in the first row, the system defaults the party type based on the details
maintained under ‘Parties’ tab of the screen. However, you need to make sure that the mandatory
party details have been maintained under ‘Parties’ tab of the screen.
When you add another row to the list, you can manually select the party type as required. If you
leave it blank, the system will automatically update the party type when you save the transfer
details.
9-9
Customer No
Specify the customer number of the party whose credit limits need to be tracked. The option list
displays the customer numbers of all the parties selected under ‘Parties’ tab. Choose the
appropriate one.
You need to make sure that the customer number corresponds to the party type selected above.
If the customer number and party type do not match, the system displays an error.
JV Parent
When you click ‘Default’ button, the system defaults the joint venture customer number of the
party. This customer number is defaulted based on the details maintained in ‘Joint Venture’ subscreen of ‘Customer Maintenance’ screen.
Liability Number
When you click ‘Default’ button, the system defaults the liability number from ‘Joint Venture’ subscreen of ’Customer Maintenance’ screen.
Linkage Type
Specify the linkage type. The drop-down list displays the following options:

Facility (Credit Line)

Collateral Pool
Choose the appropriate one.
Linkage Reference No
Specify the reference number that identifies the facility or collateral pool. The option list displays
all valid facilities and collateral pools specific to the liability. Choose the appropriate one.
In case you choose the same linkage reference for more than one record in the list, the system
displays an override message. You may choose to cancel or proceed with the selection.
% Contribution
Specify the proportion of limits to be tracked for the credit line or collateral pool for the joint
venture customer. When you click ‘Default’ button, the system defaults the percentage of
contribution maintained under ‘Joint Venture’ sub-screen of ‘Customer Maintenance’ screen.
It is mandatory to indicate the percentage of contribution if the party is a customer under joint
venture. This is not applicable to customers who are not a part of joint venture.
For one joint venture, the total percentage of contribution in all applicable credit lines together
cannot be more than 100%.
9-10
Amount Tag
Specify the amount tag. The system tracks the limits for non joint venture customers based on the
amount tag. The amount tags applicable to export and import LC contracts are listed below:
Amount tags applicable to Export LC:

Liability Amount

Confirmed Amount

Unconfirmed Amount
Amount tags applicable to Import LC:

Liability Amount

Undertaking Amount

Non Undertaking Amount
Choose the appropriate one based on the type of LC contract. If you do not specify the amount
tag, the system will track the limits based on the liability amount and facility.
The system verifies the amount tag against the product type. If you choose an amount tag, which
is not supported by the product type, the system displays an error message.
Amount
When you click ‘Default’ button, the system defaults the amount tracked for each credit line. In
case of joint venture customers, the amount is derived on the basis of the percentage of liability
amount. In case of other customers, the amount is derived based on the amount tag specified
above.
You can add more rows to the list of credit lines using add button. Similarly, you can remove a
selected row from the list using delete button.
9.1.5 Note on Transfers made from Import and Export LCs
How Transfers from Import LCs are Processed
While transferring an import LC, the original LC is modified to include the additional details of the
transferred LC. For instance, the new beneficiary and new advising are added to the existing list
of parties.
In Oracle FLEXCUBE, the transfer made from an LC will be taken as a new event ‘TRNF’.
Availment made by the new beneficiary against the transferred LC will be tracked against the
original LC.
How Transfers from Export LCs are Processed
In the case of an Export LC, a new LC will be opened for each transfer that you make from the
original LC. The transfer amount will be taken as the new LC amount.
9-11
On authorizing the transfer,

an availment to the tune of the transferred amount is made against the original LC i.e. the
outstanding amount of the Original LC will be reduced by the transfer amount

a new LC is created based on the transfer details that you specified
The transferred LC will be separated from the original LC. Availment made from the new LC will
not affect the outstanding of the Original LC.
9.1.6 Authorizing LC Transfer
An LC transfer that you have entered should be authorized before the EOD is run. You can
authorize the same by clicking the ‘Authorize’ icon on the Application toolbar.
You cannot authorize a LC transfer from the ‘Letters of Credit Transfer Input’ screen in the
following cases:

the contract has multilevel of authorization pending, the same will be done using the
‘Multilevel Authorization Detailed’ screen

the level of authorization is greater than or equal to ‘N’

the ‘Nth’ or the final level of the users authorisation limit is less than the difference
between amount financed and sum of the limits of all the users involved in authorizing a
transaction, this case holds good when the ‘Cumulative’ field is checked in the ‘Product
Transaction Limits Maintenance’ screen

the transaction amount is greater than the authoriser’s authorisation limit if the
‘Cumulative’ field is unchecked in the ‘Product Transaction Limits Maintenance’ screen
9.1.7 Viewing Details of Transfers made to the LC
Click ‘Transfer Details’ button from the LC Contract screen to view details of the transfers that
were made from the LC.
9-12
The following transfer details are displayed:

The LC from which you are transferring funds

The transfer amount

The transfer date

The expiry date

The shipment date
Click ‘Exit’ button to exit the screen. You will return to the ‘LC Contract’ screen.
Although you can initiate the transfer of an LC to more than one secondary beneficiary on
behalf of the primary/original beneficiary, a secondary beneficiary can only transfer it back to the
original beneficiary. The system will display an error message if a secondary beneficiary initiates
a transfer with ‘Party ID’ different from that of the original beneficiary.
9-13
10. Liquidation of Components of LC
10.1 Introduction
Whenever you have to collect a component (typically for a commission or charge, or under
certain circumstances the availment amount or the collateral amount), you debit it from the
customer’s account. On some occasions, you may have to debit it from an internal receivable GL,
to be debited from the customer account at a later date.
The debiting of the receivable account happens at the event for which the commission or charge
has to be collected (issue of an LC, amendment of an LC, availment against an LC, etc.). When
the customer account has to be debited at a later date, you have to perform, what is termed as
receivable liquidation. There are two related functions associated with liquidation:

A batch process that reverses the liquidated receivable components, for a contract that is
reversed during the day (the LQ EOTI function)

A batch process that generates the charge and commission claim advice to the party on
behalf of whom a charge or commission was debited, from a receivable account during
the day (the LQ EOD function)
10.2 Maintaining Online Receivable/Payable Details
You can pass manual entries into LQ Module to maintain additional entries into AR/AP LQ
Module in the ‘Receivable/Payable Online’ screen. You can invoke ‘Receivable/Payable Online’
screen by typing ‘LQDTRONL’ in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and
clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
10-1
Liquidate the components of an LC that have been put in a receivable account Reverse the
liquidation of a receivable component.
For further details on generic attributes that you can define for liquidation of an LC contract,
please refer the ‘Liquidation’ User Manual under Modularity.
10.2.1 Liquidating Receivable Components of LC
Once you enter the reference number of the LC in the Receivable Liquidation screen, the system
automatically assigns a unique liquidation reference number to the component you are
liquidating. Besides this, the following details of the LC are picked up and displayed:

The counterparty (customer) code

The Value Date of the LC

The account to which the liquidated amount should be credited

The currency of the receivable account

The branch to which the account belongs

The total outstanding amount for the component as of the value date (the date on which
the payment is being made)

Details of the tracers that were generated thus far for the outstanding component
10-2

The Status of the LC
You can specify the following details for the Liquidation:

The account that should be debited for the liquidation amount

The branch to which the account belongs

The currency of the account

If the component currency and the currency of the account to be debited for the liquidated
amount are different, you can indicate the exchange rate to be used in the conversion. By
default, the exchange rate specified for the product under which the LC is processed, will
be displayed. You can change this and the changed rate should be within the variance
limit specified for the product.
The outstanding components of an LC are displayed for each event. To liquidate an outstanding
component, click ‘Liquidate’ icon on the toolbar.
After the liquidation of an outstanding component, if there are other outstanding components for
the event, the system will inform you of them and prompt you to liquidate them as well.
10-3
10.2.2 Liquidating Receivable Components of LC Manually
You can liquidate the outstanding components manually using ‘LC Deferred Payment’ screen.
Specify the following details:
10-4
Contract Details
Specify the following details:
Contract Reference Number
Specify the contract reference number. The adjoining option list displays all the valid contract
reference number. You can choose the appropriate one.
Contract Amount
System defaults the contract amount from the LC contract.
Customer Name
System defaults the name of the customer from the LC contract.
Currency
System defaults the currency from the LC contract.
Payment Details
Specify the following details:
Value Date
System defaults the value date to the application date. Howewever, you can not modify the value.
Total Prepaid
Specify the total prepaid amount.
Payment Remarks
Specify your remarks regarding the payments.
Component
System defaults the component from the LC contract.
Component Currency
System displays the component currency.
Amount Due
The total amount due for the charge components till date is displayed by the system during
payment as the payment breakup.
10-5
Amount Paid
Specify the total amount paid.
Component
Specify the component.
Component Currency
Specify the component currency.
Due Date
System displays the due date.
Amount Due
The total amount due for the charge components till date is displayed by the system during
payment as the payment breakup.
Waiver
Check this box to indicate that the receivable charge amounts should be waived during manual
liquidation.
You can liquidate the outstanding charge components using ‘Manual Liquidation’ screen. Upon
full liquidation of the component, the system updates the status of the component from
Receivable to Liquidated. System updates the amount liquidated in the receivable component
details.
10.2.2.1
Event for Manual Liquidation of LC charges
The accounting entries maintained in ‘MLIQ’ event (manual liquidation event) will be passed for
the amount paid. The following accounting entries are maintained:
Dr/Cr
Accounting role
Amount tag
propagated from LC
Dr
CHG_CUST_ACC
LC_CHG_LIQD
Cr
LC_CHG_RECV
LC_CHG_LIQD
These Accounting entries are maintained when there is a Accounting entry maintained in BADV
for transferring into Receivable. If the accounting entry is not maintained in the BADV then the Cr
Leg will be Income GL.
During manual liquidation of LC charges, the system allows for waiver of certain components.
Upon setting the waiver flag, the system will default the amount paid as the amount due and will
not allow to modify the same for the component. Upon waiver, the system marks the component
in the LC data store as liquidated. Depending on whether the amount is liquidated or waived
appropriate amount tags will be populated.
10-6
System displays the amounts for waiver as negative amounts. Partial waivers is not allowed.
The accounting entries maintained in ‘WAIV’ event (waive event) will be passed for the amount
paid. The following accounting entries are maintained:
Dr/Cr
Accounting role
Amount tag
propagated from LC
Dr
LC_CHG_RECV
LC_CHG_WAIV
Cr.
LC_CHG_INC
LC_CHG_WAIV
10.2.2.2
Processing Charge for Lc Contracts
The system stores the charge components in the new data store as receivable with the entire of
the charge as amount due if the ‘Collect LC advising charges in Bills’ option is checked for the
respective Charge components.
10.2.2.3
Processing LC Closure
Upon Closure of the LC, system validates if there are any outstanding receivable components in
the LC (Charges meant to be collected from Bills availed against the LC). The system will display
configurable error messages indicating the same.
10.2.2.4
Setup in case advising charges income to be recognised in LC
The following accounting role is used as a part of liquidation of Charges to be transferred as part
of any event of LC.
Accounting role
Description
LC_CHG_RECV
LC Charges Receivable
The above accounting role is used for BC module also.
Assume that LC_CHG component are defined in LC product with ‘Collect LC Advising Charges in bills’
option checked. The following accounting entries are maintained in the liquidation events of the LC charges
components, which are marked to be transferred to BC:
Dr/Cr
Accounting role
Amount tag
propagated from LC
Dr
LC_CHG_RECV
LC_CHG_LIQD
Cr
LC_CHG_INC
LC_CHG_LIQD
The above accounting entries are for charge components.
For LC products, you have to set up accounting to liquidate advising charges using receivable
GL. If the accounting role for the DR leg of the accounting entries is setup as customer role, the
same will be recovered from the customer and will not get transferred to Bills.
10-7
The setup on Bills module as part of LIQD will be as follows:
Dr/Cr
Accounting role
Amount tag
propagated from LC
Dr
BC Customer
LC_CHG_LIQD
Cr
LC_CHG_RECV
LC_CHG_LIQD
10.2.2.5
Processing STP
When MT742 (reimbursement Claim) is received, import bill is booked. At the time of this
processing, LC charge components which are marked to be collected on bill is transferred to the
bill.
Upon Liquidation of the Bill, system generates MT756. In Tag 72 ‘SNDRCVRINFO’ ( 6*35) FFT is
used. System informs the claiming bank about amount deducted for advising charges.
System generates the payment message for Bill amount.
10.2.3 Specifying Details of Advices for Liquidation
The advices that can be generated for the events that occur during the life cycle of an LC, are
defined for the product involved in the LC. In this screen you can specify the advices that should
be generated to the parties concerned, indicating that you have liquidated a receivable
component of the LC.
The details of two advices are shown in this screen:

Charge Claim Advice

Debit Advice
The Charge Claim Advice will, be generated at EOD, on the day the receivable account is
debited. This is the event for which a charge is attached or a commission liquidation event (Event
Code CLIQ). Its details whether it was suppressed during the event, the medium through which it
was transmitted and the date on which it was generated will be displayed. This is for information
purposes only.
The Debit Advice is generated when the receivable components of the LC are liquidated. You can
suppress the generation of the advice or change the media and priority when you are processing
the liquidation.
Suppressing the Generation of an Advice
By default, all the advices defined for the product involved in the LC will be generated. If you do
not want to generate a specific advice, you can suppress its generation by indicating so.
10-8
Priority
Priority applies to the advices that need to be sent, through media like S.W.I.F.T. or TELEX. By
default, the priority of all advices is marked as normal. Advices can be prioritized to one of the
following options:

Normal

Medium

High
Indicating the Medium for Generation
It is mandatory to also specify the medium through which an advice is to be transmitted. An
advice can be transmitted through Telex, Mail, S.W.I.F.T or any other media that you have
defined in your branch. You can select the appropriate medium code from the picklist.
In addition, the details for the Charge Commission Tracer are also displayed. This tracer is
generated after the event has taken place till the component is liquidated. These details are for
information only. They are defaulted from the product under which an LC is processed.
10.2.3.1
Accounting Entries passed during Account Receivable Liquidation
Example
Your customer, Mr. Sam Brown has requested you to issue an LC on 01, Jan’98. You have debited a
receivable account since Mr. Brown’s account does not have the necessary balance to pay the commission.
On 30, Jan’98 Mr. Brown pays the commission that was due on 01, Jan’98. When you liquidate the
commission component of the LC you will have to debit Mr. Brown’s account and credit your debited
receivable account.
The accounting entries passed on 01, Jan’98 (the date commission was due)
Dr
Commission Receivable Account
Cr
Income Account
On Liquidation the following entries are passed:
Dr
Mr. Sam Brown’s account
Cr
Commission Income account
10.3 Generating ACK_TRACER and CON_TRACER Manually
The system generates tracers under TRGN event, which can be viewed from the respective
Contract or Outgoing Browser screens. You can manually generate ACK_TRACER and
CON_TRACER using ‘LC Tracer Generation’ screen. You can invoke ‘LC Tracer Generation’
screen by typing ‘LCDTRGEN’ in the field at the top right corner of the Application tool bar and
clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
10-9
You can maintain the following parameters here:
Contract Reference No
Specify contract reference number for which the ACK_TRACER and CON_TRACER are
maintained at the contract level, from the adjoining option list.
Party Type
Specify party type of the specified contract reference number from the adjoining option list.
Tracer Code
Specify code of the tracer you need to generate manually. The adjoining option list displays
tracers which are selected as required at LC contract level. You can select the appropriate one.
Currency
Currency of the contract is defaulted here based on the details maintained at contract level.
Receiver
Receiver of the contract is defaulted here based on the details maintained for specified party
type.
LC Amount
LC amount of the contract is defaulted here based on the details maintained at contract level.
Click ‘Generate’ button. The system generates tracer message corresponding to the specified
‘Tracer Code’ based on the ‘Receiver’s Default Medium’ format
10-10
11. Credit Limit Tracking for LC
11.1 Introduction
When you issue an import LC or advise and confirm an export LC, you would track your liability
against the party on behalf of whom you are undertaking a liability. For an import LC, you would
track the exposure against the applicant while for an export LC that you confirm, you would do so
for the issuing bank.
In Oracle FLEXCUBE, credit limit tracking is done using credit lines allotted to a customer. The
credit line allotted to the party against whom you want to track your liability, should be indicated
while you capture the details of an LC. In the case of an amendment, from advise of an export LC
to advise and confirm, you can indicate the credit line during the amendment also.
You can specify Central Liability details for an LC, in the ‘LC Contract Party details’ screen. To
invoke this screen, you have to click on the ‘Parties’ tab from the ‘Contract Main’ screen.
The amount that is tracked will be the LC Liability Amount. It is arrived at as follows:
Liability Amount = Maximum LC Amount + Liability % of the LC amount
In the case of an LC revolving in time, the liability amount will be calculated taking into account all
the scheduled reinstatements.
11.1.1 Specifying Whether Limit Tracking is Required
Every credit-seeking customer of your bank is assigned a credit limit under a Credit Line.
Check against the credit limit tracking option, to indicate that the LC liability amount should be
tracked against the credit limit assigned to the customer. Leave it unchecked to indicate you do
not wish to track the LC liability amount against the credit limit assigned to any of the parties
involved in the LC.
Specifying the Party against whom Credit should be Tracked
You would have already captured the details about the different parties involved in the LC. For
each party type (APP, ABK, ISB, etc.), you would have specified the details of the party.
While specifying credit limit tracking details, you have to just indicate the party type against whom
you want to track the credit limit. The party details are picked up by default.
The CIF ID of the Party
When you specify a party type against whose credit limits you wish to track the LC amount the
CIF ID assigned to the party is automatically picked up and displayed.
Note the following:
11-1
The system prompts override messages:

If the LC expiry date is later than any linked collateral’s expiry date.

If the LC expiry date extended as part of amendment is later than any limit line’s expiry
date.
The system will validate when a new limit line is attached during actions other than New.
11.1.1.1
Specifying Limit Tracking Tenor
While maintaining the preferences for the contract, you can specify whether you want to track the
limits based on LC tenor or the Max Draft tenor (Usance period). For this you need to indicate
your preference by selecting the appropriate checkbox.
The credit lines are displayed depending upon the preferences specified at the time of
creating the line. E.g. Products allowed, branch allowed etc.
For all the contracts, you can change your preference for limits tracking before or after
authorization. However every time you change the tenor type you need to select a credit line
again. Subsequently, tracking will be done for the new tenor and credit line.
11.1.1.2
Indicating Credit Line under which the Liability Amount should be Tracked
You have to specify the credit line of the party against which the LC liability amount has to be
tracked.
If more than one credit line has been defined for the party, only those credit lines whose
restrictions are in line with that of the LC will be displayed. The restrictions could be one of the
following:

Tenor

Product

Branch

Currency
In addition, the expiry date of the line should be before the Issue Date of the LC.
When you enter an LC for a customer, and choose a line, the cash collateral percentage
defined for the customer and line will default. If you have not defined the cash collateral
percentage for a customer and a line, the cash collateral percent defined for the product will
default to the LC Contract. You can change this default value to suit the LC you are processing.
11-2
12. Automatic Processes
12.1 Introduction
The following processes relating to the LC Module can be made automatic:

Automatic closure

Automatic calculation of periodic commission

Automatic liquidation of periodic commission

Automatic reinstatement of the LC amount

Automatic status update

Automatic accrual of commissions

Generation of tracers

Closure of open insurance policies
The events that are to take place automatically are triggered off during the Batch Process. The
batch process is an automatic function, run as a mandatory Beginning of Day (BOD) and End of
Day (EOD) process. During EOD, the batch process should be run after End of Transaction Input
(EOTI) has been marked for the day, but before End of Financial Input (EOFI) has been marked
for the day. The tracer generation function should be run after end-of-financial-input (EOFI) has
been marked for the day.
You should maintain the LC EOD function as a mandatory batch process, once as a BOD
and the next as a Pre-EOC program. It is maintained in the EOC mandatory programs table of the
Core Services module. The tracer generation function should also be defined as a mandatory
EOD function.
The contracts that will be processed by the batch processes depend on the definition in the
Branch Parameters screen.
12.2 Maintaining Branch Parameters
A set of rules that govern the LCs processed through the LC module, in a particular branch of
your bank, is defined in the ‘Branch Parameters’ screen.
From the Application Browser, choose ‘Letters Of Credit’ and ‘Branch Parameters’ under it.
12-1
You can also invoke this screen by typing ‘LCDBRPRM’ in the field at the top right corner of the
Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button. Then, the ‘Letters of Credit Branch Parameters’ screen will be displayed.
The events, for which you had indicated automatic processing, are triggered off during the Batch
Process. You can specify preferences for the automatic events that fall on a holiday, in the
Branch Parameters screen. In addition, you can also specify the level at which accrual entries
should be passed, for LCs in your branch.
Specifying Preferences for the Automatic Processing of LCs
You have the option to specify, that the batch process should process automatic events falling
due on a holiday should.
The same can be processed on either of the following ways:

Next Working Day - 1

Upto System Date
If you indicate that the processing has to be done upto the Next Working Day - 1, all the
automatic events falling due on the holiday will be processed by the batch process, as part of the
EOD on the last working day, before the holiday.
12-2
If you indicate that processing has to be done only upto the System Date, then only the events
scheduled for today (the last working day before the holiday) will be processed. The events falling
due on the holiday are processed by the batch process, as part of the BOD process, the first
working day after the holiday.
Example
The current branch date is 20 March 1998. On 21 March 1998, which is a holiday, the following automatic
events fall due:

The automatic closure of an LC

Automatic reinstatement of the LC amount

Automatic accrual of commission and charges
Next working day - 1
If you specify that the processing should be done on the last working day - 1, the above events will be
processed on March 20, as part of the batch process run at End of Day.
System date
If you specify that the processing should be done only upto the system date, then the events scheduled for
21 March 1998, will be processed as part of the Batch Process run as part of Beginning of Day on 22 March
1998.
Indicating whether User Reference Number should be Displayed in the Advices Generated
If you wish to display the user reference number in the advices that are generated for a contract,
select the ‘Use user reference no in messages’ option. All the advices generated at your branch
will display the appropriate user reference number.
You can specify a format for the generation of the User Reference Number in the ‘Sequence
Generation’ screen available in the Application Browser. Refer to the Core Services User Manual
for details on maintaining a sequence format.
Specifying the Level at which Accrual Entries should be Passed
At the time of creating a product, you have specified

Whether accrual of Commission is allowed for the product

The frequency with which the accrual entries should be passed

The accounting entries that should be passed for the accrual event
An LC will inherit the accrual frequency defined for the product under which it is processed.
In the Branch Parameters screen, you indicate the level at which the accrual entries have to be
passed. The level can be:

Product

Contract
12-3
If you indicate that automatic accrual should be done at the product level, a single entry for all the
LCs, for which commission was accrued automatically, will be passed. This helps reduce the time
taken to pass individual entries. If you indicate that the automatic commission accrual process
should pass accrual entries at the contract level, accrual entries will be passed for each LC for
which commission was accrued automatically.
Example
You have created a product - INL1 to cater to incoming LCs. The product has the following characteristics:

Commission is collected in advance.

Commission has to be accrued every month.
The accounting entries during commission accrual (defined for the event ACCR) are:
Accounting Role
Accounting Head
Amount Item
Dr/Cr
COMMISSION_RIA
COMLI01
Commission
Dr
COMMISSION_INC
COMINC01
Commission
Cr
You have entered the following contracts using the product INL1:
Contract
Tenor
Commission
1st accrual amount
Contract 1
3 months
US $300
$100.00
Contract 2
6 months
US $500
$83.33
Contract3
12 months
US $1000
$83.33
The accounts into which the accrual entries should be passed for each of these contracts are the same as
they are linked to the same product.
Accrual entries level - Product
If you indicate that the automatic commission accrual process should pass accrual entries at the product
level, a single accrual entry of US 266.66, for all the LCs will be passed.
Accrual entries level - Contract
If you indicate that the automatic commission accrual process should pass accrual entries at the contract
level, three accounting entries will be passed.
The Accrual Control List will give you the details of the accruals done for every contract, even if the entries
were passed at the product level. Thus, you will have the information about the amount accrued for each
contract.
Specifying the Discrepancy Notice Period
Discrepancies are likely to be found while processing Incoming or Outgoing bills under LCs. You
can specify a period within which the discrepancy details should be added to the bills. This period
will be calculated from the date of presentation of the bills (which is typically the booking date of
the bill) to the issuing bank/confirming bank.
12-4
The system will display an override if the discrepancies are added to the bills (in the ‘Bills –
Contract Details’ screen) after the discrepancy notice period.
For details on processing a bills contract, refer the ‘Processing Bills’ chapter of the BC (Bills and
Collections) User Manual.
12.2.1 Invoking LC Batch Process
Batches are run automatically. In the mandatory programs, all batches whichever are required will
be maintained in sequence and that is triggered automatically as based on the maintenance in
the ‘Mandatory Batch Program Maintenance’ screen.
You can invoke this screen by typing ‘EIDMANPR’ in the field at the top right corner of the
Application tool bar and clicking on the adjoining arrow button.
Module
Choose the module code from the adjoining option list.
12-5
Function Identification
Choose the function ID of batch that you wish to run. The adjoining option list displays all batch
processes available for the module.
Select the appropriate one. You can configure the batch to be run at various stages of day like
EOD, EOTI etc.
For further details about this screen, refer the chapter ‘Setting- up Mandatory Programs for EOD’
in the AEOD User Manual.
12.2.2 Automatic Events Executed During Beginning of Day (BOD)
The Batch program when run as part of BOD processes the following events:

Automatic liquidation of periodic commissions

Automatic Reinstatement of an LC

Calculation of periodic commission
12.2.3 Automatic Liquidation of Periodic Commission
The periodic commission components of an LC will be automatically liquidated, if the commission
components fall due on or before the current system date. As a part of BOD, this function
liquidates the commission components of the LC contracts, whose commission liquidation date is
between the last working date and the current processing date.
The commission components that are liquidated by this function are posted to the accounts
specified, in the settlements screen of the LC. This may be a customer’s account or a receivable
account. On liquidation of the commission components of an LC by the function:

The necessary tax related entries associated with the liquidation will be passed

The necessary debit advices will be generated

The relevant accounting entries will be passed. Typically they would be
12-6
If collected in arrears:
Role
Role Description
Amount Tag
Dr/ Cr
COMM_CUST_ACC
Customer account
Commission
Dr
CENC
Commission Earned Not Collected
Commission
Cr
Role
Role Description
Amount Tag
Dr/ Cr
COMM_CUST_ACC
Customer account
Accrual amount
Dr
COMM_RIA
Commission Received in Advance
Accrual amount
Cr
If collected in advance:
As a part of EOD, this function liquidates the commission components of all the LC contracts, for
which commission liquidation date falls between the current processing date and the next working
date.
If the next working day happens to fall in the next month, this function will pick up only those
contracts whose commission liquidation date, falls within the current processing month.
The following reports will be generated when the commission components of the LC, are
automatically liquidated:

An activity report, which lists the contracts whose commission components were
liquidated

A report on the exceptions that were encountered during the liquidation of the
commission components like account closed, no funds in the account, etc.
12.2.4 Automatic Reinstatement of LC
All LC contracts, for which you had specified automatic reinstatement, will be reinstated when the
batch process for the day, is run as part of BOD.
The revolving details specified for the LC, in the Contract Main screen, are used to reinstate the
contracts. The reinstatement is done subject to the Maximum Liability and the Maximum LC
Amount allowed for the contract. The unutilized credit is removed from the contingent entries for
non-cumulative LCs.
For LCs that revolve in time, the LC Amount and the Maximum Liability Amount is reset based on
the frequency of reinstatement (the value of frequency can be either Days or Months depending
on the ‘Units’ you specify for the contract). In the case of an LC, which revolves in value, the LC
amount is reset when the current availability under the LC is reduced to zero. Thus, the
reinstatement for LCs which revolve in value is done during beginning of day on the next day. It is
done after the availment that makes the current availability to zero is made.
When LCs are automatically reinstated, the necessary accounting entries and advices specified
for the event code REIN (reinstatement), will be passed automatically.
12-7
As a part of the BOD process, this function reinstates all the revolving LCs (specified with
automatic reinstatement), which needs to be reinstated. This is determined by two factors:

Whether the LC revolves in time and the next revolving date is less than or equal to the
current date or

The LC revolves in value and the unavailed amount under the LC, is reduced to zero by
the availments that were made.
During EOD, the auto reinstatements scheduled for the next day will be done under the following
conditions:

The next day is a holiday

You have specified in the Branch Parameters table, that events scheduled for a holiday
should be processed, on the working day before the holiday. If the next working day
happens to fall in the next month, this function will pick up only LCs that has their next
revolving date within the same month. The processing for such LCs will be done during
BOD on the next working day.
All contracts that were automatically reinstated on a day, will appear in the Activity Report for the
day. The exceptions encountered during the reinstatement i.e. the contracts, which should have
got reinstated, but were not, will figure in the Exception Report.
12.2.5 Processes Run during End of Day (EOD)
The Batch program when run as part of EOD processes the following events:

Automatic closure of contracts

Automatic accrual of commissions
12.2.6 Automatic Closure of LC
All LC contracts for which you had specified automatic closure and which are due for closure as
of today, will be automatically closed when the batch processes for the day is run. The accounting
entries specified for the closure will be passed.
If an LC is linked to an open insurance policy for which the option ‘Update utilization
Automatically’ is checked, then on this date, the system will decrease the utilization on the policy
with the LC amount.
12.2.7 LC Auto Closure Batch
If the ‘Auto Closure’ check box is checked at the contract level, then system will close those
contracts. If the ‘Allow Partial Closure’ option is checked at the branch level, then system does
the following processing as part of the Closure Batch:

If the entire LC amount is utilized, the system triggers PCLS event on the expiry of the
partial closure days specified. The LC will be closed on the LC closure date.
12-8

If the LC is partially utilized, then the system will fire an event ‘PCLS’ (Partial Closure of
LC) and the Limits, Outstanding Liability and the Cash Collateral for the unutilized
amount will be released.
Example
An LC of USD 1000 is created.
A Bill of USD 700 is created in Initial stage by linking the above LC.
The system initiates the automatic partial closure process after the expiry of the number of partial closure
days specified in ‘Letters of Credit Branch Parameters Maintenance’ screen. As a part of the closure batch
(if the new branch level flag is checked), the system releases the limits, OS liability and cash collateral for
USD 300 by retaining USD 700 assuming that the Bill to which the LC is linked will be availed at the later
stage
Once PCLS event is fired for an LC contract, system does not allow any operation on the LC
other than LC Closure (CLOS). You can reopen the closed LC as existing. While reopening the
LCs for which PCLS has fired earlier, the Limits will be tracked, OS Liability and Cash collateral
will be increased to the extent of the amount released as part of PCLS. In the above example,
Limits will be tracked for USD 300 and the OS Liability and Cash collateral will be increased for
USD 300.
After PCLS is fired on the LC contract, if the Bill contract to which the LC is linked is reversed, the
Limits, OS Liability and the Cash Collateral will not be released automatically. You have to
manually close the LC.
System does not release the linkages to the LC automatically, as part of PCLS firing during batch.
This has released manually as part of manual partial closure. The above processes are skipped
for the LC contracts under the product for which the ‘Revolving’ is ‘Yes’. System manually
handles the generation of MT799.
In case of a partially confirmed export LC contract, the system excludes the bill amount in the
initial stage from the confirmed and unconfirmed portions.
Example
Consider an export LC with the following details:
LC Amount
: GBP 10000
Confirmed Amount
: GBP 7000
Unconfirmed Amount
: GBP 3000
By linking this LC, a bill of GBP 2000 has been created at Initial stage.
During partial closure, the system releases the liability, limits and cash collateral for GBP 8000. The amount
of GBP 2000 is retained as the bill to which the LC is linked may be availed at a later stage.
The system passes the following entries on PCLS:
Dr/
Cr
Account Role Code
Amount Tag
12-9
LCY
Amount
LCY Amount
Description
Dr/
Cr
Account Role Code
Amount Tag
LCY
Amount
LCY Amount
Description
Dr
LC_OCU_OFFSET (Unutilized
Credit Offset)
UCNF_LIAB_OS_AMT
3000
Unconfirmed LC
Amount
Cr
LC_OCU (Outstanding Credit
Unutilized)
UCNF_LIAB_OS_AMT
3000
Unconfirmed LC
Amount
Dr
LC_CNF_OFF (Confirmation of
LC Offset)
CNF_LIAB_OS_AMT
5000
Confirmed LC
Amount
Cr
LC_CNF (Confirmation of LC)
CNF_LIAB_OS_AMT
5000
Confirmed LC
Amount
When the bill is booked in the final stage, AVAL event is triggered. The system initially considers the
confirmed portion on AVAL event.
The bill amount in initial stage, GBP 2000, will be excluded from the confirmed portion. The
remaining GBP 5000 will released. On the unconfirmed portion, the entire amount of GBP 3000
will be released.
12.2.8 LC Automatic Status Update Batch
During EOD operations, the status update batch automatically processes status changes of LC
contracts. The batch examines the contracts for the status of the checkbox ‘Auto Status Change’.
If this box is checked, the batch processes status update and derives the new status based on
the defined rules. The field ‘Derived Status’ on the contract screen is updated with the new status.
Once the LC status is updated, the system posts the entries related to status processing as part
of LCEOD batch. If the status processing basis is set as Branch or CIF at the branch level, the
entries are posted as part of Group Level Status Change batch.
If status processing basis is set as ‘Contract’ at the branch level, the system performs one of the
following actions:

If the computed status is worse than the user defined status, a forward status change is
triggered.

If the computed status is better than the user defined status, a backward status change is
triggered.

For the current status, if the options ‘Forward’ and ‘Reverse’ are not checked in the
preferences, then status change does not take place.
12.2.9 Status Change Batch Processing (CSDSTBTC)
For the LC module the Status change batch will be run along with the customer/Group and apply
worst status change for the customer. This batch will use the status change events.
You can trigger the batches to run before the Common Status Change batch (CSDSTBTC).
The following given batches can be run in any order:
12-10

LCEOD

BCAUSTCH

CLBATCH

ICEOD

CIDBATCH

MODBATCH

CASABAT

IAAUTDLY

CSDSTBTC

ICEOD

CLDPROV

MODPROV

CIDPROV
If ‘Status Processing’ is at Individual Contract Level, then system will trigger status change based
on the Customer Credit rating for the customer of the Contract /Account booked. The other
contracts of the customers in the same Group will not be impacted. However if the ‘Status
Processing’ is at CIF/Group level individual module (LC,CL, CI, MO, CA, IA and BC) batches will
be updating common storage with the derived status of each contract and CIF/Group level status
will be triggered by the common status change batch. The common status change batch will call
the individual module function for status change processing.
12.2.10
Automatic Accrual of Commission
When the batch process is run as part of EOD, the commission components of the active
(authorized and not yet liquidated) LC contracts will be accrued. Accrual is usually performed
from the last liquidation date to the current date. Since commission is calculated for rounded
periods, the final accrual on the expiry date will be for the full rounded period.
When the accrual is done, the relevant accounting entries for the accrued components will be
passed. The internal accounts will be updated with the accrual related details.
Typical accounting entries that are passed include:
If collected in arrears
Role
Role description
Role Type
Amount Tag
Dr/ Cr
CENC
Commission earned not collected.
Asset
Accrual amount
Dr
COMM_INC
Commission earned
P&L
Accrual amount
Cr
12-11
If Collected in Advance
Role
Role description
Role Type
Amount Tag
Dr/ Cr
COMM_RIA
Commission received in advance.
Asset
Accrual amount
Dr
COMM_INC
Commission earned
P&L
Accrual amount
Cr
The level at which accrual entries are passed depends on your definition of branch parameters.
To recall, the accrual entries can be configured to be passed either at the contract level or the
product level.
Either way, the details of accruals for each contract will be available in the Accrual Control List.
The details of this report, the procedure for generation and the contents are discussed in the
chapter on Reports.
12.2.11
Memo Accrual of Commission
The memo accrual function does not generate any accounting entries nor does it mark the
contracts as accrued. It only computes the accrual amount as it would be computed for a regular
accrual and reports the accrued figures, without updating the accrual and P&L accounts. The
commission accrued by the function, is reported in the Memo Accrual Control report. The content
of this report is the same as that of the Accrual Control report.
12.2.12
Accrual Control Report
The accrual control report lists the LCs for which accrual entries were passed as of the current
date.
12.2.13
Selection Options
You can configure this report to be triggered automatically, as part of the batch processes run at
EOD. The report can also be generated at any time in the day from the Reports menu. If the
report is generated as part of EOD, the report will by default list the details of the accruals that
were made, as of the last accrual date.
If you generate the report from the Reports menu, you can indicate the date for which, you want
details of LCs for which commission was accrued. You can also indicate the type of accrual for
which you want details. The options available are:
Actual
The actual accrual report will contain details of the actual accrual entries that were passed as of
the date you have indicated.
12-12
Memo
The memo accrual report just gives the details of the accruals due to an LC, as of a particular
date. This will be a projected figure, without the actual accounting entries for accruals being
passed. The memo accrual control report can be generated only after you run the memo accrual
function.
12.2.14
Contents of Report
The report options that you select while generating the report are printed at the beginning of the
report. The contents of the report are discussed under the following heads:
Header
The Header carries the title of the Report, information on the user who generated the report, the
branch code, the date and time and the page number of the report.
Body of the Report
The report contains the following details:
Fields
Description
Contract Ref No
This is the reference number of the LC to which the accrual details
are related.
Component
This is the commission component that has been accrued.
CCY
This is the currency of the commission component.
Current accrued amount
This is the amount that was accrued for the component, on the last
accrual date.
Amount accrued to date
accrued amount
This is the total amount that has been accrued, for the component,
till date.
12.2.15
Generating Tracers
For an LC, the following types of tracers can be generated:

The acknowledgment tracer (sent to the advising bank when an import LC is issued and
an acknowledgment is sought)

The charge-commission tracer (sent to the party who has to bear the commission or
charges for an LC that has been processed, pending the payment of the charge or
commission)

The confirmation tracer (sent to the confirming bank, seeking a letter of confirmation)
These tracers are generated at a frequency, specified for the LC. On the day they have to be
generated, the EOD processing: Tracer generation function will generate them. This function
should be run after the End of Financial Input (EOFI) has been marked for the day.
12-13
12.2.16
Executing Tracer Generation Function
This function should be run after the end-of-financial-input (EOFI) has been marked for the day.
After the successful completion of the function, the tracers will be put in the ungenerated directory
of the Outgoing Message Browser. You should generate them from there.
12.2.17
Straight Through Processing of SWIFT Messages
Oracle FLEXCUBE supports Straight through Processing (STP) of the following messages:

MT710

MT707

MT730

MT740

MT742

MT768
As part of STP processing, for some of the messages, Generated Reference Number needs to be
updated in the Incoming message data source with Contract Reference Number. They are:

MT742 Reimbursement Claim

MT754 Advice of Payment/Acceptance/Negotiation

MT700 Issue of a Documentary Credit

MT710 Documentary Credit

MT740 Authorization to Reimburse

MT747 Amendment to an Authorization to reimburse

MT707 Amendment to documentary credit

MT705 Pre-Advice
For MT202 the value in tag 21 is updated as Generated reference Number.
The Generated Reference Number is not updated automatically for the following messages:

MT400 Advice of Payment

MT410 Acknowledgement

MT430 Amendment For Instructions

MT730 Acknowledgement Message

MT768 Acknowledgement for guarantee amendment
12-14
If the above messages are processed successfully, then the processed contract reference
number is updated as Generated Reference Number.
STP of MT710 - Advise of Third Bank’s Documentary Credit
12.2.18
The MT710 is sent by the ‘Advising Bank’ that has received a documentary credit (MT700) from
the ‘Issuing Bank’. The message is sent to the ‘Advise thru Bank’ (bank advising the beneficiary)
and is used to advise the receiver about the terms and conditions of a documentary credit.
You can upload the incoming MT710 as export LCs in Oracle FLEXCUBE. The following table
lists the mapping that should exist between the SWIFT tags in MT710 and the fields in the LC
Contract screen:
Status
Tag value
Description
Oracle FLEXCUBE
field value
Remarks
M
27
Sequence of
Total
M
40B
Form of
Documentary
Credit
Transferable
M
20
Senders
Reference
Their Reference for
party ‘ABK’
M
21
Documentary
Credit Number
Their Reference for
party ‘ISB’
M
31C
Date of issue
Issue date and
effective date
M
31D
Date and
place of expiry
Expiry date and
Expiry place
M
52A or D
Issuing bank
Party details of ISB
The party details will be
fetched using BIC code if
52A is present else the
party details needs to be
fetched using D to A
converter. In case
counterparty is not found
then ‘Walk-in customer’ will
be used.
O
51A or D
Applicant bank
Party details of APB
The party details will be
fetched using BIC code if
51A is present else the
party details needs to be
fetched using D to A
converter. In case
This field identifies whether
MT711 is sent as part of
MT710.
12-15
The different tag values for
this field and the
corresponding FCC field
value is given in ‘Table A’.
Status
Tag value
Description
Oracle FLEXCUBE
field value
Remarks
counterparty is not found
then ‘Walk-in customer’ will
be used.
M
50
Applicant
Party details of APP
The party details will be
fetched using Name of the
party. In case counterparty
is not found, then ‘Walk-in
customer’ will be used.
M
59
Beneficiary
Party details of
‘BEN’ and customer
details in Main
screen
The party details will to be
fetched using Name of the
party. In case counterparty
is not found then ‘Walk-in
customer’ will be used.
M
32B
Currency code
and amount
LC currency and LC
amount
-
O
39A
Percentage
Credit Amount
Tolerance
About clause,
positive and
negative tolerance
If not present then about
clause should be ‘None’. If
present, the about clause
should be ‘About’ with
positive and negative
tolerance
O
39B
Maximum
Credit Amount
Liability amount
-
O
39C
Additional
Amounts
Covered
Additional amounts
covered in the
‘Others’ tab
-
M
41A or D
Available
with…by…
Credit details of LC
(Type, mode and
available with)
For details, refer ‘Table B’
below.
O
42C
Draft at
Credit details
-
O
42A
Drawee
Credit details
-
O
42M
Mixed
Payment
Details
Credit details
-
O
42P
Deferred
Payment
Details
Credit details
-
O
43P
Partial
Shipments
Partial shipment
allowed
If the tag value is
‘ALLOWED’, Partial
Shipment will be ‘Y’. For
12-16
Status
Tag value
Description
Oracle FLEXCUBE
field value
Remarks
any other value of the tag, it
will be ‘N’.
O
43T
Transshipment
Trans Shipment
allowed
If the tag value is
‘ALLOWED’, FCC value will
be ‘Y’. For any other value
of the tag, it will be ‘N’.
O
44A
Loading on
board/dispatch
Shipment From
-
O
44B
For
Transportation
To
Shipment To
-
O
44C
Latest
Shipment Date
Latest Shipment
Date
-
O
44D
Shipment
Period
Shipment Period
-
O
45A
Description of
Goods and
Services
Goods Description
-
O
46A
Documents
Required
Document Details
-
O
47A
Additional
Conditions
FFT Information
Tag 47A will be uploaded as
FFT with FFT code as
‘UPLD_COND’ and
message type as
‘ADV_THIRD_BANK’.
O
71B
Charges
Charges from
Beneficiary in
‘Others’ tab.
-
O
48
Period of
Presentation
Period for
Presentation in
‘Others’ tab.
-
M
49
Confirmation
instructions
Operation Code and
May Confirm
Refer ‘Table C’ for details.
O
53A or D
Reimbursing
Bank
Party details of
‘REB’
The party details would be
fetched using BIC code if
53A is present else the
party details needs to be
fetched using D to A
converter.
12-17
Status
Tag value
Description
Oracle FLEXCUBE
field value
Remarks
O
78
Instructions to
paying /acc/
neg bank
FFT
Tag 78 would be uploaded
as FFT with FFT code as
‘INSTRUCTION’ and
message type as
‘ADV_THIRD_BANK’.
O
57A or D
Advise thru
bank
Party details of
‘ATB’
The party details will be
fetched using BIC code if
57A is present else the
party details needs to be
fetched using D to A
converter.
O
72
Sender to
receiver info
Internal
remarks/FFT
Tag 72 will be uploaded as
FFT with FFT code as
‘SND2RECINFO’ and
message type as
‘ADV_THIRD_BANK’.
Table A
Tag value
Transferable (Oracle FLEXCUBE value)
IRREVOCABLE
N
REVOCABLE
N
IRREVOCABLE TRANSFERBALE
Y
REVOCABLE TRANSFERABLE
Y
Table B
Tag value
Type (Oracle
FLEXCUBE field
value)
Mode (Oracle
FLEXCUBE field
value)
Payment
Straight
Sight
Acceptance
Straight
Acceptance
Negotiation
Negotiable
Negotiation
Def payment
Straight
Deferred
Mixed pymt
Straight
Mixed
With (Oracle
FLEXCUBE field
value)
st
Option A
1 line
Option D
1 4 lines
st
12-18
Table C
Tag value
Type (Oracle FLEXCUBE
field value)
Mode (Oracle FLEXCUBE field
value)
CONFIRM
Advise and confirm
N
MAY ADD
Advise
Y
WITHOUT
Advise
N
During the booking of an export LC, MT711 will be considered for uploading goods description
(field 45B), document details (field 46B) and additional conditions (field 47B). The existence of
MT711 for MT710 will be checked from field 27 of MT710. MT711 SWIFT record will be fetched
from the incoming browser using the reference number from field 20 of MT710.
The system will arrive at the queue through which MT710 should be routed using the STP rule
maintenance. Based on the queue and message type, the system will identify the product for the
LC contract from the product mapping maintenance where a queue is mapped to the product.
The closure date of the LC will be derived from the product (expiry date in field 31D + closure
days maintained in the LC product). The party details of advising bank ‘ABK’ in export LC will be
derived from the sender reference number.
If all MT711 messages are not present in the incoming message browser, then the system will
stop processing the corresponding MT711 and move on to process the next MT710 in the queue.
Field 27 of the message will be used to identify the number of MT711 messages associated with
an MT710.
The STP process will create authorized or unauthorized export LC based on the post upload
status maintained in the ‘Upload Source Preferences’ screen.
12.2.19
STP of MT707 – Amendment to Documentary Credit
Upload of MT707 triggers amendment of an export LC contract. The contract reference number
on which the amendment needs to be triggered is derived primarily based on the value of field 21
in the MT707. The system fetches the contract reference number of the export LC contract using
field 21. If the reference is not found, then it fetches the user reference number using field 21. If
the value in field 21 is ‘NONREF’, the system will check for field 23.
If field 23 exists, then it will fetch the contract reference number using party as ‘ISB’ and the
issuing bank reference number from field 23. If the contract reference is not found then the
system will reject the record. If field 23 doesn’t exist then the system will fetch the contract
reference number using party as ‘ISB’ and reference number of party ‘ISB’ from field 20. If the
contract reference number is not found for above combination, then it will fetch the contract
reference number using party as ‘ABK’ and reference number of party ‘ABK’ from field 20. If the
contract reference is not found, then the system will reject the record.
The system fetches the amendment amount from field 34B. If the currency in field 34B does not
match the currency of the existing contract, then system will reject the record.
12-19
The system fetches the new expiry date of the contract from field 31E. The following table lists
the mapping that should exist between the SWIFT tags in MT707 and the fields in the LC
Contract screen:
Status
Tag
value
Description
Oracle FLEXCUBE
field value
Remarks
M
20
Senders
reference
M
21
Receiver
reference
Contract reference
or user reference of
LC contract
O
23
Issuing bank
reference
Their reference of
party ‘ISB’
O
31C
Date of issue
Not needed for
amendment.
O
52A
Issuing bank
Not needed for
amendment.
O
30
Date of
amendment
Issuing bank
amendment date
O
26E
Number of
amendment
amendment
number in others
tab
M
59
Beneficiary
O
31E
New date of
expiry
O
32B
Increase of
amount
O
33B
Decrease of
amount
O
34B
New
documentary
credit amount
after
amendment
LC amount during
amendment
O
39A
Percentage
credit amount
tolerance
About clause,
positive and
negative tolerance
Not needed for
amendment
LC reference in issuing
bank
If this tag is not present
then the system date
should be used for issuing
bank amendment date.
Not needed for
amendment
Expiry date
12-20
If not present then about
clause should be ‘None’. If
present then the about
clause should be ‘About’
Status
Tag
value
Description
Oracle FLEXCUBE
field value
Remarks
with positive and negative
tolerance
O
39B
Maximum
credit amount
Liability amount
O
39C
Additional
amounts
covered
Additional amounts
in others tab
O
44A
Loading on
board/dispatch
Shipment from
O
44B
For
transportation
to
shipment to
O
44C
Latest
shipment date
Latest shipment
date
O
44D
Shipment
period
Shipment period
O
72
Sender to
receiver info
FFT
Tag 72 would be uploaded
as FFT with FFT code as
‘SND2RECINFO’ and
message type as
‘AMD_EXP_CR’’
The system will check for the following while processing a SWIFT upload:

If field 34B is present then the following need to be available:

If field 32B is present, then the difference between the amount in 34B and current
LC amount should be equal to the amount in 32B.

If field 33B is present, then the difference between the current LC amount and
amount in 34B should be equal to the amount in 33B.
If the amount after amendment is less than the availed amount, then system will reject the record.
The system creates a new version of an export LC after amendment upload. The STP process
creates an authorized or unauthorized amendment record based on the post upload status
maintained in the ‘Upload Source Preferences’ screen.
STP of MT799 – Amendment of LC
12.2.20
MT799 is a free format message generated as part of internal amendment. While amending LC
Contract if the Increment Amendment Number:

Is checked then MT707 swift message is generated.
12-21

Is unchecked then the system generates LC_AMND_INSTR in MT799 format. The tag 79
of the MT799 with the content of tag 79 of MT707.
Both financial and non-financial amendments are considered as internal amendment in LC
Contract online screen (LCDTRONL) irrespective of Beneficiary confirmation.
STP of MT730 – Acknowledgement
12.2.21
MT730 can be generated in response to MT707 and MT710.
12.2.21.1 Acknowledgement of MT707
During LC amendment, MT730 is generated if the media is ‘SWIFT’ and message type is
‘LC_ACK_AMND’. The following table lists the mapping between the SWIFT tags in 730 and the
fields in the LC Contract screen:
Status
Tag value
Description
Oracle FLEXCUBE field value
M
20
Sender’s reference
Contract reference or user
reference
M
21
Receiver reference
Their reference of party ‘ISB’
O
25
Account identification
Account of ISB in others tab
M
30
Date of message being
acknowledged
System date
O
32B
Amount of charges
Charge currency and charge
amount of ISB in others tab
O
71B
Details of charges
Charges from ISB
O
72
Sender to receiver information
FFT code ‘SND2RECINFO’ and
message type as
‘LC_ACK_AMND’
12.2.21.2 Acknowledgement of MT710
MT730 is sent to the issuing bank to acknowledge the receipt of MT700. Oracle FLEXCUBE also
allows you to send an acknowledgment from the advice through bank to the advising bank in
order to acknowledge the receipt of MT710 (Advice of third bank).
The system marks the receiver of the message as ‘ABK’ for message types ‘LC_ACK_ADVICE’
and ‘LC_ACK_AMND’. If ‘ABK’ and ‘ISB’ parties are present for an LC contract, then the receiver
of the message will be ‘ABK’. The receiver of this message will be ‘ISB’ only when ‘ABK’ is not
present in the parties list. This process is applicable for the following events if the message type
is ‘LC_ACK_ADVICE’:

BADV

BCFM
12-22
The process is applicable for the following events if the message type is ‘LC_ACK_AMND’:

AMND

AATC

APAC

APAD
The following table lists the mapping that should exist between the SWIFT tags in MT730 and the
fields in the LC Contract screen:
Status
Tag value
Description
Oracle FLEXCUBE field value
M
20
Sender’s reference
Contract reference/user
reference
M
21
Receiver reference
Their reference of party ‘ABK’
M
30
Date of message being
acknowledged
System date
O
72
Sender to receiver information
FFT code ‘SND2RECINFO’ and
message type as
‘LC_ACK_AMD’ or
‘LC_ACK_ADVICE’
For the automatic generation of MT730 from an export LC, you need to link the message
‘LC_ACK_ADVICE’ to the ‘BADV’ and ‘BANC’ events at the product level. The post-upload status
in the ‘Upload Source Preferences’ screen should be ‘Authorized’. The contract authorization at
the time of contract upload will trigger the MT730 generation process. For manual generation of
MT730 from an export LC, you need to ensure the same advice mapping to the events as
mentioned for automatic generation. However, status in the ‘Upload Source Preferences’ screen
should be ‘Unauthorized’. MT730 will then be generated during manual authorization of the export
LC.
12.2.22
STP of MT740 - Authorization to Reimburse
STP of MT740 triggers creation of an import LC with the operation code ‘Reimbursement’. The
product for this import LC is fetched from the STP product mapping maintenance. The system
check for the following during the STP:

The product type of the LC product is ‘Reimbursement’ or not.

The operation code of the LC contract is ‘Reimbursement’ or not.
The following table lists the mapping that should exist between the SWIFT tags in MT740 and the
fields in the LC Contract screen:
Status
Tag
value
Description
Oracle
FLEXCUBE
field value
12-23
Remarks
Status
Tag
value
Description
Oracle
FLEXCUBE
field value
M
20
Documentary credit
number
Their reference
of party ‘ISB’
O
25
Account identification
Account of
Issuing bank in
others tab
O
31D
Date and place of
expiry
Expiry date and
place of expiry
O
58A or
D
Negotiating bank
Party details of
‘ABK’
The party details
would be fetched
using BIC code if 58A
is present else the
party details needs to
be fetched using D to
A converter. In case
counterparty is not
found then Walk in
customer would be
used
O
59
Beneficiary
Party details of
‘BEN’
The party details
would be fetched
using name of the
party
M
32B
Credit amount
LC currency
and LC amount
O
39A
Percentage credit
tolerance
About clause,
positive and
negative
tolerance
If not present then
about clause should
be ‘None’. If present
then the about clause
should be ‘About’
with positive and
negative tolerance
.The system should
calculate Max LC
amount = LC
amount+ Tolerance.
O
39B
Maximum credit
amount
Liability amount
Using liability amount
the liability
percentage should be
calculated. Maximum
credit amount = Max
LC amount+Liability
percentage.
O
39C
Additional amounts
Additional
12-24
Remarks
Status
Tag
value
Description
Oracle
FLEXCUBE
field value
covered
amounts
covered in
others tab
Remarks
Refer ‘Table D’ for
details.
M
41A or
D
Available with. by
Credit details of
LC(Type, mode
and available
with)
O
42C
Drafts at
Credit details
O
42A or
D
Drawee
Party details of
‘APP’
O
42M
Mixed payment details
Credit details
O
42P
Deferred payment
details
Credit details
O
71A
Reimbursing bank
charges
Charges from
in others tab
Refer ‘Table E’ for the
tags. If the tag is not
present then charges
from should be ‘OUR’.
O
71B
Other charges
FFT
Tag 71 would be
uploaded as FFT with
FFT code as
‘71BCHARGES’ and
message type as
‘LC_ACK_ADVICE’.
O
72
Sender to receiver
info
FFT
Tag 72 would be
uploaded as FFT with
FFT code as
‘SND2RECINFO’ and
message type as
‘LC_ACK_ADVICE’.
The party details
would be fetched
using BIC code if 42A
is present else the
party details needs to
be fetched using D to
A converter. In case
counterparty is not
found then Walk in
customer would be
used
Table D
Tag value
Type (Oracle
FLEXCUBE value)
Mode (Oracle
FLEXCUBE value)
12-25
With (Oracle
FLEXCUBE value)
Tag value
Type (Oracle
FLEXCUBE value)
Mode (Oracle
FLEXCUBE value)
Payment
Straight
Sight
Acceptance
Straight
Acceptance
Negotiation
Negotiable
Negotiation
Def payment
Straight
Deferred
Mixed pymt
Straight
Mixed
With (Oracle
FLEXCUBE value)
Option A
1st line
Option D
1st 4 lines
Table E
Tag value
Charges From
CLM
Claimants
OUR
Ours
The closure date is driven by the closure days maintained in the LC product. The party details of
issuing bank ‘ISB’ in the import LC is derived from the header details using the BIC present in tag
1. This value corresponds to the CIF of the LC contract. The party details of claiming bank ‘CLB’
in the import LC are derived using field 41A or D. These details are updated in the ‘Parties’ tab of
the import LC contract. If value in field 41D is ‘ANY BANK’, then the system will not update the
party type as ‘CLB’.
The STP process creates authorized or unauthorized LC contract based on the post upload
status maintained in the ‘Upload Source Preferences’ screen. The system triggers the event
‘BISS’ after the upload of MT740.
If you modify the LC amount, the undertaken amount will not be impacted. However, the nonundertaken amount will be respectively modified based on the change in LC amount.
If the checkbox ‘Undertake Entire LC on STP’ is checked on ‘Letters of Credit branch Parameters
Maintenance’ screen, the system will pass the following entries on receipt of MT740:
Dr/ Cr
Account Role Code
Amount Tag
Amount Tag Description
Dr
LC_OCU_OFFSET
(Unutilized Credit Offset)
REIM_UND_AMT
Reimbursement
Undertaking Amount
Cr
LC_OCU (Outstanding
Credit Unutilized)
REIM_UND_AMT
Reimbursement
Undertaking Amount
If the checkbox ‘Undertake Entire LC on STP’ is not checked, the system will pass the following
entries on receipt of MT740:
12-26
Dr/ Cr
Account Role Code
Amount Tag
Amount Tag Description
Dr
LC_REM_NU_OFF
REIM_NON_UND_AMT
Reimbursement Nonundertaking Amount
Cr
LC_REM_NU
REIM_NON_UND_AMT
Reimbursement Nonundertaking Amount
While liquidating a bill under the LC, the system verifies the liquidation amount and the
undertaken amount. If the liquidation amount is greater than the undertaken amount, the system
displays an override message. You may choose to proceed or cancel.
STP of MT747 – Amendment to an Authorization to Reimburse
12.2.23
You can upload MT747 as an LC amendment upload. The system fetches the contract reference
number on which the amendment needs to be triggered based on field 20 of the message. It
fetches the value of ‘Their reference’ field for the party ‘ISB’ using field 20. If the reference is not
found then it will reject the record. The following table lists the mapping that should exist between
the SWIFT tags in MT747 and the fields in the LC Contract screen:
Statu
s
Tag
value
Description
Oracle
FLEXCUB
E field
value
M
20
Documentary credit number
O
21
Reimbursing bank reference
M
30
Date of original authorization to
reimburse
O
31E
New date of expiry
O
32B
Amount Increase
O
33B
Amount decreased
O
34B
New amount after amendment
LC amount
during
amend
O
39A
Percentage credit tolerance
About
clause,
positive
and
negative
tolerance
Remarks
Reference Used
for triggering
amendment on LC
contract
Expiry date
12-27
If not present then
about clause
should be ‘None’.
If present then the
about clause
should be ‘About’
with positive and
Statu
s
Tag
value
Description
Oracle
FLEXCUB
E field
value
Remarks
negative tolerance
O
39B
Maximum credit amount
LC liability
amount
O
39C
Additional amounts covered
Additional
amounts
covered in
others tab
O
72
Sender to receiver info
FFT
Tag 72 would be
uploaded as FFT
with FFT code as
‘SND2RECINFO’
and message type
as
‘LC_ACK_ADVIC
E’.
O
77A
Narrative
FFT
Tag 72 would be
uploaded as FFT
with FFT code as
‘NARRATIVE’ and
message type as
‘LC_ACK_ADVIC
E’.
The STP process creates an authorized or unauthorized amendment record based on the post
upload status maintained in the ‘Upload Source Preferences’ screen. The system creates a new
version of the import LC after amendment upload and triggers the ‘AMND’ event. If field 21 does
not have the LC contract reference, the system will reject the record. If field 34B is present, the
system will check for the following:

If field 32B is present, then the difference between the amount in 34B and the current LC
amount should be equal to the amount in 32B.

If field 33B is present then the difference between the current LC amount and the amount
in 34B should be equal to the amount in 33B.

The amount after amendment should not be less than availed amount.

The new expiry date should not be before system date.

The new amount after amendment amount should not be less than the outstanding
amount.
12-28
12.2.24
STP of MT768 - Acknowledgement of a Guarantee Message
SWIFT MT768 can be uploaded into Oracle FLEXCUBE through STP. The following table lists
the mapping that should exist between the SWIFT tags in MT768 and the fields in the LC
Contract screen:
Status
Tag Value
Description
Oracle FLEXCUBE field value
M
20
Transaction Reference
Number
ABK’s Reference Number
M
21
Related Reference Number
Contract reference or user reference
of LC contract
O
25
Account Identification
Account of ISB in others tab.
M
30
Date of Message being
Acknowledged
ABK’s Acknowledgment Date
O
32a
Amount of Charges
O
57a
Account with Bank
O
71B
Details of Charges
O
72
Sender to Receiver
Information
FFT Information
Values in fields 20 and 30 are updated in the LC contract screen on upload. The system triggers
the event ‘ACKB’ on the uploaded LC Contract.
12-29
13. Reports
13.1 Introduction
Information on the LCs processed and the static maintenance done for the module is available in
the form of reports. These reports can be generated with information on many parameters commissions, closed or expired LCs with outstanding items, LCs with unreplied tracers, etc.
These reports can be printed, spooled on to a disk file or displayed on the screen.
You can generate the following reports for the LC module:

Expired LCs with Outstanding Items report

Closed LCs with Outstanding Items report

LCs Due to Expire report

LCs due to be Closed report

Commission Due report

Commission Activity report

Report on Open Ended LCs

Unreplied Tracers report

Confirmed LCs report

Overrides

LC Daily Activity Journal Report

Accruals Control Report- Based on Contract

Accruals Control Report - Based on Product

Commission Activity Report

Accruals Control Report

Process Exception Report
13.2 Expired LCs with Outstanding Items Report
As the name suggests, this report lists all the expired LCs having still have some outstanding
items. These outstanding items could be the liability amount, cash collateral and outstanding
commission and charges. A commission or charge will be considered outstanding when they
are debited from a receivable GL of the bank and not from a customer account.
This report is generated to check if there are outstanding items against an LC. This is done at
the time of releasing the cash collateral or while inquiring whether an LC is to be extended, etc.
13-1
You have an option to close the LCs that has expired. Once an LC is closed, it will not be
reported in this report even if it still has outstanding items. Instead these LCs will be reported in
the Closed LC with Outstanding Items report.
You can invoke the screen by typing the code ‘LCRPEX’ in the field at the top right corner of
the Application tool bar and click on the adjoining arrow button.
13.2.1 Selection Options
You can specify that the report should contain details of expired LCs associated with all LC
products or a specific product. To generate the report for a specific product, select the
appropriate Product Code from the option list.
13.2.2 Contents of Report
The contents of this report are discussed under the following heads:
Header
The Header carries the title of the report, information on the branch and branch date, user id, the
date and time, the page number and module of the report.
Body of the report
This report contains details of:
Contract Ref
No
This is the reference number assigned to the LC by the system.
13-2
Customer
name
While you are processing an LC, you would have given the CIF ID
of one party, in the main screen of the LC Contract On-line
function. Typically, it would be the applicant for an import LC while
it would be the beneficiary or the issuing bank for an export LC.
The short name of this customer will be shown here.
Customer
type
This is the party type of the customer whose short name is
reported.
Country
This is the country code.
Expiry Date
This is the date on which the LC expired.
Closure Date
This is the date on which the LC is due for closure.
CCY
This is the currency in which the LC was opened.
Contract
amount
This is the Maximum LC amount, when the LC was first input and
authorized. This amount does not take into account the
amendments that were made subsequently to the LC.
Outstanding
Liability
This is the amount available for availment against the LC, as of the
date on which the report is generated.
This amount is the outstanding amount after all the amendments
made to the LC during its lifecycle.
Original
Liability
This is the liability amount of the LC, when it was first input and
authorized. This amount thus does not take into account the
amendments that were made subsequently to the LC.
Current
Availability
This is the liability amount due to the LC as of the date on which
the report is generated. This amount is the outstanding amount
after all the amendments made to the LC during its lifecycle.
OS item
This is the outstanding item. It could be cash collateral,
commission or a charge which has not been liquidated.
Currency
The description of the currency in which the outstanding item is
represented.
Outstanding
Amount
This is the amount for which the item is outstanding.
13.3 Closed LCs with Outstanding Items Report
This report lists all the LCs that was closed but still has certain items outstanding. Such LCs
may require follow-up action. The information given by this report will be as of the day on
which the report is generated.
You can invoke the screen by typing the code ‘LCRPCOLI’ in the field at the top right corner of
the Application tool bar and click on the adjoining arrow button.
13-3
The items of the LC that can be outstanding include the cash collateral, outstanding
commission and outstanding charges. The liability amount outstanding prior to the closing of
the record would have automatically been reversed, when the record was closed.
As long as the LC remains in the system, you can reactivate it using the reopen facility.
13-4
13.3.1 Contents of Report
The contents of the report are discussed under the following heads:
Header
The Header carries the title of the report, information on the user who generated the report (User
Id), the branch, branch date, the date and time, the page number and module of the report.
Body of the report
The report contains information on:
Contract Ref
No
This is the reference number assigned to the LC by the system.
Cif Id
This is the Customer Identification number or code
Cust Name
While you are processing an LC, you would have given the CIF ID of one
party in the main screen of the LC Contract On-line function. Typically, it
would be the applicant for an import LC while it would be the beneficiary
or the issuing bank for an export LC.
The short name of this customer will be shown here.
Cust Type
This is the party type of the customer whose short name is reported.
Country
This is the country code.
Expiry date
This is the date on which the LC expired.
Closure Date
This is the Date on which the LC has been closed.
CCY
This the currency in which the LC was opened.
Contract
amount
This is the Maximum LC amount, when the LC was first input and
authorized. This amount does not take into account the amendments
that were made subsequently to the LC.
Current
Availability
This is the liability amount due to the LC as of the date on which the
report is generated. This amount is the outstanding amount after all the
amendments made to the LC during its lifecycle.
Original
Liability
This is the liability amount of the LC, when it was first input and
authorized. This amount thus does not take into account the
amendments that were made subsequently to the LC.
Outstanding
Liability
This is the amount available against the LC, as of the date on which the
report is generated.
OS Item
This is the outstanding item. It could be cash collateral, commission or a
charge which has not been liquidated.
13-5
Currency
The description of the currency in which the outstanding item is
represented.
Outstanding
Amount
This is the amount for which the item is outstanding.
13.4 LCs Due to Expire Report
This report lists the details of the LCs that are due to expire for the period that you specify.
The report provides a kind of warning related to the LCs that is due to expire in the future, so
that you can take the appropriate action extending the expiry date, if it is required.
You can invoke the screen by typing the code ‘LCRPDUE’ in the field at the top right corner of
the Application tool bar and click on the adjoining arrow button.
13.4.1 Selection Options
You can configure this report to be triggered automatically as part of the batch processes run at
EOD or you can generate the report at any time in the day from the Reports Browser.
If the report is generated as part of EOD, the report will by default list all the LCs that is due to
expire, on the date the report is generated.
If you generate the report outside the EOD, you can specify preferences for the generation of
the report. On selecting this report, indicate the period (from and to dates) during which LCs
that is due to expire. The system will report all LCs due to expire whether they have
outstanding items or not. The details are listed in the order of the expiry date of the LC.
13.4.2 Contents of Report
13-6
The report options that you selected while generating the report are printed at the beginning of
the report.
The contents of the report are discussed under the following heads:
Header
The Header carries the title of the report, information on the user who generated the report (User
Id), the branch, branch date, the date and time, the page number and module of the report.
Body of the report
The report contains information on:
Contract Ref
No
This is the reference number assigned to the LC that is due to expire.
Customer
name
While you are processing an LC, you would have given the CIF ID of one
party in the main screen of the LC Contract On-line function. Typically, it
would be the applicant for an import LC while it would be the beneficiary or
the issuing bank for an export LC.
The short name of this customer will be shown here.
Customer ID
This is the Customer Identification number or code.
Country
This is the country code.
LC expiry date
This is the date on which the LC is due to expire.
Closure Date
This is the date on which the LC is due for closure.
Currency
The description of the currency in which the LC amount is expressed.
Original LC
Balance
This is the Maximum LC amount, when the LC was first input and authorized.
This amount does not take into account the amendments that were made
subsequently to the LC.
Outstanding
Amount
This is the amount of the outstanding item.
OS Item
This is the outstanding item. It could be cash collateral, commission or a
charge which has not been liquidated.
Currency
This is the currency in which the outstanding item is represented.
Amount
This is the amount for which the LC was opened.
13.5 LCs Due to be Closed Report
This report lists the details of the LCs that are due for closure, during the period that you
indicate.
13-7
You can invoke the screen by typing the code ‘LCRPCOLC’ in the field at the top right corner
of the Application tool bar and click on the adjoining arrow button.
13.5.1 Selection Options
You can configure this report to be triggered automatically as part of the batch processes run at
EOD. You can also generate the report at any time in the day from the Reports menu.
If the report is generated as part of EOD, the report will by default, list all the LCs that is due to
be closed, on the date the report is generated.
If you generate the report outside the EOD, specify the period for which the report has to be
generated. On selecting this report, you can indicate the period (from and to dates) during
which LCs that are due to be closed should be reported. The system will report all LCs due to
be closed, whether they have outstanding items or not.
13.5.2 Contents of the Report
The report options that you selected while generating the report are printed at the beginning of
the report. The details of the report are listed on the basis of the closure date of the LC. The
contents of the report are discussed under the following heads:
Header
The Header carries the title of the report, information on the user who generated the report (User
Id), the branch, branch date, the date and time, the page number and module of the report.
Body of the report
The report contains information on:
Contract
This is the reference number assigned to the LC that is due to be closed.
13-8
Ref No
Customer
name
While you are processing an LC, you would have given the CIF ID of one party in
the main screen of the LC Contract On-line function. Typically, it would be the
applicant for an import LC while it would be the beneficiary or the issuing bank
for an export LC.
The short name of this customer will be shown here.
Customer
ID
This is the Customer Identification number or code.
Country
This is the country code.
Expiry date
This is the date on which the LC expired or is due to expire.
Closure
Date
This is the date on which the LC is due for closure.
OS Item
This is the outstanding item. It could be cash collateral, commission or a charge
which has not been liquidated.
Currency
This is the currency in which the outstanding item is expressed.
Amount
This is the amount of the outstanding item.
13.6 Commission Due Report
This report prints the details of the periodic commissions that are due to be collected, for a
specific period in time.
You can invoke the screen by typing the code ‘LCRPCODU’ in the field at the top right corner
of the Application tool bar and click on the adjoining arrow button.
13-9
13.6.1 Selection Options
You can specify that this report should contain details of the commission that is due to LCs for
a specific period in the future or for all dates. The selection options that you can indicate for the
generation of the report are:

The product(s) for which you want details. To generate the report for a specific product,
select the appropriate Product Code from the option list.

All dates - if you select this option, the report will contain details of the commission that is
due for all dates in the future.

Specific End Date - if you indicate a specific end date, the report will contain details of the
commission due from LCs, from the current date (date of generating the report) to the
end date that you indicate.
The sequence in which the details will be reported is next collection date (from earliest to
latest) and then LC reference.
On selecting this report, you can specify the period for which the periodic commissions due to
LCs should be reported. For the purposes of reporting, the system takes the next calculation
date as the date of collection for LCs. This is for the LCs which you specified that commission
should be collected in arrears.
13.6.2 Contents of Report
The report options that you indicate while generating the report are printed at the beginning of the
report.
The contents of the report are discussed under the following heads:
13-10
Header
The Header carries the title of the report, information on the user who generated the report (user
Id), the branch, branch date, the date and time, the page number and module of the report.
Body of the report
The details of this report are sorted on the basis of the collection date (earliest to latest). The
report contains information on:
Contract Ref No
This is the reference number of the LC against which commission is
due.
Component
This is the commission component that is due against the LC.
Currency
This is currency in which the commission is applied.
Commission
Amount
This is the commission amount that is to be collected.
Calculation Method
This is the method of the calculation of commission.
Due Date
This is the due date of the commission.
13.7 Commission Activity Report
The Commission Activity report prints details of all the LCs for which commission was
liquidated or calculated, as of the date the report was generated.
You can invoke the screen by typing the code ‘LCRPCAC’ in the field at the top right corner of the
Application tool bar and click on the adjoining arrow button.
13-11
13.7.1 Selection Options
You can configure this report to be triggered automatically as part of the batch processes run at
EOD, or you can generate the report at any time in the day from the Reports menu.
If the report is generated as part of EOD, it will by default list all the LCs for which commission
was liquidated or calculated as of the current date (the date on which the report was
generated).
If you generate the report outside the EOD, you can indicate the date for which you want the
activity reported. You also have the option to indicate the activity for which you want details.
You can specify the following options:

The product(s) for which you want details. To generate the report for a specific product,
select the appropriate Product Code from the option list.

The activity date for which you want details

The activity for which you want to retrieve information. The options available are:

Liquidation

Calculation

Both
13.7.2 Contents of Report
The report options that you indicate while generating the report are printed at the beginning of the
report.
The contents of the report are discussed under the following heads:
Header
The Header carries the title of the report, information on the user who generated the report (User
Id), the branch, branch date, the date and time and the page number and module of the report.
Body of the report
The report contains the following details:
Contract Ref No
This is the reference number assigned to the LC by the system.
Component
This is the commission component for which there was an activity.
Event
This is the Code that identifies the event, during which the
commission component is being reported.
Component
This is the currency of the commission component that had an
activity.
13-12
Component
Amount
This is the commission amount that was involved in the activity..
Start Date
This is the start date of the period for which the commission
component is being reported.
End Date
This is the end date of the period for which the commission
component is being reported.
Debit
This is the branch to which the debit account belongs.
Debit Account
If the activity reported is collection, this is the account number or GL
to which the commission amount is debited.
13-13
13.8 Report on Open Ended LCs
This report lists all the open ended LCs that has outstanding items. An open ended LC is one
for which you have not defined an expiry date.
The details in the report are sorted by product. The sequence of the report is based on the LC
issue date and the LC reference number.
You can invoke the screen by typing the code ‘LCRPOPN’ in the field at the top right corner of
the Application tool bar and click on the adjoining arrow button.
13.8.1 Contents of the Report
The report options that you select while generating the report are printed at the beginning of the
report.
The contents of the report are discussed under the following heads:
Header
The header carries the title of the report, the branch, Branch Date, the User ID, the date and time,
the module and the page number of the report.
Body of the Report
The details of the report include the following:
Product Code
The code of the product that you have associated with the LC.
Issue Date
This is the date on which the LC was processed. It is the issue date for
an import or clean LC and guarantee, and is the date of advise or pre13-14
advise (whichever is earlier) for an export LC.
Contract Ref
No
This is the reference number assigned to the LC by the system.
Name
While you are processing an LC, you would have given the CIF ID of
one party in the main screen of the LC Contract On-line function.
Typically, it would be the applicant for an import LC while it would be
the beneficiary or the issuing bank for an export LC.
The short name of this customer will be shown here.
CIF ID
This is the Customer Identification number or code.
Country Code
This is the country code.
Os Liability
This is the outstanding liability amount as of the date the report was
generated.
Current
Availability
This is the current availability under the LC.
Contract CCY
This is the currency of the LC contract.
Outstanding
Item
This is the description of the type of outstanding item to which, the
currency and amount shown on the same line relate. It could be cash
collateral, commission, or charges, which have not been liquidated.
Currency
This is the description of the currency in which the outstanding item is
expressed.
Amount
This is the amount of the outstanding item.
13.9 Unreplied Tracers Report
This report provides the details of LCs against which there are some tracers that are yet to be
replied by the concerned party.
Items are listed on this report only after the three statutory tracers have been generated and
there has been no response. It is listed ten days after the last tracer was sent. A tracer is taken
to have been responded, to when you indicate that its generation should be stopped.
13-15
You can invoke the screen by typing the code ‘LCRPUNTR’ in the field at the top right corner
of the Application tool bar and click on the adjoining arrow button.
13.9.1 Contents of Report
The contents of the report are discussed under the following heads:
Header
The Header carries the title of the report, information on the user who generated the report (user
id), the branch, branch date, the date and time, the page number and module of the report.
Body of the report
The report contains information on:
Product Code
This is the code of the product involved.
Contract Ref No
This is the reference number assigned to the LC by the system.
Cf Reason for follow-up
This is the reason for which the tracer was sent. It can be
acknowledgment, confirmation or outstanding charges.
Last Tracer Date
This is the date on which the last tracer was sent.
Max Tracers
This is the maximum number of tracers that can be generated.
Cust Name
This is the name of the customer.
Cust Ref No
This is the reference number of the customer.
13-16
Product Code
This is the code of the product involved.
Contract Ref No
This is the reference number assigned to the LC by the system.
Cf Reason for follow-up
This is the reason for which the tracer was sent. It can be
acknowledgment, confirmation or outstanding charges.
Tracer Party
This is the party to whom the tracer is addressed. The first 15
characters of the name of the party to whom the tracer has been
addressed are displayed. This is taken from the LC contract.
13-17
13.10 Confirmed LC Report
This report lists all the LC that has been confirmed.
You can invoke the screen by typing the code ‘LCRFNREP’ in the field at the top right corner of
the Application tool bar and click on the adjoining arrow button.
13.10.1
Selection Options
You can configure this report to be triggered automatically, as part of the batch processes run as
part of EOD or you can generate the report at any time, in the day from the Reports menu.
If the report is generated as part of EOD, the report will by default list details of the LCs that
have the confirming bank, as a party.
If you generate the report outside the EOD process, you can specify preferences for the
generation of the report. On selecting this report, you can indicate whether the report should
contain details of all the banks that are involved as confirming banks or of a selected bank. You
need to select the bank code from the adjoining option list.
13.10.2
Contents of Report
The report options that you select while generating the report are printed at the beginning of the
report.
The contents of the report are discussed under the following heads:
13-18
Header
The Header carries the title of the report, information on the user who generated the report (the
User Id), the branch, branch date, the date and time, the page number and module of the report.
Body of the report
The report contains information on:
Cif Id
This is the Customer Identification number or code.
Name
This is the short name of the CIF.
Currency
This is the currency of the LC.
Product
This is the code of the product involved in the LC.
Contract
This is the reference number assigned to the LC by the
system.
Contract
This is the current status of the LC.
Contract Amount
This is the amount for which the LC was issued.
Maximum LC Amount
This is the LC amount plus the positive tolerance specified
for the LC.
Current Availability
This is the current outstanding liability amount, as of the
date the report was generated.
13.11 Overrides Report
A contract can be saved, with certain exception conditions that were encountered, be given an
override. This report lists the overrides that were encountered for contracts, on the date the report
was generated.
You can invoke the screen by typing the code ‘LCRPOVD’ in the field at the top right corner of the
Application tool bar and click on the adjoining arrow button.
13-19
13.11.1
Selection Options
You can generate this report to contain details of all the overrides that occurred during the day or
to list the overrides that were encountered, while processing a single LC contract. If you indicate
that the report should contain details of the overrides that were encountered in the processing of
a single LC, you should also indicate the Reference number of the LC. Also, you need to indicate
whether the override report should contain details of all product codes or for a specific product
code.
13.11.2
Contents of Report
The report options that you select while generating the report are printed at the beginning of the
report.
The contents of the report are discussed under the following heads:
Header
The Header carries the title of the report, information on the user who generated the report (User
Id), the branch, branch date, the date and time, the page number and module of the report.
Body of the report
The report contains information on:
LC Reference
This is the reference number of the LC during the
processing of which, an override occurred.
Product Code
This is the code of the LC product that is involved in the LC.
Product Description
This is a short description of the product.
13-20
Contract Amount
This is the amount for which the LC was opened.
Expiry Date
This is the date on which the LC is due to expire.
Event Code
This is the Code that identifies the event, during which the
override was encountered.
Event Description
This is the description of the event.
Error Code
This is the error code for which the override was
encountered.
Description
This is the description of the error that was encountered.
13.12 LC Daily Activity Journal Report
This report gives the details of LCs daily activity journal report. You can initiate the necessary
follow up activities after generating this report.
You can invoke the screen by typing the code ‘LCRLYREP’ in the field at the top right corner of
the Application tool bar and click on the adjoining arrow button.
13.12.1
Selection Options
On selecting this report, you can indicate whether the report should contain details of all the
events or single event. If you indicate single event, then you need to select the event code from
the option list. Also, you have to select the date on which the report should be generated.
13.12.2
Contents of the Report
The report options that you select while generating the report are printed at the beginning of the
report.
13-21
The contents of the report are discussed under the following heads:
Header
The header carries the title of the report, the branch, Branch Date, the User ID, the date and time,
the module and the page number of the report.
Body of the report
The report contains information on:
Event Code
This is the code of the event
Description
This is the description of the event.
Product Code
This is the code of the product involved in the
LC.
Description
This is the description of the product code
involved in the LC.
Contract Ccy
This is the currency in which the LC amount is
expressed.
Contract Ref No
This is the Contract Reference number of the
LC.
Cif Id
This is the Customer Identification number or
code.
Cust Name
The short name of the Customer maintained in
LC will be displayed here.
Operation Code
This is the operation code of the LC.
Issue Date
The date on which the LC was issued.
Expiry Date
This is the date on which the LC expired.
LC Amount/ Availment Amount
This is the amount for which the LC was
opened.
Total for currency
This is the sum of all the LC amount and
currency involved in the LC.
13.13 Accruals Control Report- Based on Contract
This report lists all the LCs that was accrued. Such LCs may require follow-up action. The
information given by this report will be as of the day on which the report is generated.
You can invoke the screen by typing the code ‘LCRPACCR’ in the field at the top right corner of
the Application tool bar and click on the adjoining arrow button.
13-22
13.13.1
Selection Options
You can specify the date of the accrual.
You need to specify the accrual type. You have the following options:

Memo

Actual
13.13.2
Contents of Report
The report options that you indicate while generating the report are printed at the beginning of the
report.
The contents of the report are discussed under the following heads:
Header
The Header carries the title of the report, information on the user who generated the report (User
Id), the branch, branch date, the date and time and the page number and module of the report.
Body of the report
The report contains the following details:
Contract Ref No
This is the reference number assigned to the LC by
the system.
Component
This is the component for which there was an
accrual.
13-23
Event Seq No
This is the sequence number of the event.
Currency
This is the currency of the accrued amount.
Current Accrued Amount
This is the current accrued amount, as of the date
the report was generated.
Amount Accrued To Date
This is the accrued amount, as of the date the
report was generated.
Contract Ref No
This is the reference number assigned to the LC by
the system.
Component
This is the component for which there was an
accrual.
Currency
This is the currency of the accrued amount.
Current Accrued Amount Total
This is the sum of all the accrued amount, as of the
date the report was generated.
Accrued Amount To Date Total
This is the sum of all the accrued amount, as of the
date the report was generated.
13.14 Accruals Control Report - Based on Product
This report lists all the LCs that was accrued. Such LCs may require follow-up action. The
information given by this report will be as of the day on which the report is generated.
You can invoke the screen by typing the code ‘LCRPACR’ in the field at the top right corner of the
Application tool bar and click on the adjoining arrow button.
13-24
13.14.1
Selection Options
You can specify the date of the accrual.
13.14.2
Contents of Report
The report options that you indicate while generating the report are printed at the beginning of the
report.
The contents of the report are discussed under the following heads:
Header
The Header carries the title of the report, information on the user who generated the report (User
Id), the branch, branch date, the date and time and the page number and module of the report.
Body of the report
The report contains the following details:
Contract Ref No
This is the reference number assigned to the LC by the
system.
Component
This is the component for which there was an accrual.
Event Seq No
This is the sequence number of the event.
Currency
This is the currency of the accrued amount.
Current Accrued
Amount
This is the current accrued amount, as of the date the
report was generated.
Amount Accrued To
Date
This is the accrued amount, as of the date the report was
generated.
Product Code
This is the code of the product involved.
Component
This is the component for which there was an accrual.
Currency
This is the currency of the accrued amount.
Current Accrued
Amount Total
This is the sum of all the accrued amount, as of the date
the report was generated.
Accrued Amount To
Date Total
This is the sum of all the accrued amount, as of the date
the report was generated.
13.15 Commission Activity Report
This report prints the details of the periodic commission activity. The information given by this
report will be as of the day on which the report is generated.
13-25
You can invoke the screen by typing the code ‘LCRPCACT’ in the field at the top right corner of
the Application tool bar and click on the adjoining arrow button.
13.15.1
Contents of Report
The report options that you indicate while generating the report are printed at the beginning of the
report.
The contents of the report are discussed under the following heads:
Header
The Header carries the title of the report, information on the user who generated the report (User
Id), the branch, branch date, the date and time and the page number and module of the report.
Body of the report
The report contains the following details:
Contract Ref No
This is the reference number assigned to the LC by the
system.
Component
This is the code of the component for which there was an
commission activity.
Event Code
This is the code of the event.
Component Ccy
This is the currency of the component.
Component Amount
This is the component amount for which there was an
commission activity.
13-26
Start Date
This is the start date of the commission activity.
End Date
This is the end date of the commission activity.
13.16 Process Exception Report
You can generate process exception report by using the ‘Letters of Credit Process Exception
Report’ screen. This report lists the process exceptions that were encountered for contracts, on
the date the report was generated.
You can invoke the screen by typing the code ‘LCRPEXP’ in the field at the top right corner of the
Application tool bar and click on the adjoining arrow button.
13.16.1
Selection Options
Select the process ID from the option list.
You need to indicate whether the process exception report should contain details of all types of
activities or a single activity.
13.16.2
Contents of Report
The report options that you select while generating the report are printed at the beginning of the
report.
The contents of the report are discussed under the following heads:
13-27
Header
The Header carries the title of the report, information on the user who generated the report (User
Id), the branch, branch date, the date and time, the page number and module of the report.
Body of the report
The report contains information on:
Contract Ref
No
This is the reference number of the LC for which the process exception report
is generated.
Customer
While you are processing an LC, you would have given the CIF ID of one party
in the main screen of the LC Contract On-line function. Typically, it would be
the applicant for an import LC while it would be the beneficiary or the issuing
bank for an export LC.
The short name of this customer will be shown here.
Error Code
This is the error code for which the process exception report is generated.
Error
Description
This is the description of the error that was encountered.
Process ID
This is the Process Function ID in which exception has been raised
Date Time
This is the date and time on which the exception has been raised
13-28
14. Annexure A - Accounting Entries for LCs
14.1 Accounting Entries for LCs
This Annexure contains details of the suggested accounting entries that can be set up, for the LC
module of Oracle FLEXCUBE. The annexure lists details of the suggested accounting entries,
event-wise.
14.1.1 LC Events
The following is an exhaustive list of events that can take place during the lifecycle of an LC. In
the subsequent paragraphs we shall examine the accounting entries for each of the events listed
below.
Event
Code
Event Description
Remarks
ACCR
Accrual (Of Commission)
All Types
AMND
Amendment
All Types
AOCF
Amendment from open to open and
confirm
Import only
AATC
Amendment from Advice to Confirm
Export Only
APAC
Amend - Pre-advice to Adv & confirm
Export Only
APAD
Amendment from Pre-advice to advice
Export Only
AVAL
Availment
Only For LC’s
BADV
Booking Of An LC With Operation
Advise
Export LC Only
BANC
Booking Of An LC With Operation
Advise And Confirm
Export LC Only
BCFM
Booking Of An LC With Operation
Confirm
Export LC Only
BISS
Booking Of An LC Or Guarantee Issue
(Open or Open & Confirm)
Only For Import LC, Standby LC, Clean
LC, Shipping Guarantee And Guarantee
BPRE
Booking Of An LC With Operation PreAdvise
All Types
CALC
Periodic commission calculation
All types
CANC
Cancellation of an LC
All Types
14-1
Event
Code
Event Description
Remarks
CLIQ
Commission Liquidation
All Types
CLOS
Closure Of An LC Or Guarantee
All Types
RAVL
Reversal of Availment
All types
REIM
Reimbursement Claim of an LC
Revolving LC
REIN
Reinstating An LC
Revolving LCs
ROPN
Reopening Of An LC
All Types
REVR
Reversal of contract
All types
ROPN
Reopening of an LC
All types
REIS
Reissue of Guarantee
Guarantee only
BKSG
Booking of Shipping Guarantee
Shipping Guarantee
CASG
Cancellation of Shipping Guarantee
Shipping Guarantee
APRE
Amendment of LC with Pre-advice
Import LC
Whenever a conversion of currency is involved, the conversion rate used is as follows:

If the contracts currency is different from the takedown or maturity accounts and neither
of them is in the local currency of your branch, the cross rate entered in the contract
screen is picked up.

If the contract currency is different from the contract account and one of them is in the
local currency of your branch, the exchange rate is picked up from the currency table
maintained in the Core services module of Oracle FLEXCUBE. The FX spread is applied
in a way that is favorable to your bank.
14.1.2 Amount Tags
Amount Tag
Description
AVAIL_SET_AMT
Availment amount paid
AVAIL_SET_AMTEQ
Availment amount received
COLL_AMNDAMT
Collateral amend amount Dr.
COLL_AMNDAMT_EQ
Collateral amend amount Cr.
COLLAMT_OS
Outstanding Collateral amount
COLLAMT_OS_EQ
Outstanding Collateral amount
14-2
LC_AMND_AMT
LC Amendment Amount
LC_OS_AMT
Outstanding LC amount
LC_REIN_AMT
Outstanding Reinstatement Amount
LIAB_AMND_AMT
Liability Amendment Amount
ADV_LIAB_AMND_AMT
Liability Amendment Amount for advised LCs
CNF_LIAB_AMND_AMT
Liability Amendment Amount for confirmed LCs
LIAB_AMT
Liability Amount
LIAB_AVAIL_AMT
Availment Liability Amount
ADV_LIAB_AVAIL_AMT
Availment Liability Amount for advised LCs
CNF_LIAB_AVAIL_AMT
Availment Liability Amount for confirmed LCs
LIAB_OS_AMT
Outstanding liability amount
ADV_LIAB_OS_AMT
Outstanding liability amount for advised LCs
CNF_LIAB_OS_AMT
Outstanding liability amount for confirmed LCs
LIAB_REIN_AMT
Reinstatement Amount
ADV_LIAB_REIN_AMT
Reinstatement Amount for advised LCs
CNF_LIAB_REIN_AMT
Reinstatement Amount for confirmed LCs
UCNF_LIAB_OS_AMT
UCNF_LIAB_AMND_AMT
UCNF_LIAB_AVAIL_AMT
UCNF_LIAB_REIN_AMT
Unconfirmed Liability OS Amount
Unconfirmed Liability Amendment Amount
Unconfirmed Liability Availment Amount
Unconfirmed Liability Reinstated Amount
REIM_UND_AMT
Reimbursement Undertaking Amount
REIM_NON_UND_AMT
Reimbursement Non-Undertaking Amount
AVAL_REIM_UND_AMT
Availment - Reimbursement Undertaking Amount
AVAL_REIM_NON_UND_AMT
Availment - Reimbursement Non-Undertaking Amount
AMND_REIM_UND_AMT
Amend - Reimbursement Undertaking Amount
AMND_REIM_NON_UND_AMT
Amend - Reimbursement Non-Undertaking Amount
14-3
REIM_OS_UND_AMT
Reimbursement Outstanding Undertaken amount
REIM_OS_NON_UND_AMT
Reimbursement Outstanding Non-undertaken amount
CNF_LIAB_INCR_AMT
Confirmed Liability Increased Amount
UCNF_LIAB_INCR_AMT
Unconfirmed Liability Increased Amount
CNF_LIAB_DECR_AMT
Confirmed Liability Decreased Amount
UCNF_LIAB_DECR_AMT
Unconfirmed Liability Decreased Amount
LC_REM_NU
Reimbursement Non-Undertaking of LC
LC_REM_NU_OFF
Reimbursement Non-Undertaking of LC Offset
14.1.3 Accounting Roles
The following is an exhaustive list that contains details of the Accounting Roles that are
applicable to the LCs you can process at your bank.
Accounting Role
Description
Role Type
LC_OCU
Outstanding Credit Unutilized
Contingent Liability
LC_OCU_OFFSET
Unutilized Credit Offset
Contingent Asset
LC_CNF
Confirmation of LC
Real GL
LC_CNF_OFF
Confirmation of LC Offset
Real GL
LC_COLL_ACCT
LC Collateral account
Liability
AVL_DEBIT_ACCT
Availment Debit account
Real / Type ‘X’
AVL_CREDIT_ACCT
Availment Credit account
Real / Type ‘X’
CHG_CUST_ACC
Customer Accounts
Real/Type “X”
COMM_CUST_ACC
Customer Accounts
Real/Type “X”
COLL_CUST_ACC
Customer Accounts
Real/Type “X”
TAX_CUST_ACC
Customer Accounts
Real/Type “X”
COMM_INC
Commission Income
Income
COMM_REC
Commission earned not collected
Asset
COMM_RIA
Commission collected in advance
Liability
CHG_INC
Charge Income
Income
14-4
Accounting Role
Description
Role Type
CHG_REC
Charge receivable
Asset
CHG_EXP
Charge expense
Expense
CHG_PAY
Charge payable
Liability
TAX_PAY
Tax payable
Liability
TAX_EXP
Tax expense
Expense
LC_COLL_BRIDGE
Collateral bridge between LC shipping
guarantee and Bills
Liability
LC_LOAN_BRIDGE
Bridge GL between LC and CL
Liability
14.2 Event-Accounting Entries
In this section we will discuss the suggested accounting entries that should be generated for each
event in the life cycle of an LC.
14.2.1 BISS: Booking of an import LC
Liability
Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit
LC_OCU
LIAB_AMT
Dr
LC_OCU_OFFSET
LIAB_AMT
Cr
Booking LC Contract
When the LC contract gets booked through MT740 processing (Authorization to reimburse), the
accounting entries are passed as follows:
Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit
LC_OCU_OFFSET
LC_OCU
REIM_UND_AMT
REIM_UND_AMT
The following accounting entries are passed for the product to handle the entries for Non
undertaking portion:
Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit
LC_REM_NU_OFF
REIM_NON_UND_AMT
Dr
LC_REM_NU
REIM_NON_UND_AMT
Cr
14-5
Dr
Cr
Collateral (If Any)
Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit
COLL_CUST_ACC
COLL_AMT_OS
Dr
LC_COLL_ACC
COLL_AMT_OSEQ
Cr
Charges
Booking (From Customer Account)
Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit
CHG_CUST_ACC
CHARGES
Dr
CHG_INC
CHARGES
Cr
Booking (From Receivable Account)
Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit
CHG_REC
CHARGES
Dr
CHG_INC
CHARGES
Cr
On Receipt (For booking Under Receivable Account)
Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit
CHG_CUST_ACC
CHARGES
Dr
CHG_REC
CHARGES
Cr
Commission
In Advance (Non - Accrual - On Booking)
Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit
COMM_CUST_ACC
COMMSN
Dr
COMM_INC
COMMSN
Cr
In Advance (Accrual - On Booking)
Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit
COMM_CUST_ACC
COMMSN
Dr
COMM_RIA
COMMSN
Cr
14-6
In Advance (Month-End Accrual)
Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit
COMM_RIA
COMMSN
Dr
COMM_INC
COMMSN
Cr
In Arrears (Non - Accrual - On Booking)
No Entries for Booking
In Arrears (Non - Accrual - On Receipt)
Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit
COMM_CUST_ACC
COMMSN
Dr
COMM_INC
COMMSN
Cr
In Arrears (Accrual - On Booking)
No Entries for Booking
In Arrears (Month - End Accrual)
Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit
COMM_REC
ACCR_COMMSN
Dr
COMM_INC
ACCR_COMMSN
Cr
In Arrears (On Receipt of Commission)
Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit
COMM_CUST_ACC
COMMSN
Dr
COMM_REC
COMMSN
Cr
The following accounting entries are maintained for a shipping guarantee product:
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Dr/Cr
LC_COLL_BRIDGE
COLL_AMT
Dr
LCCOLL_INT_ACCT
COLL_AMT
Cr
LC_OCU_OFFSET
LIAB_OS_AMT
Dr
14-7
LC_OCU
LIAB_OS_AMT
Cr
LCCOLL_INT_ACCT
COLLAT_DECR
Dr
Customer
COLLAT_DECR
Cr
Customer
COLL_AMT_INCR
Dr
LCCOLL_INT_ACCT
COLL_AMT_INCR
Cr
14.2.2 AVAL: Availment Under LC
Liability
Role
Amount Tag
Dr/Cr
LC_OCU
AVAIL_SET_AMT
Cr
LC_OCU_OFFSET
AVAIL_SET_AMTEQ
Dr
LC_OCU
ADV_LIAB_AVAIL_AMT
Cr
LC_OCU_OFFSET
ADV_LIAB_AVAIL_AMT
Dr
LC_CNF_OFF
CNF_LIAB_AVAIL_AMT
Dr
LC_CNF
CNF_LIAB_AVAIL_AMT
Cr
Collateral (If Any)
Role
Amount Tag
Dr/Cr
COLL_CUST_ACC
COLL_AMNDAMT
Cr
LC_COLL_ACCT
COLL_AMNDAMTEQ
Dr
LC_OCU_OFFSET
AVAIL_SET_AMT
Dr
LC_OCU
AVAIL_SET_AMT
Cr
LCCOLL_INT_ACCT
COLL_AMT_DECR
Dr
LC_COLL_BRIDGE
COLL_AMT_DECR
Cr
14.2.3 CLOS: Closure of an LC / Guarantee
Liability
Role
Amount Tag
Dr/Cr
LC_OCU
LIAB_OS_AMT
Cr
14-8
Role
Amount Tag
Dr/Cr
LC_OCU_OFFSET
LIAB_OS_AMT
Dr
LC_OCU
ADV_LIAB_OS_AMT
Cr
LC_OCU_OFFSET
ADV_LIAB_OS_AMT
Dr
LC_CNF
CNF_LIAB_OS_AMT
Cr
LC_CNF_OFFSET
CNF_LIAB_OS_AMT
Dr
Collateral (If Any)
Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit
COLL_CUST_ACC
COLLAMT_OS
Cr
LC_COLL_ACCT
COLLAMT_OSEQ
Dr
When the Export LC is closed, the amount will be reduced proportionately from Confirmed portion
and Unconfirmed portion.
Dr/
Cr
Account role code
Amount tag
LCY Amount
Description
Dr
LC_OCU_OFFSET
(Unutilized Credit Offset)
UCNF_LIAB_OS_AMT
Unconfirmed LC
Amount
Cr
LC_OCU (Outstanding Credit
Unutilized)
UCNF_LIAB_OS_AMT
Unconfirmed LC
Amount
Dr
LC_CNF_OFF (Confirmation
of LC Offset)
CNF_LIAB_OS_AMT
Confirmed LC
Amount
Cr
LC_CNF (Confirmation of LC)
CNF_LIAB_OS_AMT
Confirmed LC
Amount
14.2.4 REIN: Reinstatement of an LC / Guarantee
Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit
LC_OCU
LIAB_REIN_AMT
Dr
LC_OCU_OFFSET
LIAB_REIN_AMT
Cr
LC_OCU
ADV_LIAB_REIN_AMT
Dr
LC_OCU_OFFSET
ADV_LIAB_REIN_AMT
Cr
LC_CNF
CNF_ LIAB_REIN_AMT
Dr
14-9
Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit
LC_CNF_OFF
CNF_ LIAB_REIN_AMT
Cr
The accounting entries for reinstatement for Revolving LC (in case of reinstatement of more than
the confirmed amount) are as follows:
Account role code
Amount tag
Dr/ Cr
LC_OCU (Outstanding Credit
Unutilized)
UCNF_LIAB_REIN_AMT
Dr
LC_OCU_OFFSET (Unutilized
Credit Offset)
UCNF_LIAB_REIN_AMT
Cr
LC_CNF (Confirmation of LC)
CNF_LIAB_REIN_AMT
Dr
LC_CNF_OFF (Confirmation
of LC Offset)
CNF_LIAB_REIN_AMT
Cr
The amount of the Confirmed Portion will be reinstated first. In this case, the entire confirmed
amount is reinstated
Accounting entries for increase in the confirmation as part of amendment are as follows:
Account role code
Amount tag
Dr/ Cr
LC_OCU_OFFSET (Unutilized
Credit Offset)
CNF_LIAB_INCR_AMT
Dr
LC_OCU (Outstanding Credit
Unutilized)
CNF_LIAB_INCR_AMT
Cr
LC_CNF (Confirmation of LC)
CNF_LIAB_INCR_AMT
Dr
LC_CNF_OFF (Confirmation
of LC Offset)
CNF_LIAB_INCR_AMT
Cr
Accounting entries for decrease in the confirmation as part of amendment are as follows:
Account role code
Amount tag
Dr/ Cr
LC_CNF_OFF (Confirmation
of LC Offset)
CNF_LIAB_DECR_AMT
Dr
LC_CNF (Confirmation of LC
Offset)
CNF_LIAB_DECR_AMT
Cr
LC_OCU (Outstanding Credit
CNF_LIAB_DECR_AMT
Dr
14-10
Unutilized)
LC_OCU_OFF (Outstanding
Credit Unutilized Offset)
CNF_LIAB_DECR_AMT
Cr
If the amendment is done for change of confirmation amount, if any charges associated with this
event with Basis Amount as Confirmation amount will be collected along with other charges
associated with this event.
14.2.5 BADV: Advising an LC
Booking LC Advice
Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit
LC_OCU
ADV_LIAB_OS_AMT
Dr
LC_OCU_OFFSET
ADV_LIAB_OS_AMT
Cr
Charges/ Commission
As given in event BISS
14.2.6 BCFM: Confirming an LC
Liability
Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit
LC_OCU
LIAB_AMT
Dr
LC_OCU_OFFSET
LIAB_AMT
Cr
Collateral (If Any)
Role
Amount Tag
Debit/Credit
COLL_CUST_ACC
COLL_AMT_OS
Cr
LC_COLL_ACCT
COLL_AMT_OSEQ
Dr
Charges/ Commission
As given in event BISS
14.2.7 BPRE: Pre-advising an LC
The accounting entries passed for BPRE are similar to those passed for BISS event.
14-11
14.2.8 BANC: Advising and Confirming An LC
Role
Amount Tag
Dr/Cr
LC_CNF
CNF_LIAB_OS_AMT
Dr
LC_CNF_OFFSET
CNF_LIAB_OS_AMT
Cr
14.2.9 AMND: Amendment
Liability
Reverse all the previous entries for booking. Re-book entries based on BISS or BADV or BPRE
or BANC.
Role
Amount Tag
Dr/Cr
LC_OCU
ADV_LIAB_OS_AMT
Dr
LC_OCU_OFFSET
ADV_LIAB_OS_AMT
Cr
LC_CNF
CNF_LIAB_OS_AMT
Dr
LC_CNF_OFFSET
CNF_LIAB_OS_AMT
Cr
Undertaking Amount
When Undertaking Amount is reduced as part of amendment, the accounting entries passed
during “AMND” event are as follows:
Role
Amount tag
Dr/Cr
LC_OCU
REIM_NON_UND_AMT
Dr
LC_OCU_OFFSET
REIM_NON_UND_AMT
Cr
LC_REM_NU_OFF
REIM_NON_UND_AMT
Dr
LC_REM_NU
REIM_NON_UND_AMT
Cr
When Undertaking Amount is increased as part of amendment, the accounting entries passed
during “AMND” event are as follows:
Role
Amount tag
Dr/Cr
LC_OCU_OFFSET
REIM_UND_AMT
Dr
LC_OCU
REIM_UND_AMT
Cr
14-12
14.2.10
AOCF: Amendment from Open to Open and Confirm
None
14.2.11
APAD: Amendment from Pre-advice to Advice
None
14.2.12
APAC: Amendment from Pre-advice to Advice and Confirm
Same as For BISS
14.2.13
REVR: Reversal
Reverse out all the accounting entries booked for the contract till date.
14.2.14
ACCR: Accrual of Commission
See Commissions under event BISS.
14.2.15
CALC: Periodic Commission Calculation Date
No entries due to commission calculation.
14.2.16
CLIQ: Liquidation of Commission
LC Status Change
Role
Amount Tag
Dr/Cr
<component>INC
<Component>_MOVINC
Dr
<component>NORMINC
<Component>_MOVINC
Cr
See Commissions under event BISS.
14.2.17
ROPN: Reopening of an LC
Liability
Role
Amount Tag
Dr/Cr
LC_OCU
LIAB_OS_AMT
Dr
LC_OCU_OFFSET
LIAB_OS_AMT
Cr
LC_OCU
ADV_LIAB_OS_AMT
Dr
14-13
Role
Amount Tag
Dr/Cr
LC_OCU_OFFSET
ADV_LIAB_OS_AMT
Cr
LC_CNF
CNF_LIAB_OS_AMT
Dr
LC_CNF_OFFSET
CNF_LIAB_OS_AMT
Cr
Collateral (If Any)
Role
Amount Tag
Dr/Cr
COLL_CUST_ACC
COLLAMT_OS
Dr
LC_COLL_ACCT
COLLAMT_OS_EQ
Cr
14.2.18
CANC: Cancellation of an LC
Role
Amount Tag
Dr/Cr
LC_OCU
LIAB_OS_AMT
Cr
LC_OCU_OFFSET
LIAB_OS_AMT
Dr
LC_OCU
ADV_LIAB_OS_AMT
Cr
LC_OCU_OFFSET
ADV_LIAB_OS_AMT
Dr
LC_CNF
CNF_LIAB_OS_AMT
Cr
LC_CNF_OFFSET
CNF_LIAB_OS_AMT
Dr
The following accounting entries are maintained in Shipping Guarantee product:
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Dr/Cr
LC_OCU_OFFSET
LIAB_OS_AMT
Dr
LC_OCU
LIAB_OS_AMT
Cr
LCCOLL_INT_ACCT
COLL_AMT_DECR
Dr
LC_COLL_BRIDGE
COLL_AMT_DECR
Cr
14.2.19
TRGN: Generation of Tracers
None
14-14
14.2.20
AATC: Amendment from Advice to Confirm
Role
Amount Tag
Dr/Cr
LC_OCU
LIAB_OS_AMT
Cr
LC_OCU_OFFSET
LIAB_OS_AMT
Dr
LC_OCU
ADV_LIAB_OS_AMT
Cr
LC_OCU_OFFSET
ADV_LIAB_OS_AMT
Dr
LC_CNF
CNF_LIAB_OS_AMT
Dr
LC_CNF_OFFSET
CNF_LIAB_OS_AMT
Cr
14.2.21
RASN: Reassign an LC
None
14.2.22
Transfer of an LC
When an Export LC is transferred, the amount in the old LC (From LC) would be reduced
proportionately from Confirmed portion and Unconfirmed portion as part of AVAL event.
Dr/
Cr
Account role code
Amount tag
LCY Amount
Description
Dr
LC_OCU_OFFSET
(Unutilized Credit Offset)
UCNF_LIAB_AVAIL_AM
T
Unconfirmed LC
Amount
Cr
LC_OCU (Outstanding Credit
Unutilized)
UCNF_LIAB_AVAIL_AM
T
Unconfirmed LC
Amount
Dr
LC_CNF_OFF (Confirmation
of LC Offset)
CNF_LIAB_AVAIL_AMT
Confirmed LC
Amount
Cr
LC_CNF (Confirmation of LC)
CNF_LIAB_AVAIL_AMT
Confirmed LC
Amount
The new Export LC contract will have the same split of Confirmed LC amout and Unconfirmed LC
amount as it was there in the old LC.
Dr/
Cr
Account role code
Amount tag
LCY Amount
Description
Dr
LC_OCU (Outstanding Credit
Unutilized)
UCNF_LIAB_OS_AMT
Unconfirmed LC
Amount
Cr
LC_OCU_OFFSET
(Unutilized Credit Offset)
UCNF_LIAB_OS_AMT
Unconfirmed LC
Amount
14-15
Dr
LC_CNF (Confirmation of LC)
CNF_LIAB_OS_AMT
Partial Confirmation
Amount
Cr
LC_CNF_OFF (Confirmation
of LC Offset)
CNF_LIAB_OS_AMT
Partial Confirmation
Amount
14.2.23
RAVL: Reversal of Availment
Fetch entries for last availment event and reverse them.
14.2.24
14.2.25
BKSG: Booking of Shipping Guarantee
Role
Amount Tag
Dr/Cr
LC_OCU
AVAIL_SET_AMT
Dr
LC_OCU_OFFSET
AVAIL_SET_AMT
Cr
LCCOLL_INT_ACCT
COLL_AMT_DECR
Dr
LC_COLL_BRIDGE
COLL_AMT_DECR
Cr
CASG: Cancellation of Shipping Guarantee
The following accounting entries are maintained for cancellation of Shipping Guarantee:
14.2.26
Accounting Role
Amount Tag
Dr/Cr
LC_OCU
AVAIL_SET_AMT
Dr
LC_OCU_OFFSET
AVAIL_SET_AMT
Cr
LC_COLL_BRIDGE
COLL_AMT_INCR
Dr
LCCOLL_INT_ACCT
COLL_AMT_INCR
Cr
APRE: Amendment of LC with Pre-advice
The accounting entries passed for BPRE are similar to those passed for AMND event.
14-16
15. Annexure B – Events, Advices and SDEs for LC
15.1 Event - Advices for LCs
This Annexure contains details of the suggested messages that can be generated for the LC
module. The annexure lists details of the suggested messages event-wise.
15.2 LC Advices
The following is an exhaustive list of events, related advices and the Data Tags that are
supported for LC Module.
EVENT
EVENT DESCRIPTION
ADVICES
Advice description
BISS
Booking of an import LC
ISB_BEN_CL
Covering letter to beneficiary
LC_AMND_INSTR
Amendment Instrument
LC_CASH_COL_ADV
Cash Collateral Advices
LC_INSTRUMENT
L/C instrument
GUARANTEE
Guarantee Instrument
LC_INSTR_COPY
Copy of LC Instrument
CLOS
Closure of an LC /
Guarantee
Nil
REIN:
Reinstatement of an LC /
Guarantee
LC_AMND_INSTR
Amendment Instrument
LC_INSTRUMENT
L/C instrument
BADV:
Advising an LC
LC_ACK_ADVICE
ACK of import LC
BCFM:
Confirming an LC
LC_ACK_ADVICE
ACK of import LC
LC_CASH_COL_ADV
Cash Collateral Advices
LC_ACK_ADVICE
ACK of import LC
PADV_CL
Pre-advising a Credit
NTF_FOR_BPRE
Notification for LC booking with
pre-advice
LC_ACK_ADVICE
ACK of import LC
BPRE:
BANC:
Pre-advising an LC
Advising and confirming an
LC
15-1
EVENT
REIS:
AMND:
EVENT DESCRIPTION
Reissue of Guarantee
LC amendments
ADVICES
Advice description
LC_CASH_COL_ADV
Cash Collateral Advices
LC_INSTRUMENT
L/C instrument
GUARANTEE
Guarantee Instrument
LC_PRE_ADVICE
Pre Advice Telex
AMD_EXP_CR
Amendment of Export Credit
LC_ACK_AMND
ACK of Amendment to LC
LC_CASH_COL_ADV
Cash Collateral Advices
LC_AMD_AUTH_REB
Amendment-auth to reimburse
AMD_IMP_CR
Amendment of Import Credit
GUA_AMD_INSTR
Guarantee Amendment
LC_AMND_INSTR
Amendment Instrument
LC_INSTRUMENT
L/C instrument
GUA_AMD_INSTR
Guarantee Amendment
LC_AM_INST_COPY
Copy of LC Amend Instrument
ACCR:
Accrual of commission
Nil
CALC:
Periodic commission
calculation date
Nil
ROPN:
Reopening of an LC
LC_INSTRUMENT
L/C instrument
GUARANTEE
Guarantee Instrument
ACK_TRACER
Acknowledgement tracer
CHG_COM_TRACER
Charges & commission tracer
CON_TRACER
Confirmation tracer
LC_CANCEL_ADV
Cancellation Advice
NTF_FOR_CANC
Cancellation of LC pre-advice
TRGN:
CANC:
End of day check for
tracers
Cancellation of an LC
15-2
EVENT
EVENT DESCRIPTION
ADVICES
Advice description
APAC:
Amendment from PreAdvice to Advice and
Confirm
PADV_TO_ADVCON
Pre-adv to adv & confirm
AMD_EXP_CR
Amendment of Export Credit
LC_ACK_AMND
ACK of Amendment to LC
LC_CASH_COL_ADV
Cash Collateral Advices
AMD_EXP_CR
Amendment of Export Credit
LC_ACK_AMND
ACK of Amendment to LC
APAD:
Amendment from Preadvice to Advice
ADV_TO_ADVCON
AMD_EXP_CR
ADV_TO_ADVCON
Adv to adv & confirm
AMD_EXP_CR
Amendment of Export Credit
RASN:
Reassign an LC
Nil
RAVL:
Reversal of availment
Nil
CALC:
Periodic commission
calculation
Nil
APRE
Amendment of Pre-advice
LC
NTF_FOR_APRE
Notification for amendment of LC
pre-advice
ADV_FOR_APRE
Advice for LC pre-advice
15.2.1 ISB_BEN_CL
ADVICE TAGS
DESCRIPTION
Tab/Button-FIELD
NAME
Varchar/Number/Date
_BRANCHDATE_
Branch Date
System Date for the
Branch
Date
_RECV-NAME_
Receiver Name
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
Varchar
150
_RECV-ADDRLN1_
Receiver
Information
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
Varchar
105
_RECV-ADDR-
Receiver
Contract Input Screen-
Varchar
105
15-3
Length
LN2_
Information
Settlement Tab
_RECV-ADDRLN3_
Receiver
Information
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
Varchar
105
_RECV-ADDRLN4_
Receiver
Information
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
Varchar
105
_OUR-REF-NO_
Sender's contract
reference no
Contract Input ScreenReference Number
Varchar
35
_USERREF_
User Reference
No
Contract Input ScreenUser Reference
Number
Varchar
35
_APP-NAME_
Applicant name
Contract Input ScreenParties-Party detailscustomer name
_APP-ADDRLN1_
Applicant
address
Contract Input ScreenParties-party detailsaddress1
varchar
105
_APP-ADDRLN2_
Applicant
address
Contract Input ScreenParties-party detailsaddress2
varchar
105
_APP-ADDRLN3_
Applicant
address
Contract Input ScreenParties-party detailsaddress3
varchar
105
_APP-ADDRLN4_
Applicant
address
Contract Input ScreenParties-party detailsaddress4
varchar
105
_OTHER-FFTS_
Other Free
Format Texts
Letters of CreditContract InputDetailed-Advices TabFFTS Details
Varchar
2000
_SND2RECINFO_
Sender to
Receiver
Information
Contract Input ScreenAdvices
Varchar
2000
Branch Name
Branch Parameters
detailed - Branch
Name
varchar
105
Varchar/Number/Date
Length
Varchar
105
_BRANCHNAME_
150
15.2.2 LC_AMND_INSTR (MT 707)
ADVICE TAGS
DESCRIPTION
Tab/Button-FIELD
NAME
_ISB-ADDR-LN1_
This is the mailing
address of the
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties-Party
15-4
issuing bank
details-Address1
_ISB-ADDR-LN2_
This is the mailing
address of the
issuing bank
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties-Party
details-Address2
Varchar
105
_ISB-ADDR-LN3_
This is the mailing
address of the
issuing bank
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties-Party
details-Address3
Varchar
105
_ISB-ADDR-LN4_
This is the mailing
address of the
issuing bank
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties-Party
details-Address4
Varchar
105
_AMND-DATE_
This is the date
on which the
details of the
documentary
credit were last
amended.
LC Contract Input
Screen-Main
Date
_NO-OFAMENDS_
If the
documentary
credit has been
amended more
than once then
the number of
times it was
amended will be
displayed here.
LC Contract Input
Screen-othersAmendment Number
Number
_NEW-EXPIRYDATE_
This is the new
expiry date of the
documentary
credit.
LC Contract Input
Screen-Main-Expiry
Date
Date
_INC-LCAMOUNT_
This amount
reflects the
increase in the
documentary
credit amount.
LC Contract Input
Screen-Main-Amount
Number
_NEW-AMTWORDS_
If there has been
an increase in the
documentary
credit amount
then this is the
new amount
expressed in
words
System derived from
LC Contract Input
Screen-Main
Varchar
LC Contract Input
Screen-Main-Amount
Number
_DEC-LCAMOUNT_
This amount
reflects the
decrease in the
documentary
15-5
4
22,3
22,3
credit amount.
_NEW-AMTWORDS_
If there has been
a decrease in the
documentary
credit amount
then this is the
new amount
expressed in
words.
System derived from
LC Contract Input
Screen-Main
Varchar
_LC-AMOUNT_
This is the
amount for which
the LC was
opened.
LC Contract Input
Screen-Main-contract
Amount
Number
_AMT-INWORDS_
This is the new
LC amount
expressed in
words
System derived from
LC Contract Input
Screen-Main
Varchar
_SND2RECINFO_
These are a set
of instructions or
additional
information meant
for the receiver.
LC Contract Input
Screen-Advices
Varchar
22,3
2000
15.2.3 LC_INSTRUMENT (MT 700/MT 701)
ADVICE
TAGS
DESCRIPTION
Tab/Button-FIELD NAME
Varchar/Number/Date
_ISSUEDATE_
This is the date
on which the LC
was issued.
Issue date- Main ScreenIssue date
date
_APBNAME_
This is the name
of the applicant
bank.
LC Contract Input ScreenParties- Customer Name
VarChar
150
_APB-ADDRLN1_
This is the
address for
correspondence
of the applicant
bank.
LC Contract Input ScreenParties-Party detailsaddress1
VarChar
105
_APB-ADDRLN2_
This is the
address for
correspondence
of the applicant
bank.
LC Contract Input ScreenParties-Party detailsaddress2
VarChar
105
This is the
address for
LC Contract Input ScreenParties-Party details-
VarChar
105
_APB-ADDRLN3_
15-6
Length
correspondence
of the applicant
bank.
address3
_APB-ADDRLN4_
This is the
address for
correspondence
of the applicant
bank.
LC Contract Input ScreenParties-Party detailsaddress4
VarChar
105
_CR-DAYSFROM1_
The information
that has been
entered in the
Drafts screen of
the LC Contract
screen is
displayed here.
LC Contract Input ScreenDrafts-credit days from
Varchar
107
_DRAFTAMT_
This is the
amount for
which the draft
was drawn on.
LC Contract Input ScreenDrafts-Amount
Number
22,3
_TENOR1_
This is the tenor
of the draft that
is drawn for the
LC. The tenor is
expressed in
terms of days.
LC Contract Input ScreenDrafts
Number
10
_NODRAFTS_
These are the
number of drafts
that can be
drawn.
LC Contract Input ScreenDrafts-Draft Tenor
Number
4
_PAYMENTDETAILS_
This field
contains details
pertaining to
reference
numbers,
invoice numbers
and any other
details which
enable the
beneficiary to
identify the
transaction.
LC Contract Input-DetailedMain Tab
VarChar
140
_PARTIALSHP_
This field
indicates
whether the
partial shipment
of goods is
allowed or
disallowed.
LC Contract Input ScreenShips/docs-shipmentPartial shipment allowed
VarChar
1
15-7
_TRANSSHP_
This field
indicates
whether transshipment of
goods is
allowed.
LC Contract Input ScreenShips/docs-shipment-trans
shipment allowed
Varchar
1
_SHIPMENTDET_
These are
additional
details for the
shipment of the
merchandise.
LC Contract Input ScreenShips/docs-shipmentAdditional shipment details
VarChar
Long
_SHIPMENTMARK_
These are the
specific
shipment marks
applicable for
the shipment.
LC Contract Input ScreenShip/Documents-Shipping
Marks
VarChar
2000
_GOODSDESCR_
This is the
description of
the commodity
LC Contract Input ScreenShips/docs- Goodsdescription
VarChar
Long
_DOCDESCR_
This is the
description of
the document
code.
LC Contract Input ScreenShips/docs- Documentsdescription
VarChar
255
_CLAUSES_
This is the
clause code that
should
accompany the
document
required for the
bill being
processed.
LC Contract Input ScreenShips/docs- Clauses
Details
Varchar
12
_OTHERFFTS_
This is the code
that identifies
the additional
conditions that
should
accompany the
advice.
Letters of Credit-Contract
Input-Detailed-Advices
Tab-FFTS Details
VarChar
2000
_CHGFROM-BEN_
This field
corresponds to
field 71B of the
S.W.I.F.T
message MT
700.
LC Contract Input ScreenOthers-Charges From
Beneficiary
VarChar
210
LC Contract Input Screen
others screen-Period of
presentation field
VarChar
140
_PR-DATE_
This field
corresponds to
field 48 of the
15-8
S.W.I.F.T
message MT
700.
_OPERATIO
N-CODE_
This is the code
that identifies
the additional
instructions.
Letters of Credit-Contract
Input-Detailed-Main Screen
Varchar
3
_REBNAME_
This is the name
of the
reimbursement
bank.
LC Contract Input ScreenParties-Party details
VarChar
150
_REB-ADDRLN1_
This is the name
of the
reimbursement
bank.
LC Contract Input ScreenParties-Party detailsaddress1
VarChar
105
_REB-ADDRLN2_
This is the name
of the
reimbursement
bank.
LC Contract Input ScreenParties-Party detailsaddress2
VarChar
105
_REB-ADDRLN3_
This is the name
of the
reimbursement
bank.
LC Contract Input ScreenParties-Party detailsaddress3
VarChar
105
_REB-ADDRLN4_
This is the name
of the
reimbursement
bank.
LC Contract Input ScreenParties-Party detailsaddress4
VarChar
105
_ATBNAME_
This is the name
of the bank
through which
the advice is
routed.
LC Contract Input ScreenParties -Party details
VarChar
150
_ATB-ADDRLN1_
This is the
address of bank
through which
the advice is
routed. Each
line of the
address can
contain a
maximum of 35
characters.
LC Contract Input ScreenParties - Party detailsaddress1
VarChar
105
LC Contract Input ScreenParties - Party detailsaddress2
VarChar
105
_ATB-ADDRLN2_
-Do -
15-9
_ATB-ADDRLN3_
_ISB-NAME_
-Do This is the name
of the issuing
bank.
LC Contract Input ScreenParties - Party detailsaddress3
VarChar
105
LC Contract Input ScreenParties
VarChar
150
15.2.4 GUARANTEE (MT 760)
ADVICE TAGS
DESCRIPTION
_GU-DET_
These are the details of the guarantee.
15.2.5 LC_INSTR_COPY
ADVICE
TAGS
_GUDET_
DESCRIPTION
Tab/Button-FIELD NAME
Varchar/Number/Date
These are the
details of the
guarantee.
LC Contract Input Screen Details of Guarantee such as
Applicant, Beneficiary, Amount,
Expiry date, and so on, as
entered in the contract
Varchar
Length
15.2.6 LC_ACK_ADVICE (MT 730)
ADVICE
TAGS
DESCRIPTION
Tab/Button-FIELD NAME
Varchar/Number/Date
Length
_ACCOUNTIDENTY_
This is the unique
identity
associated with
the account
LC Contract Input ScreenOthers-Charges from issuing
Bank-Account
Varchar
35
_ACKSENTDATE_
This is the date
as on which the
message was
acknowledged.
LC Contract Input Screen-Dated
Field under the Customer
Date
_CHRGSFROM-ISB_
These are the
charges levied by
the issuing bank
for processing the
LC.
LC Contract Input ScreenOthers-Charges from issuing
Bank -description
Varchar
_AMT-INWORDS_
This is amount for
which the LC was
opened, reflected
in words.
System derived from Letters of
Credit-Contract Input-DetailedMain Tab
Varchar
15.2.7 PADV_CL
15-10
210
ADVICE TAGS
DESCRIPTION
Tab/Button-FIELD
NAME
Varchar/Number/Date
Length
_REVOCABLE_
This indicates the
nature of the LC
whether it is
revocable or
irrevocable.
LC Contract Input
Screen -Main- Type (As maintained in the
product)
Varchar
1
_TRANSFERABLE_
This indicates
whether the LC is
transferable or nontransferable.
LC Contract Input
Screen - Main - terms
Varchar
1
_SETL-TYPE_
This is the type of
credit for which the
LC is being
processed.
Letters of CreditContract InputDetailed-Main TabCredit
Varchar
1
_CUMULATIVE_
For an LC which
revolves in value
this reflects
whether the
method of
reinstatement is
cumulative or noncumulative.
LC Contract Input
Screen - Main - Under
Revolving details
Varchar
1
_REINSTAT-TYPE_
This indicates
whether the
reinstatement is
Auto or Manual.
LC Contract Input
Screen - Main - Under
Revolving details
Varcahar
1
_REVOLVES-IN_
This indicates
whether the LC
revolves in time or
in value. A
revolving LC will be
reinstated in time or
value based on
whether the LC is
cumulative or noncumulative.
LC Contract Input
Screen - Main - Under
Revolving details
Varchar
1
_OUR-REF-NO_
This is the
reference number
you have assigned
to the LC.
LC Contract Input
Screen - Main
Number
35
_THEIR-REF-NO_
This is the unique
reference number
assigned to the
party involved in
the LC.
LC Contract Input
Screen - Main - under
Customer
Number
35
15-11
_EXPIRY-DATE_
This is the date up
to which the LC is
valid.
LC Contract Input
Screen - Main - under
Terms-expiry date
Date
_EXPIRY-PLACE_
This is the city,
country or bank
where the LC
expires.
LC Contract Input
Screen - Main - under
Terms - expiry place
Varchar
29
_APP-NAME_
This is the name of
the LC applicant.
LC Contract Input
Screen - Parties Party details
Varchar
150
_APP-ADDR-LN1_
This is the address
of the LC applicant.
Each line of the
address can
contain a maximum
of 35 characters.
LC Contract Input
Screen - Parties Party details address1
Varchar
105
- DO -
LC Contract Input
Screen - Parties Party details address2
Varchar
105
- DO -
LC Contract Input
Screen - Parties Party details address3
Varchar
105
- DO -
LC Contract Input
Screen - Parties Party details address4
Varchar
105
This is the name of
the
institution/company
in favor of whom
the LC is drawn.
LC Contract Input
Screen - Parties
screen - Party details
Varchar
150
This is the address
of the beneficiary
LC Contract Input
Screen - Parties
screen - Party details
- address1
Varchar
105
This is the address
of the beneficiary
LC Contract Input
Screen - Parties
screen - Party details
- address2
Varchar
105
This is the address
of the beneficiary
LC Contract Input
Screen - Parties
screen - Party details
- address3
Varchar
105
_APP-ADDR-LN2_
_APP-ADDR-LN3_
_APP-ADDR-LN4_
_BEN-NAME_
_BEN-ADDR-LN1_
_BEN-ADDR-LN2_
_BEN-ADDR-LN3_
15-12
_BEN-ADDR-LN4_
This is the address
of the beneficiary
LC Contract Input
Screen - Parties
screen - Party details
- address4
_LC-AMOUNT_
This is the amount
for which the LC
has been opened.
LC Contract Input
Screen - Main
Number
_AMT-IN-WORDS_
This is the LC
amount in words.
System derived from
Letter of CreditContract InputDetailed-Main Tab
Varchar
_TOLERANCE_
This indicates the
positive and
negative tolerance
of the LC amount.
LC Contract Input
Screen - Main
Number
7
_TOLR-TEXT_
If the tolerance
amount has not
been specified then
this field is
populated with ‘Not
Exceeding’.
Letter of CreditContract InputDetailed-Main TabTolerance
Varchar
1
_ADDL-AMT_
This field
corresponds to field
39C of the
S.W.I.F.T
messages Mt 700
and MT 740
LC Contract Input
Screen - others additional amounts
covered
Varchar
140
_CR-AVL-WITH_
This indicates the
S.W.I.F.T. address
of the bank where
the amount availed
under the LC
should be credited
with.
Contract Input
Screen-Main under
credit -with
Varchar
140
_CR-AVL-BY_
This indicates
whether the credit
will be availed by
Payment,
Acceptance etc.
Letters of CreditContract InputDetailed-Main TabCredit
Varchar
1
_FROM-PLACE_
This indicates
where the taking in
charge at/loading
on board or
dispatching the
goods is to take
place.
LC Contract Input
Screen Ship/Documents Shipment - from
Varchar
65
15-13
Varchar
105
22,3
_TO-PLACE_
This is the place
where the goods
have to be
transported to.
LC Contract Input
Screen Ship/Documents Shipment - to
Varchar
_LATEST-SHPDATE_
This is the date by
which the shipment
of the goods has to
take place
LC Contract Input
Screen Ship/Documents Shipment - latest
shipment date
Date
_SHIPMENTPERIOD_
This information
pertains to the
place from and to
which goods are to
be dispatched or
transported.
LC Contract Input
Screen Ship/Documents Shipment - shipment
period
Varchar
395
_GOODS-DESCR_
This field holds the
full description of
the merchandise
traded under the
LC for which the
advice is being
generated.
LC Contract Input
Screen Ship/Documents Goods- discription
Varchar
Long
_ATB-NAME_
This is the name of
the bank through
whom the advice is
routed
LC Contract Input
Screen - Parties Party details-customer
Name
_ATB-ADDR-LN1_
This is the mailing
address of the bank
through whom the
advice is routed.
LC Contract Input
Screen - Parties Party details-address1
Varchar
150
_PRE-ADVICE_
This is the
description of the
pre advice.
LC Contract Input
Screen Ship/Documents Goods
Varchar
255
_LC-TYPE_
This indicates
whether the LC is
an Import LC or an
Export LC.
Letters of CreditContract InputDetailed-Main Screen
- type
Varchar
1
_PRE-ADVICE_
These are the
details of the
guarantee.
LC Contract Input
Screen Ship/Documents Goods
Varchar
255
65
11
15.2.8 LC_PRE_ADVICE (MT 705)
ADVICE
DESCRIPTION
Tab/Button-FIELD NAME
15-14
Varchar/Number/Date
Length
TAGS
_BRANCHDATE_
System Date for the
Branch
_RECVNAME_
Receiver Name
_RECVADDR-LN1_
Receiver Information
_RECVADDR-LN2_
Date
varchar
150
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
varchar
105
Receiver Information
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
varchar
105
_RECVADDR-LN3_
Receiver Information
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
varchar
105
_RECVADDR-LN4_
Receiver Information
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
varchar
105
_REVOCABL
E_
LC Contract Input Screen Main- Type
Varchar
1
_TRANSFER
ABLE_
LC Contract Input Screen Main
varchar
1
_SETLTYPE_
Letters of Credit-Contract
Input-Detailed-Main TabCredit
Varchar
1
_CUMULATI
VE_
LC Contract Input Screen Main - Cumulative
varchar
1
_REVOLVES
-IN_
Letter of Credit-Contract
Input-Detailed-Main TabRevolving Details
Varchar
1
_OUR-REFNO_
Letter of Credit-Contract
Input-Detailed-Main TabTerms
Varchar
35
_USERREF_
Letter of Credit-Contract
Input-Detailed-Main
Screen
varchar
35
_EXPIRYDATE_
LC Contract Input ScreenMain- expiry date
Date
_EXPIRYPLACE_
LC Contract Input ScreenMain - expiry place
varchar
_REINSTATTYPE_
15-15
29
_APPNAME_
This is the name of
the LC applicant.
Contract Input ScreenParties- Party detailscustomer name
varchar
150
_APP-ADDRLN1_
This is the address of
the LC applicant.
Each line of the
address can contain a
maximum of 35
characters.
Contract Input ScreenParties- Party detailsaddress1
varchar
105
- DO -
Contract Input ScreenParties- Party detailsaddress2
varchar
105
- DO -
Contract Input ScreenParties- Party detailsaddress3
varchar
105
- DO -
Contract Input ScreenParties- Party detailsaddress4
varchar
105
_BENNAME_
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details- customer name
varchar
150
_BEN-ADDRLN1_
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details- address1
varchar
105
_BEN-ADDRLN2_
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details- address2
varchar
105
_BEN-ADDRLN3_
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details- address3
varchar
105
_BEN-ADDRLN4_
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details- address4
varchar
105
_LCAMOUNT_
LC Contract Input Screen Main
_AMT-INWORDS_
System derived from Letter
of Credit-Contract InputDetailed-Main Tab
varchar
_TOLERANC
E_
Letter of Credit-Contract
Input-Detailed-Main TabTolerance
Varchar
_APP-ADDRLN2_
_APP-ADDRLN3_
_APP-ADDRLN4_
15-16
22,3
7
_TOLRTEXT_
Letter of Credit-Contract
Input-Detailed-Main TabTolerance
_ADDLAMT_
Letter of Credit-Contract
Input-Detailed- others
_CR-AVLWITH_
Varchar
1
Contract Input ScreenMain under credit -with
varchar
140
_CR-AVLBY_
Contract Input ScreenMain under credit -with
varchar
1
_FROMPLACE_
Letter of Credit-Contract
Input-DetailedShip/Documents TabShipment
Varchar
65
_TO-PLACE_
Letter of Credit-Contract
Input-DetailedShip/Documents TabShipment
Varchar
65
_LATESTSHP-DATE_
Letter of Credit-Contract
Input-DetailedShip/Documents TabShipment
Date
_SHIPMENTPERIOD_
Letter of Credit-Contract
Input-DetailedShip/Documents TabShipment
Varchar
395
_GOODSDESCR_
Letter of Credit-Contract
Input-DetailedShip/Documents TabGoods
Varchar
Long
_ATBNAME_
LC Contract Input ScreenParties -Party detailscustomer name
Varchar
150
_ATB-ADDRLN1_
LC Contract Input ScreenParties -Party details address1
Varchar
105
_ATB-ADDRLN2_
LC Contract Input ScreenParties -Party details address2
Varchar
105
_ATB-ADDRLN3_
LC Contract Input ScreenParties -Party details address3
Varchar
105
15-17
LC Contract Input ScreenParties -Party details address4
Varchar
105
LC Contract Input Screen Ship/Documents - Goods
Varchar
255
_OTHERFFTS_
Letters of Credit-Contract
Input-Detailed-Advices
Tab-FFTS Details
Varchar
2000
_SND2RECI
NFO_
Contract Input ScreenAdvices
Varchar
2000
_BRANCHNAME_
Branch Parameters
detailed - Branch Name
varchar
105
Tab/Button-FIELD NAME
Varchar/Number/Date
Length
System Date for the Branch
Date
_ATB-ADDRLN4_
_PREADVICE_
This is the description
of the pre advice.
15.2.9 LC_ACK_AMEND
ADVICE
TAGS
DESCRIPTION
_BRANCHDATE_
_RECVNAME_
Receiver Name
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
varchar
150
_RECVADDR-LN1_
Receiver Information
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
varchar
105
_RECVADDR-LN2_
Receiver Information
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
varchar
105
_RECVADDR-LN3_
Receiver Information
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
varchar
105
_RECVADDR-LN4_
Receiver Information
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
varchar
105
_OUR-REFNO_
Letters of Credit-Contract
Input-Detailed-Main Tab
varchar
35
_USERREF_
Letters of Credit-Contract
Input-Detailed-Main Screen
varchar
35
_THEIRREF-NO_
Letters of Credit-Contract
Input-Detailed-Main
Screen-their reference
number
varchar
35
_LCAMOUNT_
LC Contract Input ScreenMain
Number
22,3
15-18
System Derived from the
LC contract input-main
screen
varchar
_BENNAME_
This is the name of
the
institution/company in
favor of whom the LC
is drawn.
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details- customer name
varchar
150
_BENADDR-LN1_
This is the address of
the beneficiary
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - address1
varchar
105
_BENADDR-LN2_
This is the address of
the beneficiary
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - address2
varchar
105
_BENADDR-LN3_
This is the address of
the beneficiary
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - address3
varchar
105
_BENADDR-LN4_
This is the address of
the beneficiary
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - address4
varchar
105
_OTHERFFTS_
Letters of Credit-Contract
Input-Detailed-Advices TabFFTS Details
varchar
2000
_SND2RECI
NFO_
Contract Input ScreenAdvices
varchar
2000
Branch Parameters detailed
- Branch Name
varchar
105
Length
_AMT-INWORDS_
_BRANCHNAME_
15.2.10
Name of the Branch
LC_CASH_COL_ADV
ADVICE TAGS
DESCRIPTION
Tab/Button-FIELD
NAME
Varchar/Number/Date
_VDATE_
This is the value
date of the contract
LC Contract Input ScreenMain
Date
_SETLAMOUNT_
This is the amount
or percentage of the
maximum LC
amount
LC Contract Input ScreenCollateral Tab-Amount or
Percentage
Number
_SETL-AMTWORDS_
This is the
settlement amount
expressed in words.
System derived from LC
Contract Input ScreenCollateral Tab-Amount or
Percentage
Varchar
15-19
22,3
_COLLATERALAMT_
This is the value of
the cash collateral
expressed in the
collateral currency.
LC Contract Input ScreenCollateral Tab-collateral
amount
Number
_COLL-AMTWORDS_
This is the collateral
amount expressed
in words
System derived from LC
Contract Input ScreenCollateral Tab
Varchar
_COLLATERALCCY_
This is the currency
in which the cash
collateral is
collected.
LC Contract Input ScreenCollateral Tab-collateral
currency
Varchar
3
_EX-RATE_
This is the
exchange rate to be
used if the collateral
currency is different
from the currency of
the account from
which it is collected.
LC Contract Input ScreenCollateral Tab-Exchange
Rate
Number
24,12
_ACCOUNT_
This is the
identification
number assigned to
the account which
has been debited
LC Contract Input ScreenSettlement details Account details
Varchar
20
15.2.11
22,3
LC_AMD_AUTH_REB (MT 747)
ADVICE TAGS
DESCRIPTION
NOT AVAILABLE
15.2.12
AMD_IMP_CR
ADVICE TAGS
DESCRIPTION
NOT AVAILABLE
15.2.13
GUA_AMD_INSTR (MT 767)
ADVICE
TAGS
DESCRIPTION
Tab/Button-FIELD NAME
Varchar/Number/Date
Length
_GUATYPE_
If the LC being
processed is a
guarantee, this field
indicates the
guarantee type.
LC Contract Input ScreenMain - Guarantee Type
VarChar
105
_LC-
This is the
Letters of Credit-Contract
Input-Detailed-Main Tab-
Number
22,3
15-20
AMOUNT_
Guarantee amount.
contract amount
_INC-LCAMOUNT_
This amount reflects
the increase in the
guarantee amount.
LC Contract Input ScreenMain- contract amount
Number
_NEWAMTWORDS_
If there has been an
increase in the
guarantee amount
then this is the new
amount expressed in
words.
System derived from Letter
of Credit-Contract InputDetailed-Main Tab
VarChar
_DEC-LCAMOUNT_
This amount reflects
the decrease in the
guarantee amount.
LC Contract Input ScreenMain- contract amount
Number
_NEWAMTWORDS_
If there has been a
decrease in the
guarantee amount
then this is the new
amount expressed in
words.
System derived from Letter
of Credit-Contract InputDetailed-Main Tab
VarChar
15.2.14
22,3
22,3
LC_AM_INST_COPY
ADVICE TAGS
DESCRIPTION
NOT AVAILABLE
15.2.15
ACK_TRACER
ADVICE
TAGS
DESCRIPTION
Tab/Button-FIELD NAME
Varchar/Number/Date
BRANCHDATE
Branch Date
Application Date of the
Branch
Date
RECVNAME
Receiver’s Name
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
Varchar
150
RECVADDRLN1
Receiver Address Line 1
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
Varchar
105
RECVADDRLN2
Receiver Address Line 2
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
Varchar
105
RECVADDRLN3
Receiver Address Line 3
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
Varchar
105
15-21
Length
RECVADDRLN4
Receiver Address Line 4
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
Varchar
105
OUR-REFNO
Our Reference Number
Letters of Credit-Contract
Input-Detailed-Main Tab
varchar
35
User Reference Number
Letters of Credit-Contract
Input-Detailed-Main
Screen
varchar
35
THEIRREF-NO
Their Reference Number
Letters of Credit-Contract
Input-Detailed-Main
Screen
varchar
35
LCAMOUNT
LC Amount
LC Contract Input ScreenMain-Amount
Number
22,3
LC Amount in Words
System derived from
Letter of Credit-Contract
Input-Detailed-Main Tab
Varchar
BENNAME
Beneficiary’s Name
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - customer name
Varchar
150
BENADDRLN1
Beneficiary’s Address
Line 1
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - address1
Varchar
105
BENADDRLN2
Beneficiary’s Address
Line 2
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - address2
Varchar
105
BENADDRLN3
Beneficiary’s Address
Line 3
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - address3
Varchar
105
BENADDRLN4
Beneficiary’s Address
Line 4
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - address4
Varchar
105
APPNAME
Applicant’s Name
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - customer name
Varchar
150
APPADDRLN1
Applicant’s Address Line
1
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - address1
Varchar
105
APPADDRLN2
Applicant’s Address Line
2
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - address2
Varchar
105
USERREF
AMT-INWORDS
15-22
APPADDRLN3
Applicant’s Address Line
3
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - address3
Varchar
105
APPADDRLN4
Applicant’s Address Line
4
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - address4
Varchar
105
ISSUEDATE
Date of Issue
Contract Input ScreenMain
Date
15.2.16
CHG_COM_TRACER
ADVICE TAGS
DESCRIPTION
NOT AVAILABLE
15.2.17
CON_TRACER
ADVICE
TAGS
DESCRIPTION
Tab/Button-FIELD
NAME
Varchar/Number/Date
_BRANCHDATE_
Branch Date
System Date for the
branch
Date
_RECVNAME_
Receiver Name
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
Varchar
150
_RECVADDR-LN1_
Receiver Address Line 1
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
Varchar
105
_RECVADDR-LN2_
Receiver Address Line 2
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
Varchar
105
_RECVADDR-LN3_
Receiver Address Line 3
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
Varchar
105
_RECVADDR-LN4_
Receiver Address Line 4
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
Varchar
105
Our Reference Number
Letters of CreditContract Input-DetailedMain Tab
varchar
35
User Reference Number
Letters of CreditContract Input-DetailedMain Screen
varchar
35
Their Reference Number
Letters of CreditContract Input-DetailedMain Screen
varchar
35
_OUR-REFNO_
_USERREF_
_THEIRREF-NO_
15-23
Length
_LCAMOUNT_
LC Amount
LC Contract Input
Screen-Main-Amount
Number
LC Amount in Words
System derived from
Letter of Credit-Contract
Input-Detailed-Main Tab
Varchar
Beneficiary’s Name
LC Contract Input
Screen - Parties screen
- Party details Customer name
varchar
150
Beneficiary’s Address
Line 1
LC Contract Input
Screen - Parties screen
- Party details address1
varchar
105
Beneficiary’s Address
Line 2
LC Contract Input
Screen - Parties screen
- Party details address2
varchar
105
Beneficiary’s Address
Line 3
LC Contract Input
Screen - Parties screen
- Party details address3
varchar
105
Beneficiary’s Address
Line 4
LC Contract Input
Screen - Parties screen
- Party details address4
varchar
105
Applicant’s Name
LC Contract Input
Screen - Parties screen
- Party details Customer name
varchar
150
Applicant’s Address Line
1
LC Contract Input
Screen - Parties screen
- Party details address1
varchar
105
Applicant’s Address Line
2
LC Contract Input
Screen - Parties screen
- Party details address2
varchar
105
_APPADDR-LN3_
Applicant’s Address Line
3
LC Contract Input
Screen - Parties screen
- Party details address3
varchar
105
_APPADDR-LN4_
Applicant’s Address Line
4
varchar
105
_AMT-INWORDS_
_BENNAME_
_BENADDR-LN1_
_BENADDR-LN2_
_BENADDR-LN3_
_BENADDR-LN4_
_APPNAME_
_APPADDR-LN1_
_APPADDR-LN2_
LC Contract Input
Screen - Parties screen
- Party details 15-24
22,3
address4
_ISSUEDATE_
Date of Issue
Contract Input ScreenMain- issue date
Date
_BRANCHNAME_
Branch Name
Branch Parameters
detailed - Branch Name
varchar
105
Length
15.2.18
LC_CANCEL_ADV
ADVICE TAGS
DESCRIPTION
Tab/Button-FIELD
NAME
Varchar/Number/Date
_BRANCHDATE_
Branch Date
System Date for
the branch
Date
Receiver Name
Contract Input
Screen-Settlement
Tab
Varchar
150
Receiver Address Line 1
Contract Input
Screen-Settlement
Tab
Varchar
105
Receiver Address Line 2
Contract Input
Screen-Settlement
Tab
Varchar
105
Receiver Address Line 3
Contract Input
Screen-Settlement
Tab
Varchar
105
Receiver Address Line 4
Contract Input
Screen-Settlement
Tab
Varchar
105
Our Reference Number
Letters of CreditContract InputDetailed-Main Tab
varchar
35
User Reference Number
Letters of CreditContract InputDetailed-Main
Screen
varchar
35
Their Reference Number
Letters of CreditContract InputDetailed-Main
Screen
varchar
35
varchar
150
_RECV-NAME_
_RECV-ADDRLN1_
_RECV-ADDRLN2_
_RECV-ADDRLN3_
_RECV-ADDRLN4_
_OUR-REF-NO_
_USERREF_
_THEIR-REF-NO_
_ISB-NAME_
Issuing Bank Name
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties Party details -
15-25
customer name
Issuing Bank Address
Line 1
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties Party details address1
varchar
105
Issuing Bank Address
Line 2
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties Party details address2
varchar
105
Issuing Bank Address
Line 3
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties Party details address3
varchar
105
Issuing Bank Address
Line 4
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties Party details address4
varchar
105
Applicant’s Name
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties Party details customer name
varchar
150
Applicant’s Address Line
1
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties Party details address1
varchar
105
Applicant’s Address Line
2
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties Party details address2
varchar
105
Applicant’s Address Line
3
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties Party details address3
varchar
105
Applicant’s Address Line
4
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties Party details address4
varchar
105
_BEN-NAME_
Beneficiary’s Name
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties Party details customer name
varchar
150
_BEN-ADDRLN1_
Beneficiary’s Address
Line 1
varchar
105
_ISB-ADDR-LN1_
_ISB-ADDR-LN2_
_ISB-ADDR-LN3_
_ISB-ADDR-LN4_
_APP-NAME_
_APP-ADDRLN1_
_APP-ADDRLN2_
_APP-ADDRLN3_
_APP-ADDRLN4_
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties 15-26
Party details address1
Beneficiary’s Address
Line 2
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties Party details address2
varchar
105
Beneficiary’s Address
Line 3
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties Party details address3
varchar
105
Beneficiary’s Address
Line 4
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties Party details address4
varchar
105
LC Amount
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties Party details customer name
Number
22,3
LC Amount in Words
System derived
from Letter of
Credit-Contract
Input-DetailedMain Tab
Varchar
Date of Issue
LC Contract Input
Screen-Main issue date
Date
_EXPIRY-DATE_
Date of Expiry
LC Contract Input
Screen-Main expiry date
Date
_SND2RECINFO_
Sender to Receiver
Information
Contract Input
Screen-Advices
varchar
2000
Branch Name
Branch Parameters
detailed - Branch
Name
varchar
105
Length
_BEN-ADDRLN2_
_BEN-ADDRLN3_
_BEN-ADDRLN4_
_LC-AMOUNT_
_AMT-INWORDS_
_ISSUE-DATE_
_BRANCHNAME_
15.2.19
PADV_TO_ADVCON
ADVICE TAGS
DESCRIPTION
Tab/Button-FIELD
NAME
Varchar/Number/Date
_BRANCHDATE_
Branch Date
System Date for
the branch
Date
_RECV-NAME_
Receiver Name
Contract Input
Screen-Settlement
15-27
Varchar
150
Tab
_RECV-ADDRLN1_
_RECV-ADDRLN2_
_RECV-ADDRLN3_
_RECV-ADDRLN4_
_OUR-REF-NO_
_THEIR-REF-NO_
_ISB-NAME_
_ISB-ADDR-LN1_
_ISB-ADDR-LN2_
_ISB-ADDR-LN3_
_ISB-ADDR-LN4_
_APP-NAME_
Receiver Address Line 1
Contract Input
Screen-Settlement
Tab
Varchar
105
Receiver Address Line 2
Contract Input
Screen-Settlement
Tab
Varchar
105
Receiver Address Line 3
Contract Input
Screen-Settlement
Tab
Varchar
105
Receiver Address Line 4
Contract Input
Screen-Settlement
Tab
Varchar
105
Our Reference Number
Letters of CreditContract InputDetailed-Main Tab
varchar
35
Their Reference Number
Letters of CreditContract InputDetailed-Main
Screen
varchar
35
Issuing Bank Name
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties Party details customer name
varchar
150
Issuing Bank Address
Line 1
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties Party details address1
varchar
105
Issuing Bank Address
Line 2
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties Party details address2
varchar
105
Issuing Bank Address
Line 3
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties Party details address3
varchar
105
Issuing Bank Address
Line 4
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties Party details address4
varchar
105
varchar
150
Applicant’s Name
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties Party details 15-28
customer name
_APP-ADDRLN1_
_APP-ADDRLN2_
_APP-ADDRLN3_
_APP-ADDRLN4_
_BEN-NAME_
_BEN-ADDRLN1_
_BEN-ADDRLN2_
_BEN-ADDRLN3_
_BEN-ADDRLN4_
_LC-AMOUNT_
_AMT-INWORDS_
Applicant’s Address Line
1
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties Party details address1
varchar
105
Applicant’s Address Line
2
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties Party details address2
varchar
105
Applicant’s Address Line
3
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties Party details address3
varchar
105
Applicant’s Address Line
4
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties Party details address4
varchar
105
Beneficiary’s Name
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties Party details customer name
varchar
150
Beneficiary’s Address
Line 1
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties Party details address1
varchar
105
Beneficiary’s Address
Line 2
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties Party details address2
varchar
105
Beneficiary’s Address
Line 3
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties Party details address3
varchar
105
Beneficiary’s Address
Line 4
LC Contract Input
Screen-Parties Party details address4
varchar
105
LC Amount
LC Contract Input
Screen-MainAmount
Number
22,3
LC Amount in Words
System derived
from Letter of
Credit-Contract
15-29
Varchar
Input-DetailedMain Tab
Date of Expiry
LC Contract Input
Screen-Main
Date
Details for Advising
Through Bank
LC Contract Input
Screen - Parties
screen - Party
details-Party Type
Varchar
16
Details for Beneficiary
LC Contract Input
Screen - Parties
screen - Party
details-Party Type
Varchar
16
_OTHER-FFTS_
Other Free Format Text
Letters of CreditContract InputDetailed-Advices
Tab-FFTS Details
Varchar
2000
_SND2RECINFO_
Sender to Receiver
Information
Contract Input
Screen-Advices
varchar
2000
Branch Name
Branch Parameters
detailed - Branch
Name
varchar
105
_EXPIRY-DATE_
_FOR-ATB__
_FOR-BEN_
_BRANCHNAME_
15.2.20
ADV_TO_ADVCON
ADVICE
TAGS
DESCRIPTION
Tab/Button-FIELD NAME
Varchar/Number/Date
BRANCHDATE
Branch Date
Application Date of the
Branch
Date
RECV-NAME
Receiver Name
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
Varchar
150
RECV-ADDRLN1
Receiver Address
Line 1
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
Varchar
105
RECV-ADDRLN2
Receiver Address
Line 2
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
Varchar
105
RECV-ADDRLN3
Receiver Address
Line 3
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
Varchar
105
RECV-ADDRLN4
Receiver Address
Line 4
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
Varchar
105
OUR-REF-NO
Our Reference
Number
Letters of Credit-Contract
Input-Detailed-Main Tab
Varchar
35
15-30
Length
USERREF
User Reference
Number
Letters of Credit-Contract
Input-Detailed-Main Screen
Varchar
35
THEIR-REFNO
Their Reference
Number
Letters of Credit-Contract
Input-Detailed-Main Screen
Varchar
35
ISB-NAME
Issuing Bank Name
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details- customer name
Varchar
150
ISB-ADDRLN1
Issuing Bank
Address Line 1
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - address1
Varchar
105
ISB-ADDRLN2
Issuing Bank
Address Line 2
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - address2
Varchar
105
ISB-ADDRLN3
Issuing Bank
Address Line 3
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - address3
Varchar
105
ISB-ADDRLN4
Issuing Bank
Address Line 4
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - address4
Varchar
105
APP-NAME
Applicant’s Name
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details- customer name
Varchar
150
APP-ADDRLN1
Applicant’s
Address Line 1
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - address1
Varchar
105
APP-ADDRLN2
Applicant’s
Address Line 2
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - address2
Varchar
105
APP-ADDRLN3
Applicant’s
Address Line 3
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - address3
Varchar
105
APP-ADDRLN4
Applicant’s
Address Line 4
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - address4
Varchar
105
BEN-NAME
Beneficiary’s Name
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details- customer name
Varchar
150
BEN-ADDRLN1
Beneficiary’s
Address Line 1
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - address1
Varchar
105
15-31
BEN-ADDRLN2
Beneficiary’s
Address Line 2
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - address2
Varchar
105
BEN-ADDRLN3
Beneficiary’s
Address Line 3
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - address3
Varchar
105
BEN-ADDRLN4
Beneficiary’s
Address Line 4
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - address4
Varchar
105
PRE-SENTDATE
LC Present Date
LC Contract Input Screen Audit trial Date field i.e.,
checker_dt_stamp (on first
save and authorize of
contract )
Date
SND2RECINF
O
Sender to Receiver
Information
Contract Input ScreenAdvices
Varchar
2000
Length
15.2.21
AMD_EXP_CR
ADVICE
TAGS
DESCRIPTION
Tab/Button-FIELD NAME
Varchar/Number/Date
BRANCHDATE
Branch Date
Application Date of the
Branch
Date
RECV-NAME
Receiver Name
Contract Input -Settlement
Tab-Local Clearings TabUnder Receiver Information
Title-Receiver Name
Varchar
150
RECV-ADDRLN1
Receiver Address
Line 1
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
varchar
105
RECV-ADDRLN2
Receiver Address
Line 2
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
varchar
105
RECV-ADDRLN3
Receiver Address
Line 3
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
varchar
105
RECV-ADDRLN4
Receiver Address
Line 4
Contract Input ScreenSettlement Tab
varchar
105
_OUR-REFNO_
Our Reference
Number
Letters of Credit-Contract
Input-Detailed-Main Tab
Varchar
35
_THEIR-REFNO_
Their Reference
Number
Letters of Credit-Contract
Input-Detailed-Main Tab
Varchar
35
_ISB-NAME_
Issuing Bank Name
LC Contract Input Screen15-32
150
Parties-Party details customer name
_ISB-ADDRLN1_
Issuing Bank
Address Line 1
LC Contract Input ScreenParties-Party details address1
varchar
105
_ISB-ADDRLN2_
Issuing Bank
Address Line 2
LC Contract Input ScreenParties-Party details address2
varchar
105
_ISB-ADDRLN3_
Issuing Bank
Address Line 3
LC Contract Input ScreenParties-Party details address3
varchar
105
_ISB-ADDRLN4_
Issuing Bank
Address Line 4
LC Contract Input ScreenParties-Party details address4
varchar
105
_APP-NAME_
Applicant’s Name
LC Contract Input ScreenParties-Party details customer name
varchar
150
_APP-ADDRLN1_
Applicant’s
Address Line 1
LC Contract Input ScreenParties-Party details address1
varchar
105
_APP-ADDRLN2_
Applicant’s
Address Line 2
LC Contract Input ScreenParties-Party details address2
varchar
105
_APP-ADDRLN3_
Applicant’s
Address Line 3
LC Contract Input ScreenParties-Party details address3
varchar
105
_APP-ADDRLN4_
Applicant’s
Address Line 4
LC Contract Input ScreenParties-Party details address4
varchar
105
_BEN-NAME_
Beneficiary’s Name
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - customer name
varchar
150
_BEN-ADDRLN1_
Beneficiary’s
Address Line 1
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - address1
varchar
105
_BEN-ADDRLN2_
Beneficiary’s
Address Line 2
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - address2
varchar
105
_BEN-ADDRLN3_
Beneficiary’s
Address Line 3
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - address3
varchar
105
15-33
_BEN-ADDRLN4_
Beneficiary’s
Address Line 4
LC Contract Input Screen Parties screen - Party
details - address4
varchar
105
_LCAMOUNT_
LC Amount
LC Contract Input ScreenMain
Number
22,3
_AMT-INWORDS_
LC Amount in
Words
System Derived from the
LC contract input-main
screen
Number
_EXPIRYDATE_
Date of Expiry
LC Contract Input ScreenMain- expiry date
Date
_OTHERFFTS_
Other Free Format
Texts
Letters of Credit-Contract
Input-Detailed-Advices TabFFTS Details
Varchar
2000
_SND2RECIN
FO_
Sender to Receiver
Information
Contract Input ScreenAdvices
Varchar
2000
_BRANCHNAME_
Branch Name
Branch Parameters detailed
- Branch Name
varchar
105
15.2.22
LC Messages
The exhaustive list of messages that can be generated during the lifecycle of an LC are listed
below:
Message
Mail
Telex
SWIFT
From
To
L/C Instrument
Y
Y
Y
ISB
ABK/BEN
Amendment Instrument
Y
Y
Y
ISB
ABK/BEN
Guarantee Instrument
Y
Y
Y
ISB
ABK
Guarantee Amendment
Y
Y
Y
ISB
ABK
Debit Advice
Y
Y
Y
ISB /ABK
APP/BEN
Credit Advice (Generated
automatically on Reversal)
Y
Y
Y
ISB /ABK
APP/BEN
Charge Claim Advice
Y
Y
Y
ISB /ABK
APP/BEN
Cash Collateral Advices
Y
Y
Y
ISB /ABK
APP/ISB
Reimbursement Advice
Y
Y
Y
ISB
RIB
Cancellation Advice
Y
N
N
ISB/ ABK
ABK/APP/
15-34
BEN/RIB/ATB
Pre Advice Telex: MT-705
Y
Y
Y
ISB
ABK/BEN
Reimbursement Advice Telex:
MT-756
Y
Y
Y
ISB
ABK/BEN
ACK of an Import LC: MT-730
Y
Y
Y
ABK
ISB
ACK of Receipt Of
Amendment To LC
Y
N
N
ABK
ISB
Authorization to Reimburse:
MT-740
Y
Y
Y
ISB
REB
Amendment to Authorization
to Reimburse: MT-740
Y
Y
Y
ISB
REB
When No ABK
Y
N
N
ISB
BEN
Pre-Advise To BEN
Y
N
N
ABK
BEN
Change From Pre-Advice To
Advice
Y
N
N
ABK
AT/BEN
Change From Pre-Advice To
Advice And Confirm
Y
N
N
ABK
ATB/BEN
Change From Advice To
Advice And Confirm
Y
N
N
ABK
ATB/BEN
Amending An Import Credit,
No ABK
Y
N
N
ISB/ ABK
BEN
Amending An Export Credit
Previously Advised Or
Confirmed, Via ATB
Y
N
N
ABK
ATB
Acknowledgment Tracer
Y
N
N
ISB
ABK
Confirmation Tracer
Y
N
N
ISB
ABK
Charges And Commission
Tracer
Y
N
N
Issuing
/ABK
APP/BEN/ ABK
/ATB/ISB
Insurance Advice
Y
N
N
ISB
Insurance Company
Fax 700/707/LC confirmation
Mail Message to counterparty
Y
N
N
ISB
Counterparty
ACK of LC Reimbursement:
MT-747
Y
Y
Y
REB
ISB
15-35
15.2.23
Generating Multiple Copies of LC Instrument
You can generate multiple copies of the LC instrument with the same data and also specify
different headers for each of the copy that you generate. To generate multiple copies, you need
to maintain specific details in the following screens:
1) Format File Maintenance Screen
To generate multiple copies, you need to maintain a file format that will be used for the message
and advices. For the LC_Instrument advice, you must associate the ‘NUMCOPIESX’ advice tag,
where X denotes the number of the copy that is generated. Here you can specify different
headers for each copy.
Refer to the Maintaining Advice Formats chapter of Messaging System user manual for the
procedure to define file formats.
2) Customer Address Maintenance Screen
In this screen, you need to specify the number of copies allowed for the message type
LC_Instrument. The system generates the number of copies specified for the instrument at the
time of authorization for the customer address maintained in the screen.
Refer to the Maintaining Addresses for a Customer chapter of Messaging System user manual for
maintaining addresses for the customer.
3) Outgoing Message Browser
When you are generating multiple copies of the original message, the system classifies the
outgoing message as original or a copy in the Outgoing Message Browser.
The ‘Copy’ box indicates whether the outgoing message is a copy and in the ‘No of Copy’ field
the number of that message is also displayed. This will help you keep count of the number of
copies that is generated for the same message.
Refer to the Processing Outgoing Messages chapter in Messaging System user manual for
further details on the Outgoing Message Browser.
15.2.24 Generating Fax 700/707 LC Confirmation Mail Message Copy to
Counterparty
You can generate Fax 700/707 LC confirmation Mail Message copy to counterparty. To do this,
you need to maintain specific details in the following screens:
1) Format File Maintenance Screen
To generate Fax 700/707 LC confirmation Mail Message copy, you need to maintain a file format
that will be used for the message and advices. For the LC_Instrument advice, you must associate
the ‘FAX_DUPLICATE’ advice tag, which carries the address of the receiver and a copy of the
original message.
15-36
The advice format vs. message type mapping for the new message types should be as follows.
Module
Message type
Media
LC
LC_INSTRUMENT_FAX
FAX
LC
LC_AMND_INSTR_FAX
FAX
Refer to the Maintaining Advice Formats chapter of Messaging System user manual for the
procedure to define file formats.
2) Customer Address Maintenance Screen
In this screen, you need to specify the format for the message type LC_INSTR_COPY and
LC_AM_INST_COPY. The system generates the fax message for LC confirmation for the
customer address maintained in the screen.
The customer address maintenance for media FAX should be as follows
Module
Message type
Format
LC
LC_INSTR_COPY
FAX_DUPLICATE
LC
LC_AM_INST_COPY
FAX_DUPLICATE
Refer to the Maintaining Addresses for a Customer chapter of Messaging System user manual for
maintaining addresses for the customer.
Party type abbreviations:
This is an exhaustive list of the parties that can be involved in an LC.
Code
Party Type
APP
Applicant
ACC
Accountee
ISB
Issuing Bank
ABK
Advising Bank
BEN
Beneficiary
ATB
Advise through bank
RIB
Reimbursing Bank
REIS
Reissue of Guarantee
15-37
15.2.25
LC event - Messages
15.2.26
BISS: Booking of an Import LC
Event
Message/Advice
From
To
BISS
LC_REIMB_ADV
ISB
RIB
BISS
ISB_BEN_CL
ISB
BEN
BISS
LC_AMND_INSTR
ISB
ABK/BEN
BISS
LC_CHC_MSG
ISB
ABK
BISS
LC_CASH_COL_ADV
ISB/ ABK
APP/ISB
BISS
LC_DR_MSG
ISB
APP/ABK
BISS
LC_INSTRUMENT
ISB
ABK/BEN
BISS
GUARANTEE
ISB
ABK/BEN
BISS
LC_REIMB_ADV
ISB
ABK
BISS
LC_RIM_MSG
ISB
RIB
BISS
LC_INSTR_COPY
ISB
BEN
15.2.27
AVAL: Availment under LC
Event
Message/Advice
From
To
AVAL
LC_CHC_MSG
ABK
ISB
AVAL
LC_DR_MSG
ABK
BEN
15.2.28
CLOS: Closure of an LC / Guarantee
None
15.2.29
REIN: Reinstatement of an LC / Guarantee
Event
Message/Advice
From
To
REIN
LC_AMND_INSTR
ISB
ABK/BEN
REIN
LC_CHC_MSG
ISB/ABK
APP/BEN
REIN
LC_DR_MSG
ISB/ABK
APP/BEN
REIN
LC_INSTRUMENT
ISB
ABK/BEN
15-38
15.2.30
BADV: Advising an LC
Event
Message/Advice
From
To
BADV
LC_ACK_ADVICE
ABK
ISB
BADV
LC_CHC_MSG
ABK
ISB
BADV
LC_DR_MSG
ABK
BEN
BADV
LC_ACK_ADVICE
ABK
ISB
15.2.31
BCFM: Confirming an LC
Event
Message/Advice
From
To
BCFM
LC_ACK_ADVICE
ABK
ISB
BCFM
LC_CHC_MSG
ABK
ISB
BCFM
LC_CASH_COL_ADV
ABK
ISB
BCFM
LC_DR_MSG
ABK
BEN
BCFM
LC_ACK_ADVICE
ABK
ISB
15.2.32
BPRE: Pre-advising an LC
Event
Message/Advice
From
To
BPRE
LC_ACK_ADVICE
ABK
ISB
BPRE
LC_ATB_MSG
ABK
ATB
BPRE
LC_CHC_MSG
ISB/ABK
ABK/ISB
BPRE
LC_ACK_ADVICE
ABK
ISB
BPRE
LC_PA_MSG
ISB
ABK
BPRE
PADV_CL
ABK
ATB
BPRE
PADV_CL
ABK
BEN
15.2.33
BANC: Advising and Confirming an LC
Event
Message/Advice
From
To
BANC
LC_ACK_ADVICE
ABK
ISB
BANC
LC_CHC_MSG
ABK
ISB
15-39
BANC
LC_CASH_COL_ADV
ABK
ISB
BANC
LC_DR_MSG
ABK
BEN
BANC
LC_ACK_ADVICE
ABK
ISB
15.2.34
REIS: Reissue of Guarantee
Event
Message/Advice
From
To
REIS
LC_INSTRUMENT
ISB
ABK/BEN
REIS
GUARANTEE
ISB
ABK/BEN
REIS
LC_PRE_ADVICE
ABK
ISB
15.2.35
AMND: LC Amendments
Event
Message/Advice
From
To
AMND
LC_AMD_MSG
ISB
ABK
AMND
AMD_EXP_CR
ABK
ATB
AMND
AMD_EXP_CR
ABK
BEN
AMND
LC_ACK_AMND
ABK
ISB
AMND
LC_CASH_COL_ADV
ABK
ISB
AMND
LC_DR_MSG
ABK
BEN
AMND
LC_AMD_AUTH_REB
ISB
RIB
AMND
AMD_IMP_CR
ISB
BEN
AMND
GUA_AMD_INSTR
ISB
ABK
AMND
LC_AMND_INSTR
ISB
ABK/BEN
AMND
LC_CHC_MSG
ISB/ABK
ISB/ABK
AMND
LC_DR_MSG
ISB/ABK
APP/BEN
AMND
LC_INSTRUMENT
ISB
ABK/BEN
AMND
GUA_AMD_INSTR
ISB
ABK/BEN
AMND
LC_REIMB_ADV
ISB
ABK
AMND
LC_REIMB_ADV
ISB
RIB
AMND
LC_AM_INST_COPY
ISB
BEN
15-40
For the generation of outgoing MT707 from an incoming MT707, you need to link the message
type ‘AMD_EXP_CR’ to the ‘AMND’ event of the product. In case of LC amendment, if the media
is ‘SWIFT’ and message type is ‘AMD_EXP_CR’, the system will generate MT707. During
generation of MT707 to the advice through bank, field 30 will be updated with the date in ‘Issuing
Bank Amendment Date’ field. If the amendment date is null, then field 30 will not updated.
In response to MT700 and MT707, Oracle FLEXCUBE also allows you to generate MT730 as an
acknowledgement of LC creation or amendment respectively. During LC amendment, MT730 is
generated along with the advise ‘LC_ACK_AMND’ if the media is ‘SWIFT’ and message type is
‘LC_ACK_AMND’.
15.2.36
REVR: Reversal
Event
Message/Advice
From
To
REVR
LC_CNC_MADV
ISB
APP/ABK
REVR
LC_CR_MSG
ISB/ABK
APP/BEN
15.2.37
ACCR: Accrual of Commission
None
15.2.38
CALC: Periodic Commission Calculation Date
None
15.2.39
CLIQ: Liquidation of Commission
Event
Message/Advice
From
To
CLIQ
LC_DR_MSG
ISB/ABK
APP/BEN
15.2.40
ROPN: Reopening of an LC
Event
Message/Advice
From
To
ROPN
LC_CHC_MSG
ISB/ABK
ISB/ABK
ROPN
LC_DR_MSG
ISB/ABK
APP/BEN
ROPN
LC_INSTRUMENT
ISB
ABK/BEN
ROPN
GUARANTEE
ISB
ABK/BEN
15.2.41
TRGN: End of Day Check for Tracers
Event
Message/Advice
From
To
CHTR
ACK_TRACER
ISB
ABK
CHTR
CHG_COM_TRACER
ISB/ABK
APP/BEN/ABK/ATB /ISB
15-41
CHTR
15.2.42
CON_TRACER
ISB
ABK
CANC: Cancellation of an LC
Sl No
15.2.43
Event
Message/Advice
From
To
CANC
LC_CANCEL_ADV
ISB
ABK/APP/BEN/RIB
CANC
LC_CANCEL_ADV
ABK
BEN/ABK/ATB/RIB
APAC: Amendment from Pre-advice to Advice and Confirm
Event
Message/Advice
From
To
APAC
PADV_TO_ADVCON
ABK
ATB
APAC
PADV_TO_ADVCON
ABK
BEN
APAC
PADV_TO_ADVCON
ABK
ATB
APAC
PADV_TO_ADVCON
ABK
BEN
APAC
AMD_EXP_CR
ABK
ATB
APAC
AMD_EXP_CR
ABK
BEN
APAC
LC_ACK_AMND
ABK
ISB
APAC
LC_CASH_COL_ADV
ABK
ISB
APAC
LC_DR_MSG
ABK
BEN
15.2.44
APAD: Amendment from Pre-advice to Advice
Event
Message/Advice
From
To
APAD
LC_AMD_MSG
ISB
ABK
APAD
AMD_EXP_CR
ABK
ATB
APAD
AMD_EXP_CR
ABK
BEN
APAD
LC_ACK_AMND
ABK
ISB
APAD
LC_DR_MSG
ABK
BEN
AATC
LC_AMD_MSG
ISB
ABK
AATC
ADV_TO_ADVCON
ABK
ATB
AATC
AMD_EXP_CR
ABK
ATB
AATC
AMD_EXP_CR
ABK
BEN
15-42
AATC
LC_ACK_AMND
ABK
ISB
AATC
LC_DR_MSG
ABK
BEN
15.2.45
RASN: Reassign an LC
None
15.2.46
RAVL: Reversal of availment
None
15.2.47
CALC: Periodic commission calculation
None
15.2.48
Advice Generated for the Insurance Company
The LC_INSURANCEADV message is generated by the bank and sent to the Insurance
Company at the time of Opening (BISS) and Amendment (AMND) of LC contract.
An insurance company advice gives details of the deal.
INSURANCE ADVICE
To,
_INSURANCECO_
_INSURANCECO_ADDR1_
_INSURANCECO_ADDR2_
_INSURANCECO_ADDR3_
_INSURANCECO_ADDR4_
Dear Sirs,
SUB:
Open Policy/Cover No
: _INSURANCECO_POLICYNO_
Our Letter Of Credit No. : _USERREFNO_
DATED : _ISSUE_DATE_
This is to advise you that we have today established the subject
15-43
Letter of Credit the details of which are as under. Kindly provide
us with Insurance Policy/Certificate/Declaration/Cover Note, which
ever is applicable, at your earliest
L/C No.
:
_CONTREFNO_
_IRREVOCABLE_
Amount
:
Expiring On
ABOUT _LC_CCY_
:
_LC_AMOUNT_
_EXPIRY_DATE_
Opener of L/C: _APP_NAME_
_APP_ADDR1_
_APP_ADDR2_
_APP_ADDR3_
_APP_ADDR4_
Merchandise
:
_GOODS_DESCR_
Shipment From :
_FROM_PLACE_
To
:
_TO_PLACE_
By
:
_SHIPMENT_DET_
Not Later Than: _LATEST_SHP_DATE_
Partial Shipment
:
_PARTIAL_SHP_
Transshipment :
_TRANS_SHP_
Yours faithfully For Investbank PSC
[FILE COPY]
15-44
CFR
15.2.49
Advice Generated for Counterparty
The LC_INSTR_COPY and LC_AM_INST_COPY message types will be processed and an
advice will be generated by the bank and sent to the counterparty at the time of LC confirmation.
The advice format maintenance will be as follows:
FAX_DUPLICATE
_ADDRESS_
_ORIGINALMESSAGE_
LC Contract processing will specify the receiver of the new message types as the applicant.
The message processing function will process confirmation / duplicate messages on the basis of
the following:

If the original message is not processed, then the original message will be processed first
before generation of confirmation/duplicate message.

If the status of original message is Repair then the duplicate message will also be in the
same status.

If the original message is generated, then the same message is copied to the duplicate
message.

The _ORIGINALMESSAGE_ advice tag will be populated with the actual message body
of original message.

The additional tags which will be updated for duplicate messages are Receiver address
and sender address.

The advice generation process will fetch the above tags and forms the message for
duplicate messages.
15.3 LC SDEs
The following is an exhaustive list of SDEs that are supported for LC Module:
Name
Description
CUSTOMER_CREDIT_RATING
Holds the Credit Rating
information of Customer
15-45
16. Annexure C - SWIFT Category 7 Messages
16.1 List of SWIFT Messages
The following messages are supported in the LC module.
Message
MT 700
Event
Message Type in
FLEXCUBE
Message
Description
BISS,
REIN,
REIS,
AMND,
ROPN
LC_INSTRUMENT
L/C Instrument
Generated
On
On opening
Import LC
Message Information
It is used to indicate
the terms and
conditions of a
documentary credit
which has been
originated by the
Sender (issuing bank).
This message is sent
by the issuing bank to
the advising bank.
MT 701
MT 705
BISS,
REIN,
REIS,
AMND,
ROPN
LC_INSTRUMENT
BISS,
REIS
LC_PRE_ADVICE
L/C Instrument
- Continuation
On opening
Import LC
Continuation of an
MT 700 for fields 45a,
46a and 47a
This message is sent
by the issuing bank to
the advising bank.
Pre Advice of
L/C
On opening
Import LC
It is a brief advice of a
documentary credit,
the full details of which
will follow.
The pre-advice is not
an operative credit
instrument. Unless
otherwise stated, the
issuing bank must
forward the operative
credit instrument, that
is, MT 700 Issue of a
Documentary credit,
without delay.
This message is sent
by the issuing bank to
the advising bank.
MT 707
AMND,
REIN,
AMND
LC_AMND_INSTR
LC
Amendment
Instrument
16-1
Import LC
Amendment
It is used to inform the
Receiver about
amendments to the
Message
Event
Message Type in
FLEXCUBE
Message
Description
Generated
On
Message Information
terms and conditions
of a documentary
credit issued by the
Sender or by a third
bank.
The amendment is to
be considered as part
of the documentary
credit, unless the MT
707 is used to convey
only brief details of the
amendment, details of
which are to follow.
This message is sent
by the issuing bank to
the advising bank. It
may also be sent by an
advising bank to
another advising bank
or by a transferring
bank to an advising
bank.
MT 710
BADV,
BANC
ADV_THIRD_BAN
K
Advice of a
Third Bank's
Documentary
Credit
Export LC
Advise
It is used to advise the
Receiver of the terms
and conditions of a
documentary credit
issued by a third bank.
MT 711
BADV,
BANC
ADV_THIRD_BAN
K
Advice of a
Third Bank's
Documentary
Credit Continuation
Export LC
Advise
Continuation of an
MT 710 for fields 45a,
46a and 47a
MT 720
TRNF
TRANSFER_LC
Transfer of a
Documentary
Credit
Export LC
Advise
It is used to advise the
transfer of a
documentary credit, or
part thereof, to the
bank advising the
second beneficiary.
MT 721
TRNF
TRANSFER_LC
Transfer of a
Documentary
Credit Continuation
Export LC
Advise
Continuation of an
MT 720 for fields 45a,
46a and 47a
MT 730
BPRE,
BADV,
BANC,
BCFM,
LC_ACK_ADVICE
Acknowledge
ment
Export LC
Advise
This message is used
to acknowledge receipt
of any documentary
credit message. When
16-2
Message
Event
Message Type in
FLEXCUBE
Message
Description
Generated
On
AMND,
APAD,A
PAC &
AATC
Message Information
applicable, it may also
explicitly indicate that
the message has been
forwarded according to
instructions.
This message type
may also be used:
to account for bank
charges
to advise of
acceptance or
rejection of an
amendment of a credit
MT 732
INIT
RESERVE_RELE
ASE
Advice of
Discharge
When
Discrepancie
s are
accepted by
the drawee,
the
negotiating
bank is
informed.
It is used to advise that
documents received
with discrepancies
have been taken up.
MT 734
REFP
PAYMENT_REFU
SAL /
ACCEPT_REFUS
AL
Advice of
Refusal
When Bills
are received
with
discrepancies
, the
negotiating
bank is
refused
payment/acc
eptance
It is used to advise the
refusal of documents
that are not in
accordance with the
terms and conditions
of a documentary
credit.
MT 740
BISS
LC_AUTH_REIMB
Authorization
to Reimburse,
Import LC
Opening
It is used to request
the Receiver to honour
claims for
reimbursement of
payment(s) or
negotiation(s) under a
documentary credit.
Amendment to
Authorization
to Reimburse
The MT 740 authorises
the reimbursing bank
to debit the account of
the Sender, or one of
the Sender's branches
if so indicated, for
reimbursements
16-3
Message
Event
Message Type in
FLEXCUBE
Message
Description
Generated
On
Message Information
effected in accordance
with the instructions in
the MT 740.
This message is sent
by the issuing bank to
the reimbursing bank.
MT 742
INIT
REIMBRSMNT_C
LM
Reimburseme
nt Claim
When Export
Bills are
negotiated, a
claim is sent
to the
Reimbursing
bank.
It is used to provide a
reimbursement claim
to the bank authorized
to reimburse the
Sender or its branch
for its
payments/negotiations.
MT 747
BISS
LC_AMD_AUTH_
REB
Amendment to
an
Authorisation
to Reimburse
Import LC
Amendment
It is used to inform the
Receiver about
amendments to the
terms and conditions
of the credit relevant to
the authorisation to
reimburse.
The amendment is to
be considered as part
of the authorisation to
reimburse.
This message is sent
by the bank which has
issued an authorisation
to reimburse (issuing
bank) to the
reimbursing bank.
MT 750
BOOK
DISCREPANCY_R
EQ
Advice of
Discrepancy
When Export
Bills are
negotiated,
and if the
same
contains
discrepancies
, request for
approval is
sent to the
LC opening
bank
It is used to advise of
discrepancies and
request authorisation
to honour documents
presented that are not
in accordance with the
terms and conditions
of the documentary
credit.
MT 752
INIT
DISCREPANCY_A
UT
Authorisation
to Pay, Accept
or Negotiate
When an
import LC is
booked
It is used to advise a
bank which has
requested
authorisation to pay,
16-4
Message
Event
Message Type in
FLEXCUBE
Message
Description
Generated
On
Message Information
accept, negotiate or
incur a deferred
payment undertaking
that the presentation of
the documents may be
honoured,
notwithstanding the
discrepancies,
provided they are
otherwise in order.
MT 754
INIT
ADV_PMT_ACPT
Advice of
Payment/Acce
ptance/Negoti
ation
During
initiation of
Export Bill
It is used to advise that
documents have been
presented in
accordance with the
terms of a
documentary credit
and are being
forwarded as
instructed. This
message type also
handles the
payment/negotiation.
MT 756
LIQD
REIM_PAY_ADV
Advice of
Reimburseme
nt or Payment
On liquidation
of an import
Bill
It is used to advise of
the reimbursement or
payment for a drawing
under a documentary
credit in which no
specific reimbursement
instructions or
payment provisions
were given.
MT 760
BISS,
REIS,
ROPN
GUARANTEE
Guarantee
Instrument
1. Request
another bank
to issue a
guarantee.
2. Issue a
guarantee
through
another bank.
This message is sent
between banks
involved in the
issuance of a
guarantee.
1. Request
another bank
to amend a
guarantee.
2. Amend a
guarantee
through
It is used to amend or
request the
amendment of the
guarantee.
MT 767
AMND
GUA_AMD_INSTR
Guarantee
Amendment
16-5
It is used to issue a
guarantee or to
request the Receiver
to issue a guarantee.
This message is sent
by a bank which has
issued a guarantee to
Message
Event
Message Type in
FLEXCUBE
Message
Description
Generated
On
another bank
MT 768
BPRE,
BADV,
BANC,
AMND,
APAD,A
PAC &
AATC
GUA_ACK_ADVIC
E
Acknowledge
ment of a
Guarantee
Message
Message Information
the bank to which the
guarantee was issued.
It may also be sent by
a bank which has
requested the
issuance of a
guarantee to the bank
to which the request
for a guarantee was
sent.
It is used to
acknowledge receipt of
any message relating
to a guarantee and,
where applicable, to
indicate that action has
been taken according
to the instructions.
The Sender’s charges
may also be accounted
for in this message.
This message type is
sent by a bank which
has received a
guarantee to the bank
which issued the
guarantee or an
amendment thereto. It
may also be sent by a
bank which has been
requested to issue a
guarantee to the bank
which requested the
guarantee or an
amendment thereto.
MT 769
N.A.
N.A.
Advice of
Charges,
Interest and
Other
Adjustments
Generated
using
Common
Group
Messages
Option
(MSDCOMM
S)
Advises an account
owner of charges,
interest or other
adjustments to its
account
MT 790
N.A.
N.A.
Request for
Payment of
Charges,
Interest and
Other
Generated
using
Common
Group
Messages
Requests payment of
charges, interest or
other expenses
16-6
Message
Event
Message Type in
FLEXCUBE
Message
Description
Generated
On
Expenses
Option
(MSDCOMM
S)
Message Information
MT 791
N.A.
N.A.
Request for
cancellation of
the message
Generated
using
Common
Group
Messages
Option
(MSDCOMM
S)
Requests the Receiver
to consider
cancellation of the
message identified in
the request
MT 792
N.A.
N.A.
Queries
Generated
using
Common
Group
Messages
Option
(MSDCOMM
S)
Requests information
relating to a previous
message or
amendment to a
previous message
MT 795
N.A.
N.A.
Answers
Generated
using
Common
Group
Messages
Option
(MSDCOMM
S)
Responds to a MT 795
Queries message or
MT 792 Request for
Cancellation or other
messages where no
specific message type
has been provided for
the response
MT 796
N.A.
N.A.
Proprietary
Message
Generated
using
Common
Group
Messages
Option
(MSDCOMM
S)
Contains formats
defined and agreed to
between users and for
those messages not
yet live
MT 799
N.A.
N.A.
Free format
message
Generated
using
Common
Group
Messages
Option
(MSDCOMM
S)
16.2 SWIFT Advices
This section contains the list of the SWIFT advices supported in the LC module.
16-7
EVENT
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
SWIFT MT
Tag
BISS
Issue of a
Documentary
Credit
MT 700
LC_INSTRUMENT
Advice Description
This message is sent by the
issuing bank to the advising bank.
It is used to indicate the terms
and conditions of a documentary
credit which has been originated
by the
Sender (issuing bank).
BISS
Pre-Advice of a
Documentary
Credit
MT 705
LC_PRE_ADVICE
This message is sent by the
issuing bank to the advising bank.
It is a brief advice of a
documentary credit, the full
details of which will follow.
The pre-advice is not an operative
credit instrument. Unless
otherwise stated, the issuing bank
must forward the operative credit
instrument, ie, MT 700 Issue of a
Documentary credit, without
delay.
AMND
Amendment to a
Documentary
Credit
MT 707
LC_AMND_INSTR
This message is sent by the
issuing bank to the advising bank.
It may also be sent by an advising
bank to another advising bank or
by a transferring bank to an
advising bank.
It is used to inform the Receiver
about amendments to the terms
and conditions of a documentary
credit issued by the Sender or by
a third bank.
The amendment is to be
considered as part of the
documentary credit, unless the
MT 707 is used to convey only
brief details of the amendment,
details of which are to follow.
BPRE,
BADV,
BANC,
AMND,
Acknowledgement
MT 730
LC_ACK_ADVICE
16-8
This message is used to
acknowledge receipt of any
documentary credit message.
EVENT
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
SWIFT MT
Tag
APAD,
APAC
& AATC
Advice Description
When applicable, it may
also explicitly indicate that the
message has been forwarded
according to instructions.
This message type may also be
used:
BISS
Authorisation to
Reimburse
MT 740
LC_AUTH_REIMB

To account for bank
charges

To advise of acceptance
or rejection of an
amendment of a credit.
This message is sent by the
issuing bank to the reimbursing
bank.
It is used to request the Receiver
to honour claims for
reimbursement of payment(s) or
negotiation(s) under a
documentary credit.
The MT 740 authorises the
reimbursing bank to debit the
account of the Sender, or one of
the Sender's branches if so
indicated, for reimbursements
effected in accordance with the
instructions in the MT 740.
BISS
Amendment to an
Authorisation to
Reimburse
MT 747
LC_AMD_AUTH_RE
B
This message is sent by the bank
which has issued an authorisation
to reimburse (issuing bank) to the
reimbursing bank.
It is used to inform the Receiver
about amendments to the terms
and conditions of the credit
relevant to the authorisation to
reimburse.
The amendment is to be
considered as part of the
authorisation to reimburse.
16-9
EVENT
EVENT
DESCRIPTION
SWIFT MT
Tag
BISS
Guarantee
MT 760
GUARANTEE
Advice Description
This message is sent between
banks involved in the issuance of
a guarantee.
It is used to issue a guarantee or
to request the Receiver to issue a
guarantee.
AMND
Guarantee
Amendment
MT 767
GUA_AMD_INSTR
This message is sent by a bank
which has issued a guarantee to
the bank to which the guarantee
was issued. It may also be sent
by a bank which has requested
the issuance of a guarantee to
the bank to which the request for
a guarantee was sent.
It is used to amend or request the
amendment of the guarantee.
BPRE,
BADV,
BANC,
AMND,
APAD,
APAC
& AATC
Acknowledgement
of a Guarantee
Message
MT 768
GUA_ACK_ADVICE
This message type is sent by a
bank which has received a
guarantee to the bank which
issued the guarantee or an
amendment thereto. It may also
be sent by a bank which has
been requested to issue a
guarantee to the bank which
requested the guarantee or an
amendment thereto.
It is used to acknowledge receipt
of any message relating to a
guarantee and, where applicable,
to indicate that action has been
taken according to the
instructions.
The Sender’s charges may also
be accounted for in this message.
ALL
Free format
Message
MT 799
NOT SUPPORTED
AT THE PRODUCT
LEVEL. CAN BE
INPUT FROM
MESSAGING
MODULE.
16-10
Free format messages for LC
which is not covered in any of the
10xx series.
16.3 Details of MT202 (General Financial Institution Transfer)
This section deals with the mapping between the fields in the SWIFT message MT202 and the
corresponding fields in Oracle FLEXCUBE.
Field in
SWIFT
Description
Mandatory
/Optional
Field in Oracle FLEXCUBE
Remarks
20
Transaction
Reference Number
M
Reference Number
contract_ref_no for all
module expect LC & BC.
For LC & BC
LCTMS_BRANCH_PAR
AMETERS &
BCTMS_BRANCH_PAR
AMETERS
21
Related Reference
M
Source Reference no, user
Reference Number, NON
REF
For uploaded contracts
it is source_ref and this
should not be equal to
user_ref_number.
For normal contracts
user_ref_number. Again
if user_ref =
contract_Ref then
"NONREF"
13C
Time Indication
O
32A
Value Date,
Currency Code,
Amount
M
Value Date / Account
Currency / Settlement
Amount
As entered in the front
end as transfer amount
52a
Ordering Institution
O
Ordering Institution 1 to 5
Only if sender is
different than that of the
Ordering insitution. The
validation is done for A
and B. If the value in
Ordering_instution1 is
BIC code then A else B.
53a
Sender's
Correspondent
O
BIC Code , Address1
Is populated only when
receiver <> sender's
corres. It is normally the
BIC code of the
customer (selected
based on the nostro
account). This populates
:53A:. If there is a
maintenance in the
Recon module for Class
"NOST" under external
account maintenance
16-11
Field in
SWIFT
Description
Mandatory
/Optional
Field in Oracle FLEXCUBE
Remarks
(external_account from
RETMS_EXTACC_ACC
GL_DEFN), then 53B
will be populated with
acc number and swift
address
54a
Receiver's
Correspondent
O
Receiver's Correspondent
1 to 5
Receiver's
Correspondent field, this
is normally null, unless
filled through front end.
56a
Intermediary
O
Intermediary 1 to 5
Intermediary field, this is
normally null, unless
filled through front end.
Under "S" button third
tab
57a
Account With
Institution
O
Account With Institution 1 to
5
Is populated only when
receiver <> AWI. It is
normally the BIC code
as entered through front
end
58a
Beneficiary
Institution
M
Beneficiary Institution 1 for
cover to 5
As entered in the front
end, if this only a bank
transfer. If 202 is fired
as a part of "cover" to a
customer then this value
would be the "reciver" of
100 or 103
72
Sender to Receiver
Information
O
Sender to Receiver
Information 1 to 6
In FT, Sender to
receiver Info. from front
end, for other module
under "S" button and
under message details
tab. If this a part of
cover then the values
starting with
/OCMT,/PHONBEN or
/TELEIBK will form part
of the this field.
16-12
17. Annexure D - Letters of Credit Glossary
17.1 List of Important Terms
The following terms occur in this manual.
Letter of Credit (LC)
This is an arrangement that is irrevocable and thereby constitutes a definite undertaking of the
issuing bank to honour a complying presentation.
Clean or Documentary LC
Clean Letters of Credit require no documents for processing, as opposed to Documentary Letters
of Credit, which require documents.
Applicant
It means the party at whose request the LC is issued.
Beneficiary
It means the party in whose favour a LC is issued.
Import LC
This is an incoming Letter of Credit that involves an applicant who is a customer of the processing
bank.
Export LC
This is an outgoing Letter of Credit that involves the beneficiary who is a customer of the
processing bank.
Guarantees
Guarantee is a form of comfort, issued by the bank to its client, in cases where the bank is not
very comfortable with the credit rating of the customer. Unlike a letter of credit, in which the bank
has to pay on maturity, the amount is payable only on invocation of guarantee by the creditor.
Shipping Guarantee
This is a guarantee extended during the period in which the goods are under transit.
Standby Guarantee
This is a guarantee for performance of a contract. These are immediately realizable whenever
the beneficiary presents a declaration to the issuing bank that the named party has not fulfilled
the terms of contract.
17-1
Red Clause LC
This is an LC, the terms of which allow the confirming bank to make advance payments to the
beneficiary before documents are received, towards anticipatory drawings on the part of the
beneficiary.
Transferable LC
This is an LC, the terms of which allow transference of the LC to other buyers, sellers or parties.
Non-transferable LC
This is an LC, the terms of which disallow transference of the LC to other buyers, sellers or
parties.
Revolving LC
This is an LC, the terms of which allow the restoration of the original LC amount (or the tenor)
after its full settlement, without any further changes to any of the other terms. A revolving LC
could be either revocable or irrevocable.
Non-Revolving LC
This is an LC, the terms of which disallow the restoration of the original LC amount (or the tenor)
after its full settlement. A non-revolving LC could be either revocable or irrevocable.
Sight LC
This is an LC that involves immediate payment to the seller by the negotiating bank. The
payment is later reimbursed by the issuing bank.
Usance LC
This is an LC that involves payment to the seller at maturity i.e., (at a future date). The drawee
bank obligates itself to make the payment.
Open-ended LC
This is an LC that has no definite maturity or expiry date.
Issuing Bank
This is the bank at which a letter of credit is first initiated by the buyer or importer. It is the bank
at which the buyer account is debited for the trade. The advising bank sends the documents for
the trade to the issuing bank, from where they are released to the buyer.
Advising Bank
This is the bank in the LC chain which advises by sending a copy of the LC to the beneficiary.
The advising bank also sometimes acts as the bank will receive and negotiate the documents
from the beneficiary which the seller or exporter involved in a letter of credit receives payment
towards the trade. The issuing bank sends the letter of credit to the advising bank. The
documents regarding the trade are sent to` the advising bank by the seller. The advising bank
then sends the documents to the issuing bank.
17-2
Confirming Bank
This is the bank that ratifies the trade involving a letter of credit, to the advising bank. Tracers
(messages) requesting letters of confirmation of the trade are sent to the confirming bank.
Confirmation
This is the adding of a separate undertaking by a bank to an LC in addition to that of the bank
issuing it. All LCs lacking specific confirmation notices from any additional banks are considered
unconfirmed.
Document Code
This is a unique identifier in Oracle FLEXCUBE for a standard paper, file or record that is required
and used in most countries for the processing of a documentary letter of credit.
Document Type
This is a group of similar document codes in Oracle FLEXCUBE. The document type identifies
the nature of all document codes under it.
Clause Code
This is a unique identifier in Oracle FLEXCUBE for a statement that goes along with documents
sent under a letter of credit.
Clause Type
This is a group of similar clause codes in Oracle FLEXCUBE. The clause type identifies the
nature of all clause codes under it.
Goods Code
This is a unique identifier in Oracle FLEXCUBE for the standard stock or commodity that is traded
under a letter of credit.
Text Code
This is a unique identifier in Oracle FLEXCUBE for a set of instructions and statements (the free
format texts) pertaining to the processing of a letter of credit. Standard free format texts do
appear on correspondence and messages sent to the parties involving the letter of credit.
Product
This is an identifier in Oracle FLEXCUBE for any type of service that a bank offers its customers.
A set of attributes and preferences are maintained for the product, which will apply to the
processing of any contracts, transactions or deals involving the product (service).
Product Group
This is a group under which a product is logically classified, under which logically similar products
are placed together.
17-3
Product Remarks
It can be descriptive text about a product.
Product Slogan
It can be text or phrase that could be used as a declaration or an announcement of the product,
to customers.
Accounting Head
This is the specific GL created in any module of the Oracle FLEXCUBE system into which the
accounting entry would be posted.
Accounting Role
The general ledgers and sub-ledgers maintained as a chart of accounts in Oracle FLEXCUBE
may be classified logically under different categories, each of which is called an accounting role.
Amount Tag
This is the amount entry that is passed into a general ledger/sub-ledger in the chart of accounts
for each transaction.
Netting
It amounts to summing of two or more accounting entries passed to an account for the same
event, so as to arrive at a net figure for posting.
Event
This is the occurrence or process that initiates the generation of an advice during the processing
of a contract in Oracle FLEXCUBE.
Transaction Code
This is an identifier for each accounting entry that describes the nature (debit or credit) of the
entry.
Rekey Options
They comprise the fields that are to be keyed in by an authorizer of a transaction, for the purpose
of cross-checking, when the transaction is being authorized. Complete details of the transaction
will only be displayed when the authorizer re-keys the values for these fields.
Positive Tolerance
It indicates the increment, expressed as a percentage that must be made to the amount of a letter
of credit, to arrive at the Maximum LC Amount.
Negative Tolerance
It indicates the reduction, expressed as a percentage that must be made to the amount of a letter
of credit, to arrive at the Minimum LC Amount.
17-4
Tenor
This is the period during which a letter of credit is viable or effective.
Commission Calculation Type
This is the basis upon which commission applicable on a letter of credit is to be computed. It can
be computed on a periodic or non-periodic basis.
Commission Collection Type
This is the manner in which commission applicable on a letter of credit can be collected.
Commission could be collected either in advance or as arrears.
Rate Override Limit
This is the limit within which exchange rates (for an LC) are allowed to be changed over and
above the default value, without requiring an override. If the rate variance exceeds this limit, an
override is necessary for the changed rate to be accepted.
Rate Stop Limit
This is the limit above which a change in exchange rates (for an LC) over and above the default
value cannot be specified. If the rate variance exceeds this limit, the changed rate will not be
accepted.
Tracer Code
This is a unique identifier for a tracer in FLEXCUBE. A tracer is a reminder or intimation,
generated by FLEXCUBE, to be sent to the parties involved in a letter of credit.
Auto Closure
It refers to closing an LC automatically after its expiry date. Usually, the date of automatic closure
is specified for an LC. By default, the date for automatic closure is taken to be 30 days after the
expiry date.
Automatic Reinstatement
This is the automatic restoration of the amount (value) of a revolving letter of credit for which the
unutilized value is zero, in FLEXCUBE. When the Beginning of Day (BOD) process is run on any
given business day, any LC’s’ for which automatic reinstatement of value has been specified are
restored in value, provided the un-availed portion of the amount is zero.
Cumulative (Revolving in time)
This is an attribute of a revolving letter of credit, according to which, the LC amount and
Maximum Liability Amount is reinstated or reset based on the frequency specified for such
reinstatement.
17-5
Revolves in Value
This refers to an attribute of a revolving letter of credit, according to which, the LC amount is
reinstated or reset at the point when the availability under the LC is reduced to zero, due to an
availment.
Credit Type
This indicates the type of credit for which the LC is being processed, viz., Straight or Negotiable.
Credit Mode
This indicates the mode of payment through which the LC will be settled - Sight, Acceptance,
Negotiation or Deferred.
Media Type
This is the medium used to send advices to each of the parties involved in a letter of credit.
Partial Shipment
This indicates transportation through shipping, in part, or of a portion of merchandise under an
LC. Partial shipment is allowed only if permitted for the LC.
Trans-shipment
This indicates transportation of merchandise under an LC, by shipping across countries. Transshipment is allowed only if permitted for the LC.
Reference Number/Account
An LC can be linked to a deposit or a customer account. The reference number identifies the
deposit that the LC is linked to, and the account identifies the customer account.
Linked Amount
This is the portion of the contract amount of a letter of credit contract that is linked to a deposit or
a customer account.
Availment Type
This indicates the nature of any availment under an LC. An availment could be a payment, an
acceptance, or negotiation.
Commission Collection
This indicates the collection of commission applicable on an LC. Commission may be collected
by the issuing bank or the advising bank, for an LC, or against amendments to an LC.
Commission Calculation
This is the computation of commission applicable on a letter of credit.
17-6
Limit Tenor Calculation
This is the limit within which the tenor of a tenor-based letter of credit can be set.
Process Till
This parameter indicates how automatic events falling due on holidays will be processed. If the
specification is ‘System Date’, it indicates that all the processing of events will be done till the
system date only. If the specification is ‘Working Day – 1’, all automatic events falling due on the
holiday will be processed by the batch process as part of the End of Day processes on the last
working day before the holiday.
Accrual Entries Level
This refers to the level at which commission accrual entries for letters of credit must be passed,
by the automatic commission accrual process. Two levels are possible – product-level, indicating
that a single entry for all the LCs for which commission was accrued automatically will be passed;
or contract level, wherein accrual entries will be passed for each of the LCs for which commission
was accrued.
Amendment
An amendment is an advice by the issuing bank of any proposed change to the terms and
conditions of a LC. Any term of an LC can be changed or deleted, or new terms can be
introduced, provided the change is acceptable to all parties. The beneficiary and any confirming
bank may choose to accept or reject any amendment generated by the applicant. Under UCP 600
amendment confirmation must be communicated.
Negotiating Bank
This is the bank other than the opening bank authorized within the LC terms to give value for
presentation of conforming documents against a LC. This bank may be the advising or confirming
bank.
Latest shipment date
This indicates the latest (last) date that may appear as the shipment or on-board date on any
transport documents required by the LC. Unlike expiry dates, latest shipment dates do not extend
because of holidays.
Straight LC
This refers to the LC payable only at the opening bank or a bank specified within the credit.
Transhipment
Transhipment means unloading from one means of transport and reloading to another means of
transport during the carriage from the place of shipment to the place of final destination stated in
the credit.
Partial Shipment
17-7
This is a portion of less than the total quantity of an order. An LC must permit partial shipments
otherwise the beneficiary has to ship the full value of the LC in a single shipment.
INCO Terms
INCO terms refer to a set of 13 international standard trade terms. They allow the seller and
buyer to designate a point at which costs and risks of transport are precisely divided between
them.
Draft
This is a financial instrument indicating debt by one party (the drawee who is responsible for
payment) to another (the drawer to whom payment is due). Drafts may be drawn at sight for
immediate payment or after a certain number of days.
17-8
18. Screen Glossary
18.1 Function ID List
The following table lists the function id and the function description of the screens covered as part
of this User Manual.
Function ID
Function Description
BCDAMTEX
Bills & Collections Exchange Rate Type Maintenance
BCDCOMCD
Bills & Collections Commodity Code Maintenance
BCDDOCCD
Bills & Collections Document Code Maintenance
BCDFFTCD
Bills & Collections Free Format Code Maintenance
BCDINCOD
Bills & Collections INCO Term Document Maintenance
BCDINSCO
Bills & Collections Insurance Company Maintenance
EIDMANPR
Mandatory Batch Program Maintenance
LCDAMEND
Letters of Credit Amendment Confirmation Input
LCDAVMNT
Letters Of Credit Availment Detail
LCDBKLST
Black Listed Transaction Input
LCDBRPRM
Letters of Credit Branch Parameters Maintenance
LCDCLAMA
Letters of Credit Clause Code Maintenance
LCDEXPDT
Trade License Details
LCDOPNPL
Open Policy Maintenance
LCDPRMNT
Letters Of Credit Product Definition
LCDTRANF
Letters of Credit Transfer Input
LCDTRAUT
Letters Of Credit Authorize Contract
LCDTREAS
Letters of Credit Contract Reassign
LCDTRONL
Letters Of Credit Contract Detailed
LCDTRPAY
Letters of Credit Payment Input
LCRFNREP
Confirmed Letters of Credit Report
18-1
Function ID
Function Description
LCRLYREP
Daily Activity Report
LCRPACCR
Accruals Control Report
LCRPACR
Commission Activity 3
LCRPCAC
Commission Activity Report
LCRPCACT
Commission Activity 2
LCRPCODU
Commission Due Report
LCRPCOLC
Letters of Credit Due To Be Closed
LCRPCOLI
Closed Letters Of Credits
LCRPDUE
Letters of Credit Due To Be Expired
LCRPEX
Expired Letters Of Credit with Outstanding Items
LCRPEXP
Letters Of Credit Process Exception Report
LCRPOPN
Open Ended Letters Of Credits
LCRPOVD
Letters of Credit Contract Overrides Report
LCRPUNTR
Unreplied Tracer Report
LCSAMEND
Letters of Credit Amendment Confirmation Summary
LCSAVMNT
Letters Of Credit Availment Summary
LCSTRONL
Letters Of Credit Contract Summary
18-2
Letters of Credit
[May] [2012]
Version 12.0
Oracle Corporation
World Headquarters
500 Oracle Parkway
Redwood Shores, CA 94065
U.S.A.
Worldwide Inquiries:
Phone: +1.650.506.7000
Fax: +1.650.506.7200
www.oracle.com/ financial_services/
Copyright © [2012] Oracle Financial Services Software Limited. All rights reserved.
No part of this work may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, adopted or transmitted in any form or by any means,
electronic, mechanical, photographic, graphic, optic recording or otherwise, translated in any language or computer
language, without the prior written permission of Oracle Financial Services Software Limited.
Due care has been taken to make this document and accompanying software package as accurate as possible. However,
Oracle Financial Services Software Limited makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and
shall not be responsible for any loss or damage caused to the user by the direct or indirect use of this document and the
accompanying Software System. Furthermore, Oracle Financial Services Software Limited reserves the right to alter,
modify or otherwise change in any manner the content hereof, without obligation of Oracle Financial Services Software
Limited to notify any person of such revision or changes.
All company and product names are trademarks of the respective companies with which they are associated.
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement